R-01-03-22-12G3 - 3/22/2001RESOLUTION NO. R- 01- 03- 22 -12G3
WHEREAS, the City of Round Rock has duly advertised for bids for
the Inspection Center Remodel at the Public Works Annex, and
WHEREAS, Richmond Industries has submitted the lowest responsible
bid, and
WHEREAS, the City Council wishes to accept the bid of Richmond
Industries, Now Therefore
BE IT RESOLVED BY THE COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF ROUND ROCK, TEXAS,
That the bid of Richmond Industries is hereby accepted as the
lowest responsible bid and subject to the negotiation and final
approval by the City Manager and City Attorney of a contract document,
the Mayor is hereby authorized and directed to execute a contract with
Richmond Industries for the Inspection Center Remodel at the Public
Works Annex.
The City Council hereby finds and declares that written notice of
the date, hour, place and subject of the meeting at which this
Resolution was adopted was posted and that such meeting was open to the
public as required by law at all times during which this Resolution and
the subject matter hereof were discussed, considered and formally acted
upon, all as required by the Open Meetings Act, Chapter 551, Texas
Government Code, as amended, and the Act.
RESOLVED this 22nd day of Mar
RO: A. STLUKA, ., Mayor
AT ST: City of Round Rock, Texas
City Secretary
C// 1,n1G mh2nAtz, A5S1
K \ WPDOCS \RRSOLUTI \R10322G3.WPD /ee
March 02, 1999
Mr. Larry Madsen, Public Works Constr. Mgr.
City of Round Rock
2008 Enterprise Dr.
Round Rock, Texas 78664
RE: Inspections Center Remodel
2008 Enterprise Drive
Round Rock, Texas 78664
Dear Mr. Madsen:
The bid process for the above referenced project was completed February 27, 2001. Nine (9) bids were
received of Ten (10) prospective bidders. Bidders submitted pricing on a base bid with no alternates. All of
the nine (9) bidders were determined to be eligible, having submitted correctly, acknowledged receipt of all
addenda and included the required five percent (5 %) bid bonding.
Upon completion of the bid analysis, it was determined that "Richmond industries, Inc." was the low bidder
for the referenced project "Inspections Center Remodel." We have completed our reference check of the
submitted list of references and find respondents submitting comments such as "diligent, conscientious,
excellent experience and management of costs and scheduling." To this end we find sufficient reason to
recommend proceeding with the proposed project under the construction direction of "Richmond Industries,
Inc."
We have forwarded, under separate cover, the list of verified references. Should you have any further
questions or need for clarifications, please contact me.
Cordially,
J. Michael Faulk, RA
510 0130w -0l.wpd
J. Michael Faulk, Architects /Constr. Mgrs.
8905 Joachim Lane
Austin, Texas 78717
512/388-6302
Pax: 512/218 - 1349
03/05/2001 MON 08:17 [T% /R% NO 6059] 1J003
t'4'S
;:tip'. '•ti;;5'�4" ?:i�Y
:oqr.
µµ����
aiiiii
c1Yr9¢�Ctibfi eF
i..b•
■
.iii
r r +bar
Contactor
Base Bid
Bettemiant Fund
Adden, S1 Bid Bond
Aztec Construction, Inc.
$157,000.00
S 95ooaonduced
x x
Bart Company, The
No Bid
No Ed
NB
Na
C. Young & Co.
$191,054.00
i
5d5a00aMum
x
x
Chasco
$157,000,00
58,50003Included
x
FT Woods, csi
$199,965.00
se.co0 ao„deded
x
x
MB Home Construction
$142,500.00
__
99500 COt+aeaed
x
x
Morgan Construction
$189,700.00
s13.500 00rduded
*NO
x
x
x
x
Pri meStore
$162,216.00
Richmond Industries
$133,156.00
sa500mumeded x
cc
estport Group, Inc.
$169,455.00
s9500901radded
x
x .
I
•
i
PUBLIC WORKS ANNEX
S GRAPHICSSCOUNCQ. AGENDA 71F.N1S Engmainz\ W -01411PUBLIC WORKS ANNEX 0341 -01
DATE: March 16, 2001
SUBJECT: City Council Meeting — March 22, 2001
ITEM: 12.G.3. Consider a resolution authorizing the Mayor to execute a contract
with Richmond Industries for the Inspection Center Remodel at the
Public Works Annex. Nine bids were received and opened on
February 27, 2001. Richmond Industries submitted the lowest bid in
the amount of $133,156.00. The former environmental lab will be
renovated into offices and a conference room for the seven
construction inspectors with the Public Works Department. This
office remodel will provide additional meeting room space for pre -
construction meetings for city and private development projects.
Resource: Jim Nuse, Public Works Director
Larry Madsen, Construction Manager
History: The former environmental lab will be renovated into offices and a conference room
for the seven construction inspectors with the Public Works Department. This office
remodel will provide additional meeting room space for pre - construction meetings for
city and private development projects.
Funding:
Cost: $133,156.00
Source of funds:
Outside Resources: Richmond Industries
General Self Financed Construction
Impact: This remodel will provide additional office space in the main Public Works building
for new staff. As well as more availability of the conference room.
Benefit: The utilization of the vacant building will provide more office space for the Public
Works Department, especially for the Traffic Division.
Public Comment: N/A
Sponsor: N/A
£-o)-O3-4 -la
PROJECT MANUAL
INCLUDING SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF
"ROUND ROCK INSPECTIONS CENTER REMODEL."
CITY OF ROUND ROCK
AT
2608 ENTERPRISE DRIVE
ROUND ROCK, TEXAS 78664
PREPARED BY:
J. Michael Faulk, Architects /Constr.Mgrs.
8905 Joachim Lane
Round Rock, Texas 78717
512/388 -6302
Architect's Project#: 013
Date of Issue: February 03, 2001
sx•r. 02 /2 SA Z
SET NO. i
SECTION 00000.5
100 %ASBESTOS FREE CONSTRUCTION
CONTRACTOR NOTE
THE CONTRACTOR, INCLUDING HIS SUBCONTRACTORS, SUB-SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS,
AGENTS AND EMPLOYEES, SHALL NOT PROVIDE NOR INSTALL ANY ASBESTOS OR ASBESTOS
CONTAINING MATERIALS. SUCH PROVISION OR INSTALLATION OF ANY SUCH MATERIALS
SHALL CONSTITUTE DEFECTIVE WORK NOT IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE CONTRACT
DOCUMENTS, AND THE CONTRACTOR SHALL, AT HIS SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE COST, REMOVE
SAID ASBESTOS OR ASBESTOS - CONTAINING MATERIALS IN COMPLIANCE WITH CURRENT
GUIDELINES ESTABLISHED BY THE ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY FOR REMOVAL OF
ASBESTOS OR ASBESTOS - CONTAINING MATERIALS.
NOTE: ALL MATERIALS USED IN THIS CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE 100 %ASBESTOS FREE.
THE CONTRACTOR AND ALL SUBCONTRACTORS SHALL PROVIDE "MSDS" SHEETS FOR
ALL MATERIALS INSTALLED DURING THIS CONSTRUCTION AND CONTRACTOR SHALL
PROVIDE SUCH MATERIALS IN ONE SEPARATE 3 -RING NOTEBOOK FOR THE OWNERS
RECORD UPON PROJECT COMPLETION.
100% ASBESTOS FREE CONSTRUCTION - SECTION 00000 5
CONTRACTOR NOTE - PAGE - 1
SECTION 00001
PROJECT MANUAL
INCLUDING SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF
"ROUND ROCK INSPECTION CENTER REMODEL"
CITY OF ROUND ROCK
AT
2008 ENTERPRISE DRIVE
ROUND ROCK, TEXAS 78664
CITY COUNCIL
MAYOR: Robert Stluka
MAYOR PRO -TEM: Martha Chavez
Councilman : Earl Hairston
Councilman : Rick Stewart
Councilman : Earl Parimer
Councilman : Tom Nielson
Councilman : Jimmy Joseph
CITY MANAGER: BOB BENNETT
PREPARED BY:
J. Michael Fauk, Architects
8905 Joachim Lane
Austin, Texas 78717
512/388 -6302
Architect's Project#: 013
Date of Issue: February 03, 2001
4,p, ocksies
OWNER:
ARCHITECT:
SOIL ENGINEER:
SOIL TESTING:
CIVIL/STRUCT. ENGINEERS:
MECH., ELEC.
& PLUMBING ENGINEERS:
LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT:
PROJECT DIRECTORY
CITY OF ROUND ROCK
2008 Enterprise
Round Rock, Texas 78664
ATTN: Mr. Larry Madsen, Public Works Constr. Mgr.
Phone: (512) 218 -5552
Fax: (512) 218-5563
J. Michael Faulk, Architects /Constr.Mgrs.
8905 Joachim Lane
Austin, Texas 78717
ATTN: Mike Faulk
Phone: (512) 388 -6302
Fax: (512) 218-1349
None Required
None Required
None Required
ATS
4611 Bee Caves Rd., Suite 200
Austin, Texas 78746
ATTN: Rick Roberts
Phone: (512) 328 -6995
Fax: (512) 328-6996
None Required
SECTION 00002
END OF PROJECT DIRECTORY
00002 -1
Bidding and Contract Requirements:
Division 1 - General Requirements:
00003 - 1
SECTION - 00003
TABLE OF CONTENTS
00000.5 100% Asbestos Free Document 1
00001 Cover Page 1
00002 Project Directory 1
00003 Table of Contents 1 -3
00005 Plan Rooms 1
00008 Advertisement for bids 1
00100 Instructions to Bidders 1-4
00300 Bid Form 1-6
00500 Form of Agreement (CORR) 1 -3
00610 Construction Bond Forms (A.I.A.; A310 1 -2
00620 Performance and Materials Bonds 1 -5
00630 Sample forms 1 -3
00700 General Conditions (CORR) 1-46
01010 Summary of Work 1 -3
01023 Betterment Fund 1
01041 Project Coordination 1 -2
01045 Cutting and Patching 1 -2
01050 Field Engineering 1
01090 Reference Standards 1-6
01152 Applications for Payment. 1
01200 Project Meetings 1 -2
01310 Construction Progress Schedule 1 -2
01340 Submittals and Substitutions 1 -3
01370 Schedule of Values 1
01400 Quality Control 1 -2
01410 Testing Laboratory Services 1 -2
01425 Wage Rates 1 -2
01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls 1 -2
01501 Maintenance of Traffic 1
01570 Traffic Regulation 1 -2
01580 Project Identification and Signs 1 -2
01640 Product Handling 1
01650 Starting of Mechanical Systems 1 -2
01660 Testing, Adjusting & Balancing
of Environmental Systems 1 -2
01700 Contract Closeout 1 -2
01710 Cleaning 1 -3
01720 Project Record Documents 1 -3
01730 Operation and Maintenance Data 1-4
01740 Warranties and Bonds 1 -5
Division 2 - Site Work:
02222 Favation 1 -2
02223 Backfilling 1 -3
02250 Compaction Control 1 -2
02514 Portland Cement Concrete Paving 1 -5
02528 Concrete Curbs 1 -2
Division 3 - Concrete:
03100 Concrete Formwork 1-4
03200 Concrete Reinforcement 1 -2
03300 Cast -In -Place Concrete 1 -5
03346 Concrete Floor Finishing 1 -2
Division 4 - Masonry:
04100 Mortar 1 -3
04340 Reinforced Una Masonry System 1 -5
Division 5 - Metals: Not Used
Division 6 - Wood and Plastics;
06100 Rough Carpentry 1 -2
06114 Wood Blocking and Curbing 1 -2
06200 Finish Carpentry 1 -3
06400 Architectural Woodwork 1 -
Division 7 - Thermal and Moisture Protection:
07210 Building Insulation 1 -2
07920 Caulking and Sealants 1 -5
Division 8 - Doors and Windows:
08100 Metal Doors and Frames 1 -3
08200 Wood and Plastic Doors 1 -2
08410 Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts 1 -2
08710 Finish Hardware 1 -3
08800 Glazing 1 -3
Division 9 - Finishes.
09659 Resilient Flooring 1 -2
09697 Carpeting Gluedown 1 -5
09900 Painting 1 -7
Division 10 - Specialties:
10410 Identifying Devices 1 -2
10420 Plaques 1
10800 Toilet and Bath Accessories 1 -3
00003 - 2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Division 11 - Equipment: Not Used
Division 12 - Fumishinos: Not Used
Division 13 - Special Construction: Not Used
Division 14 - Convening Systems: Not Used
Division 15 - Mechanical:
15010 General Requirements 1 -3
15140 Supports &Anchors 4-6
15190 Mechanical Identification 7 -9
15260 Pipe Insulation 10 -12
15290 Ductwork Insulation 13 -16
15410 Plumbing Piping 17 -22
15535 Refrigeration Piping & Specialties 23 -27
15671 Air Cooled Condensing Units 28 -31
15855 Air Handling Units 32 -35
15890 Duct Work 36 -38
15910 Duct Work Accessories 39
Division 16 - Electrical:
16010 Electrical 42-45
16110 Conduits & Raceways 46-49
16120 Wire & Cable 50 -51
16130 Boxes 52 -54
16190 Supporting Devices 55 -56
16195 Electrical identification 57 -58
16441 Enclosed Switches 59 -60
16470 Panel Boards 61-63
16481 Enclosed Motor Controllers 64 -66
16510 Interior Luminaires 67-69
00003 - 3
AGC
CITY OF ROUND ROCK
2008 Enterprize
Public Works
Round Rock, Texas 78664
SECTION 00005
PLAN ROOMS
Proposed Contract Documents may be examined at the following locations:
ABC (ASSOCIATED BUILDERS AND CONTRACTORS) P:719 -5263
3006 Longhorn Blvd., Suite 104 F:719 -3278
Austin, Texas 78758
(ASSOCIATED GENERAL CONTRACTORS) P:442 -7887
609 South Lamar F:442 -3503
Austin, Texas 78704
DODGE REPORTS (F.W. DODGE CORP.) P:458 -1341
505 East Huntland F:467 -2806
Suite 310
Austin, Texas 78752
END OF SECTION
218 -5552
SECTION 00008
ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS
Sealed bids addressed to the Purchasing Agent, City of Round Rock, 221 E. Main, Round
Rock, Texas 78664, furnishing all labor, materials, and equipment and performing all work
required for:
PROJECT: City of Round Rock Inspection Center Remodel
2008 Enterprise Drive
Round Rock, Texas 78664
will be received under 2:00 p.m., Tuesday, February 27, 2001, then publicly opened and
read at City Council Chambers, 1st Floor at the above "Purchasing Agent" address.
BID SECURITY: Bid bond or Cashier's check equal to 5% of base bid shall accompany the
bid.
DOCUMENT PURCHASE: 520.00 non - refundable one set plans and specifications per
contractor.
PREBID CONFERENCE: 2:30 p.m., Tuesday, February 13, 2001, 2008 Enterprise Drive,
Round Rock, Texas (rear parking lot).
Bids shall be submitted on City of Round Rock Bid Form. Plans and specifications can be
obtained at Burks Reprographics in Round Rock, Texas upon payment of a check or
money order in the amount specified. Contractors may contact Burks Reprographics at
Round Rock at 218 -8181.
Documents may be examined at the following places:
F. W. Dodge Office in Austin and Dodge Scan
AGC Offices in Austin
ABC Office in Austin
Bids will be valid for a period for not less than sixty (60) calendar days from the date of the
bid opening.
The owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids, to waive any formalities of the bidding
and to require evidence of qualification for prime bidders and listed subcontractors to
include financial statements.
The successful bidder will be expected to execute the standard contract prepared by the
City of Round Rock, and furnish performance and payment bonds as described in the bid
documents. Contractor and subcontractors shall pay laborers' workmen, and mechanics
the prevailing wage rates as determined by the City of Round Rock.
Publish Dates: February 05, 2001
February 08, 2001
February 12, 2001
00008 - 1
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS - 00100
1. Prior to submitting any proposal, bidders are required to read the plans, specifications,
proposal, contract and bond forms carefully; to inform themselves by their
independent research, test and investigation of the difficulties to be encountered and
judge for themselves of the accessibility of the work and all attending circumstances
affecting the cost of doing the work and the time required for its completion and
obtain all information required to make an intelligent proposal.
2. Should the bidder find discrepancies in, or omissions from the plans, specifications,
or other documents, or should he be in doubt as to their meaning, he should notify at
once the Architect/Engineer and obtain clarification or addendum prior to submitting
any bid.
3. It shall be the responsibility of the bidder to see that his bid is received at the place
and time named in the Notice to Bidders. Bids received after closing time will be
returned unopened.
4. Bids shall be submitted in sealed envelopes plainly marked "Sealed Bid" and showing
the name of the project, the job number if applicable, and the opening date and time.
5. Bids shall be submitted on proposal forms furnished by the City of Round Rock.
6. All proposals shall be accompanied by a certified cashier's check upon a National or
State bank in an amount not less than five percent (5 %) of the total maximum bid
price, payable without recourse to the City of Round Rock, or a bid bond in the same
amount from a reliable surety company, as a guarantee that the bidder will enter into
a contract and execute performance and payment bonds, as stipulated by item 11
below, within ten (10) days after notice of award of contract to him. Proposal
guarantees must be submitted in the same sealed envelope with the proposal.
Proposals submitted without check or bid bonds will not be considered.
7. All bid securities will be returned to the respective bidders within twenty-five (25)
days after bids are opened, except those which the owner elects to hold until the
successful bidder has executed the contract. Thereafter, all remaining securities,
including security of the successful bidder, will be returned within sixty (60) days.
8. Until the award of the contract, the City of Round Rock reserves the right to reject
any and all proposals and to waive technicalities; to advertise for new proposals; or
biddoc.mstlspec
BD -1
to do the work otherwise when the best interest of the City of Round Rock will be
thereby promoted.
9. In case of ambiguity or lack of clarity in the statement of prices in the bids, the City
of Round Rock reserves the right to consider the most favorable analysis thereof, or
to reject the bid. Unreasonable (or unbalanced) prices submitted in a bid may result
in rejection of such bid or other bids.
10. Award of the contract, if awarded, will be made within sixty (60) days after opening
of the proposals, and no bidder may withdraw his proposal within said sixty (60) day
period of time unless a prior award is made.
11. Within ten (10) days after written notification of award of the contract, the successful
bidder must furnish a performance bond and a payment bond in the amount of one-
hundred percent (100 %) of the total contract price. If the total contract price is
$25,000.00 or less, the performance and payment bonds will not be required. Said
performance bond and payment bond shall be from an approved surety company
holding a permit from the State of Texas, with approval prior to bid opening,
indicating it is authorized and admitted to write surety bonds in this state. In the
event the bond exceeds $100,000.00, the surety must also (1) hold a certificate of
authority from the United States secretary of the treasury to qualify as a surety on
obligations permitted or required under federal law; or (2) have obtained reinsurance
for any liability in excess of $100,000.00 from a reinsurer that is authorized and
admitted as a reinsurer in this state and is the holder of a certificate of authority from
the United States secretary of the treasury to qualify as a surety or reinsurer on
obligations permitted or required under federal law.
In determining whether the surety or reinsurer holds a valid certificate of authority,
the City may rely on the list of companies holding certificates of authority as
published in the Federal Register covering the date on which the bond is to be
executed.
12. If the total contract price is less than $25,000.00 the performance and payment bond
requirement will be waived by the City of Round Rock. Payment will be made
following completion of the work.
13. Failure to execute the construction contract within ten (10) days of written
notification of award or failure to furnish the performance bond, or letter of credit if
applicable, and payment bond as required by item 11 above, shall be just cause for
the annulment of the award. In case of the annulment of the award, the proposal
biddoc.msdspec BD -2
guarantee shall become the property of the City of Round Rock, not as a penalty, but
as a liquidated damage.
14. No contract shall be binding upon the City of Round Rock until it has been signed by
its Mayor after having been duly authorized to do so by the City Council.
15. The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has furnished
certification of all insurance required and such has been approved by the City of
Round Rock, nor shall the contractor allow any subcontractor to commence work on
his subcontract until proof of all similar insurance that is required of the subcontractor
has been furnished and approved. The certificate of insurance form included in the
contract documents must be used by the Contractor's insurer to furnish proof of
insurance.
16. Any quantities given in any portion of the contract documents, including the plans,
are estimates only, and the actual amount of work required may differ somewhat from
the estimates. The basis for the payment shall be the actual amount of work done
and/or material furnished.
17. Bids shall be submitted on a separated contract basis. No Texas sales tax shall be
included in the prices bid for materials consumed or incorporated into the finished
product under this contract. This contract is issued by an organization which is
qualified for exemption pursuant to the provisions of Section 151.309(5) of the Texas
Tax Code. The City of Round Rock will issue an exemption certificate to the
Contractor. The Contractor must then issue a resale certificate to the material
supplier for materials purchased. The Contractor must have a valid sales tax permit
in order to issue a resale certificate.
In obtaining consumable materials, the Contractor will issue a resale certificate in lieu of
payment of sales tax, and the following conditions shall be observed;
1) The contract will transfer title of consumable, but not incorporate, materials
to the City of Round Rock at the time and point of receipt by the Contractor;
2) The Contractor will be paid for these consumable materials by the City of
Round Rock as soon as practicable. Payment will not be made directly but
considered subsidiary to the pertinent bid item. The Contractor's monthly
estimate will state that the estimate includes consumables that were received
during the month covered by the estimate; and
3) The designated representative of the City of Round Rock must be notified as
soon as possible of the receipt of these materials so that an inspection can be
made by the representative. Where practical, the materials will be labeled as
biddoc.mst/spec BD -
the property of the City of Round Rock.
18. No conditional bids will be accepted.
19. If the bidder's insurance company is authorized, pursuant to its agreement with
bidder, to arrange for the replacement of a loss, rather than by making a cash payment
directly to the City of Round Rock, the insurance company must furnish or have
furnished by bidder, a performance bond in accordance with Section 2253.021(b),
Texas Government Code, and a payment bond in accordance with Section
2253.021(c).
biddoc.mstlspec BD -4
DATE: February 27th, 2001
TO: Purchasing Agent
The City Of Round Rock
221 East Main Street
Round Rock, Texas 78664
FROM: Ir- 1 GHtnOJ 0
V,o, BoX •48
BID FORM:
SECTION 00300 ,
-T4 - n la Di( ' BIDDER
TIME: 2:00 P.M.
ADDRESS
CITY /STATE
Gt. O C -t w,-t rTY\ 8 6
Operating as (strke out conditions that do not apply) , a Corporation, organized
and existing under the law of the State of Texas
CQ
BASE BID:
1. Having become completely familiar with the local conditions affecting the cost of work at the places
where work is to be executed, and having carefully examined the conditions as they currently east, and
having carefully examined the proposed Contract Documents prepared by the Architects together with
any addenda to such Contract Documents as listed hereinafter, the undersigned hereby proposes and
agrees to provide all labor, materials, plant, equipment, transportation and other facilities as necessary
and/or required to execute all of the work descnbed by the aforesaid Contract Documents as follows:
A. All Base Bid Work For The Citv of Round Rock Inspections Center
OfO Nun/Aec4 710 :6 % T/ieusndo fitees/
Dollars $ I33 /56 •,r
r Six /3oua9-e5
NOTE: it Is the Intent of the City of Round Rock to award a Single Lump Sum Bid for the Project
as defined In the Base Bid and any Alternates.
ALTERNATES:
2. The undersigned proposes to perform altemates for stated resulting additions or deductions
from the Base Bid. Additions and deductions shall include any modifications of work or
00300 -1
additional work that the undersigned may deem to be required to perform by reason of the
acceptance or rejection of any alternate, including allowances for overhead and profit, and
within the established time for completion. All Bidders are required to provide a bid for
each Alternate, or their bid will be considered invalid. (Note: Include all alternates as
required by the proposed Contract Documents and Addenda).
A. Alternate #1. "Not Used: ", Adjust the Base Bid by ADDING /DEDUCTING:
DOLLARS $
B. Altemate #2. "Not Used : ", Adjust the Base Bid by ADDING/DEDUCTING:
DOLLARS $
C. Alternate #3. "Not Used: ", Adjust the Base Bid by ADDING/DEDUCTING:
DOLLARS $
D. Alternate #4. "Not Used : ", Adjust the Base Bid by ADDING/DEDUCTING:
DOLLARS $
E. Alternate #5. "Not Used: ", Adjust the Base Bid by ADDING /DEDUCTING:
(at $ per SF)
DOLLARS$
F. Alternate #6. "Not Used: ", Adjust the Base Bid by ADDING /DEDUCTING:
(at $ per SF)
DOLLARS $
G. Altemate #7. "Not Used: ", Adjust the Base Bid By ADDING /DELETING:
DOLLARS $
BETTERMENT FUND:
3. The undersigned acknowledges that included within the Base Bid Are the sums listed below
to be used as a Betterment Allowance, as outlined in the Specifications. These amounts are
a part of the respective Base Bid as specked by in Section 01023 - Betterment Fund.
A. Betterment Fund:
.1 G HT) ¶ i J 0 1 -)- 1I11.1Y) Dollars $ € 500.
00300 - 2
TESTING ALLOWANCE:
4. The undersigned acknowledges that included within the Base Bid is a sum listed below to be
used for materials testing.
A. Testing Allowance of Three Thousand Five Hundred and no /100's dollars ($3,500.00)
ADDENDA ACKNOWLEDGMENT:
5. The undersigned acknowledges receipt of the following addenda: (List by number and date
appearing on addenda.)
Addendum No Date Addendum No Date
Z/2 34 l
TIME OF COMPLETION:
6. The undersigned agrees to complete all work under this Contract within the dates specified
in the agreement and as set forth herein as One Hundred Twenty (120) calendar days from
the "Notice to Proceed."
LIQUIDATED DAMAGES:
7. The undersigned agrees to the completion schedule enumerated above and agrees to a
damage amount of Three Hundred dollars ($150.00) per day assessed at 5:00 pm each day
the construction is not complete beyond the agreed date of °Substantial Completion" as
described in the Agreement and the General Conditions.
CHANGES IN WORK:
8. The undersigned agrees that when changes in work are ordered which involve extra cost over
and above contract sum, and when such work due to an emergency is ordered to proceed on
basis of cost -plus -fee, such fee shall be as required by the "General Conditions ".
BID GUARANTEE:
9. Bid Guarantee in the amount of five percent (5 %) of the total amount of the Bid is attached,
in the sum of which is to become the property of the Owner in the event the Contract and Per-
formance and Labor and Material Payment Bond are not executed within the time set forth,
as liquidated damages for the delay and additional work caused the Owner. Bid Guarantee
shall be in the form of a cashier's check or Bid Bond, only. The amount of the bid guarantee
shall not be less than five percent (5 %) of the total of the Base Bid and all add
alternates.
00300 - 3
CONTRACT:
10. The undersigned agrees that upon receipt of the notice of acceptance of this bid, he will
execute the formal Contract and acknowledgment and indemnification agreement, and will
deliver all required, proper bonds and proof of insurance coverage as may be required by the
Contract Documents.
11. The undersigned further agrees to execute the formal Contract and acknowledgment and
indemnification agreement within ten (10) days from date of notice to acceptance of this bid,
and in case the undersigned fails or neglects to appear within the specified time to execute the
Contract, the undersigned will be considered as having abandoned the Contract, and the
Cashiers Check or Bid Bond accompanying this bid will be forfeited to the Owner by reason
of such failure on the part of the undersigned.
12. The undersigned further agrees that the bid security may be retained by the Owner and that
said bid guarantee shall remain with the Owner until the Contract and indemnification
agreement has been signed and Performance and Labor and Material Payment Bonds have
been made and delivered to the Owner.
GENERAL STATEMENT:
13. The Owner shall apply for and secure a Building Permit and will pay for any Water meter
deposits (to be reimbursed at a later date). The Contractor shall pay for the structural
inspections which are by H.O.T. Inspection Service of Round Rock and charged by the square
foot (where applicable). The Owner is also responsible for obtaining and paying for all other
Permits and fees for the project where applicable. Contractor shall coordinate the forces of
the Owner for installation of Data, Phone and Cable. Insurance of the owner's forces shall not
be required of the general contractor. Contractor shall purchase and install a "Knox Box" from
the Fire Department and shall provide location coordination with the Fire Inspector. The
contractor shall provide a 4'x8' Job Sign with written information as will be required by the
Architect. No perspective graphics will be required. Job Sign Allowance shall be Five
Hundred Dollars ($500.00)
14. The City of Round Rock is a Tax Exempt organization.
15. The undersigned has checked all of the above figures, and understands that Owner will not
be responsble for any errors or omissions on this part of the undersigned in preparing this bid.
16. In submitting this bid, it is understood that the right is reserved by the Owner to accept or reject
any or all of the Bids and Altemates submitted, and waive all formalities or informalities in
connection therewith. Reference note In Item one of the bid form for additional
information.
17. In submitting this bid, it is understood and agreed that this bid may NOT be withdrawn
for a period of sixty (60) days from the date and time of opening.
18. Wherever in this bid an amount is stated in both words and figures, in case of
discrepancy between words and figures, the written words shall govern.
19. Not Used:
20. The undersigned declares that the person or persons signing this Bid Form is /are fully
authorized to sign on behalf of the firm listed and to fully bind the firm listed to all the
conditions and provisions thereof.
00300 - 4
21. It is agreed that no person or persons or company other than the firm listed below or
as otherwise Indicated has any interest whatsoever in this bid or the Contract may be
entered into as a result of the bid and tliat in all respects the proposal is legal and firm,
submitted in good faith without collusion or fraud.
22. It is agreed that the undersigned has complied or will comply with all requirements of
local, state, and national laws, and that no legal requirement has been or will be violated
in making or accepting this bld, in awarding the contract to him, and/or in the
prosecution of the work required.
PRINCIPALS:
23. The names and addresses of all persons interested in this bid as Principals are as
follows:
S 131 - TT c -I noMo1 i'n s) ENT"
c nr,W- O u S r L S
If the bidder is a corporation, give legal name of corporation, State where Incorporated, and names,
titles, and addresses of three (3) corporate officers, including the President; if a partnership, give
name of the firm and names and addresses of all the partners; if an individual, give full name and
address; if joint venture or joint association give legal name of joint venture or joint association,
names of member firms, information regarding member firms shall be provided as required above.
00300 - 5
24. The undersigned Is a business which is licensed In accordance with the requirements of
the State of Texas, License number 1,7%0 71..
Respectful) Submitted, this 4 Z-- - 1
day of R ,.1e 2,0 0 1
(Firm Name) SL \C N'M 6rNA VS� Ilk i 5'7t.
(Address) .0. n X 5 4-
st -7 6 6 2 7
(Signature) (. ' 3 1wsAi
(Name Typed) V-Neck r"63--1D S nzu
(Title) S\17 Ed- k.
(SEAL IF BIDDER IS A CORPORATION)
00300 - 6
END OF SECTION
so-$69- 267
SECTION 00500
AGREEMENT FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
REFERENCES:
1. The Form of Agreement between the Owner and the Contractor shall be the form as bound herein.
2. The Agreement shall be executed in not less than triplicate.
3. The effective date of the contract shall be the date executed by the City of Round Rock, and will be so
noted by the City of Round Rock in any development of its extension.
END OF SECTION
THE STATE OF TEXAS §
COUNTY OF WILLIAMSON §
AGREEMENT
THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this 22" day of March , 2001,
by and between (Owner) City of Round Rock, Texas of the State of Texas, acting through
Robert A. Stluka, Jr., Mayor, thereunto duly authorized so to do, hereinafter termed
OWNER, and (Contractor) Richmond Industries, Inc. of Georgetown , Texas, County
of Williamson , and State of Texas, hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR.
WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements
hereinafter mentioned, to be made and performed by OWNER, and under the conditions
expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith, CONTRACTOR hereby agrees with the
said OWNER to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described
as follows:
Further described as the work covered by this specification consists of furnishing all the
materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, supervision, labor, insurance, and other
accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction, in accordance with the
conditions and prices stated in the Proposal attached hereof, and in accordance with the
Notice to Contractors, Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions of Agreement, Special
Conditions, Technical Specifications, Plans, and other drawings and printed or written
explanatory material thereof, and the Specifications and Addenda therefor, as prepared by
J. Michael Faulk, Architects , herein entitled the ARCHITECT, each of
which has been identified by the CONTRACTOR'S written Proposal, the General Conditions
of the Agreement, and the Performance, Payment, and Maintenance Bonds hereof, and
collectively evidence and constitute the entire contract.
The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within 10 calendar days
after the date written notice to do so have been given to him, and to complete the same
within 120 calendar days after the date of the written Notice to Proceed, subject to such
extensions of time as are provided by the General and Special Conditions.
pottmd.mwrspeo master
Round Rock Inspections Center Remodel
PBD -1
The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds the price or prices shown
in the Proposal, which forms a part of this Contract, such payments to be subject to the
General and Special Conditions of the Contract.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this Agreement in the
year and day first above written.
CITY OF ROUND ROCK, TEXAS
(OWNER)
I �
BY: daft r t I JJ
R: 1 " . A. Sit Jr.
Al 1. EST:
Mayor
41 Q JVtL) i
Cl Secretary
(The following to be executed if the Contractor is a Corporation.)
I, S'` tc N fhb r1) , certify that I am the Secretary of the Corporation named
as Contractor herein; that E ,Je 12. 1c , who signed this Contract on behalf
of the Contractor was then ILLS 11, T (official title) of said Corporation, that
said Contract was duly signed for and in behalf . . id Corporation, that said Corporation
by authority of its governing body, and is wi n the a of its corporate powers.
Corporate Seal
postbid mg/spec master
Richmond Industries, Inc.
(CONTRACTOR)
Sign
Steve Richmond its President
(Typed name) (Title)
ST:
Secretary, if Contractor is a
Corporation or otherwise registered
with the Secretary of State
PBD -2
REFERENCES:
SECTION 00610
BID BOND FORM
1. If the Bid Guarantee is submitted in Bid Bond Form, the Bid Bond shall be in the form as bound herein.
END OF SECTION
BID BOND FORM
00610 -1
NOTICE TO CUSTOMER
AS A CONDITION TO THIS TIONS ISSUANCE
OF 71-11S 15 CHECK PURCHASER ER AGR ACREES TO PROVIDE
W
AN DEMNTTY BOND PRIOR TO THE REFUND OR
RFPLAC OF THIS CHECK IN THE EVENT R IS
MISPLACED SPLACED OR STOLEN
*1
FIRST TEXAS BANK
O. BOX 669 a GEORGETOWN. TEXAS T9P27 �y
u'026022» 1 :L149031031:
Richmond Industries
MuTaarr
° g City of Round Rock
1$ -- 7,000.00 --
T IRS T • n °0 j ,, nt �Itn1 ,
HAN,: d. 1 I 411
dnm� AVM,
TWO SIGNATURES REQUIRED FOR ANY AMOUNT OVER SI00,000.
o 27, 2001
26022
86- 31W1149
dollaso
BID BOND
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS THAT WE,
as PRINCIPAL and
as SURETY, are held and firmly bound unto the
hereinafter referred to as the "OWNER ", in the penal sum of
five percent (5 %) of the total amount of the bid of the PRINCIPAL submitted to the
OWNER, for the work described below; for the payment of which sum in lawful money of
the United States of America, well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs,
executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these
presents. In no case shall the liability of the SURETY hereunder exceed the sum of
$
The CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION ARE SUCH, THAT whereas, said
PRINCIPAL has submitted the above mentioned bid to the OWNER, for construction for
the work under the "SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF
for which
bids are to be opened at the office of the OWNER on
NOW THEREFORE, if the PRINCIPAL is awarded the contract, and within the time and
manner required under the heading "Instructions to Bidders ", after the prescribed forms are
presented to him for signature, enters into a written agreement, substantially in the form
contained in the Specifications, in accordance with the bid and files the town bonds with the
OWNER, one to guarantee faithful performance and the other to guarantee payment for labor
and materials, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise, it shall be and remain
in full force and effect.
In the event suit is brought upon this bond by the OWNER and judgement is recovered, said
SURETY shall pay all costs incurred by the OWNER in such suit, including a reasonable
attomey's fee to be fixed by the Court.
In WITNESS WHEREOF, we have hereunto set our hands and seals this day of
Principal: Surety:
By: By:
(Seal) (Seal)
biddoc.mst/spec BD -
REFERENCES:
SECTION 00620
PERFORMANCE AND LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND FORMS
1. The Performance and Labor and Material Payment Bond Forms (bound herein) shall conform to
the requirements of Article 5160 - The McGregor Act - Revised Civil Statues of Texas as amended
by the 56th. Legislature 1959, and each shall have a penal value of 100% of the Contract Amount.
00620 -1
END OF SECTION
PERFORMANCE AND LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND FORMS
THE STATE OF TEXAS
COUNTY OF WILLIAMSON
postbtd mst/spec master
PERFORMANCE BOND
KNOWALLMENBYTHESEPRESENTS: That Richmond Industries, Inc. of the
City of Georgetown , County of Williamson , and State of
Texas , as Principal, and Capitol Indemnity co sthorized under the law
of the State of Texas to act as surety on bonds for principals, 'are held and firmly bound unto
THE CITY OF ROUND ROCK, TEXAS, (Owner), in the penal sum of One Hundred Thirty Three
Thousand, One Hundred Fifty Six noddfars ($ 133, 156.00 ) for the payment
whereof, well and truly to be made the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their
heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, by these
presents:
WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Owner dated
the 22nd day of March x19 200 Ito which the
contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if
copied at length herein consisting of:
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the
said Principal shall faithfully perform said Contract and shall, in all respects, duly and
faithfully observe and perform all and singular the covenants, conditions and agreements in
and by said Contract, agreed and covenanted by the Principal to be observed and performed,
including but not limited to, the repair of any and all defects in said work occasioned by and
resulting from defects in materials furnished by or workmanship of, the Principal in
performing the work covered by said Contract and occurring within a period of twelve (12)
months from the date of the contract Completion Certificate and all other covenants and
conditions, according to the true intent and meaning of said Contract and the Plans and
Specifications hereto annexed, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full
force and effect;
PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter
2253, Texas Government code, as amended, and all liabilities on this bond shall be
determined in accordance with the provisions of said Chapter 2253 to the same extent as if
it were copied at length herein.
PBD -3
Bond #776534
PERFORMANCE BOND (continued)
Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration
or addition to the term of the contract, or to the work performed thereunder, or the plans,
specifications, or drawings accompanying the same, shall in anywise affect its obligation on
this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration
or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the work to be performed thereunder.
1
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this
instrument this 22nd day of March
19 2001
Richmond Industries, Inc.
Principal
/ .�.n , / By: ( a,, (i/ - (N,[ 1
0))"4
Title
PO Box 548
Address
Georgetown, Texas 78627
Resident Agent of Surety:
C.A. Schutze Agency
Printed Name
PO Box 3547
Address
Austin, Texas 78764
City, State & Zip Code
Title
Janis A. Winkler, Attorney -in -Fact
Address
PO Box 5900
Madison, WI 53705 -0900
1
1
1
Capitol Indemnity Corporation
Surety
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
`;;7,%,e
1
Signature Steve Schutze
1
postbid m spec master PBD -4 1
1
THE STATE OF TEXAS
COUNTY OF WILLIAMSON
PAYMENT BOND
Bond #776534
KNOWALL•MENBYTHESEPRESENTS: That Richmond Industries, Inc. , of the
City of Georgetown County of Williamson , and State of
Texas as Principal, and capitol Indemnity c (ziorized under the laws of the
State of Texas to act as Surety on Bonds for Principals, are held and firmly bound unto THE
CITY OF ROUND ROCK, (OWNER), and all subcontractors, .workers, laborers,
mechanics and suppliers as their interest may appear, all of whom shall have the right to sue
upon this bond, in the penal sum of One Hundred Thirty Three Thousand, One Hundred Fifty
Six and no/100---- Dollars ($ 133, 156.00 ) ' for the • payment
whereof, well and truly be made the said Principal and Surety bind themselves and their
heirs, administrators, executors, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, by these
presents:
WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Owner, dated
the 22nd day of March , 19c which Contract is
hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at
length herein consisting of:
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said
Principal shall well and truly pay all subcontractors, workers, laborers, mechanics, and
suppliers, all monies to them owing by said Principals for subcontracts, work, labor,
equipment, supplies and materials done and furnished for the construction of the
improvements of said Contract, then this obligation shall be and become null and void;
otherwise to remain in full force and effect.
PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter
2253, Texas Government code, as amended, and all liabilities on this bond shall be
determined in accordance with the provisions of said Chapter 2253 to the same extent as if
it were copied at Length herein.
postbid ms/spec master
PBD -5
PAYMENT BOND (continued)
Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration
or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the work performed thereunder, or the plans,
specifications or drawings accompanying the same shall in anywise affect it's obligation on
this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration
or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the work to be performed thereunder.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this
Instrument this 22 nd day of March 1 49 200)
Richmond Industries, Inc.
Principal
By 1i� rr.
Title
Address
PO Box 548
Georgetown, Texas 78627
Resident Agent of Surety:
C.A. Schutze Agency
Printed Name
PO Box 3547
Address
Austin, Texas 78764
City, State & Zip Code
Signature S teve Schutze D '
postbid mst/spec raster
PBD -6
Capitol Indemnity Corporation
Surety
By:
Janis A. Winkler Attorney -in -Fact
Title
PO Box 5900
Address
Madison, WI 53705 -0900
SECTION 00630
SAMPLE FORMS AND CERTIFICATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Comply with contract conditions requirements and specified administrative procedures in
closing out work.
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Section 01700 - "Contract Closeout ".
B. Section 01740 - Warranties and Bonds ".
C. General and Supplementary General Conditions.
1.3 APPLICATION AND CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT
A. Application for Payment shall be as required in Division 1, Section 01311 entitled "Schedules
and Reports".
1.4 CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be "AIA Document G704. Certificate of
Substantial Completion, April, 1978, Edition."
B. Supplements:
The following supplements modify, change, delete,
or add to the Certificate of Substantial Completion. Where any article of the Certificate of
Substantial Completion is modified or any paragraph deleted, subparagraph or clause
thereof is modified or deleted by these supplements, the unaltered provisions of such ar-
ticle, paragraph, subparagraph or clause shall remain in effect
1. Under "Definition of Date of Substantial
Completion" delete all wording and insert the following:
The date of substantial completion of the Work or designated portion thereof (or
the date of beneficial Occupancy) is the date certified by the Architect when
construction is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract
Documents, so the Owner can fully occupy and utilize the Work or designated
portion thereof for which it is intended, with all of the Project's parts and systems
operable as required by the Contract Documents where all Work is complete,
accessible, operable and usable by the Owner and all parts, systems and site
work are 100% complete and cleaned for the Owner's use. Only incidental cor-
rective work under "punchlists" and final cleaning (if required) beyond cleaning
needed for the Owner's full use may remain for Final Completion.
The term "Beneficial Occupancy" is interchangeable with the term "Substantial
Completion ".
1.5 CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT OF PAYMENT OF DEBTS AND CLAIMS
A. The Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims shall be "AIA Document
G706, Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims, April, 1970, Edition."
B. Supplement:
B. Supplements:
The following supplements modify, change, delete,
or add to the Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims Form is modified or
any paragraph deleted, subparagraph or clause thereof is modified, or deleted by these
supplements, the unaltered provisions of such article, paragraph, subparagraph or
clause shall remain in effect.
1.6 CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT OF RELEASE OF LIENS
A. The Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens shall be "AIA Document G706a, Contractor's
Affidavit of Release of Liens, April, 1970, Edition."
The following supplements modify, change, delete, or add to the Contractor's Affidavit of
Release of Liens. Where any article of the Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens Form is
modrfied or any paragraph deleted, subparagraph or clause thereof is modified or any
paragraph deleted, subparagraph or clause thereof is modified, or deleted by these
supplements, the unaltered provisions of such article, paragraph, subparagraph or clause
shall remain in effect.
1.7 CONSENT OF SURETY COMPANY TO FINAL PAYMENT
A. The Surety's Consent for the Owner to make final payment to the Contractor shall be "AIA
Document G707, Consent of Surety Company to Final Payment, April, 1970, Edition."
1.8 CONSENT OF SURETY TO REDUCTION IN OR PARTIAL RELEASE OF RETAINAGE
A. The Surety's Consent to a change in retainage shall be "AIA Documents G707A, Consent of
Surety to Reduction in or Partial Release of Retainage, June, 1971, Edition."
1.9 AFFIDAVIT FORM
A. The Affidavit Form shall be the standard Affidavit Form as provided herein.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
PRODUCER" '- COMPANIES 'AFFORDING COVERAGE
The Store ..-- 2 ° "m•^ •"1tt• .#
i .J1500 University Ave. ; f .,_ . , 1";Li. d wC ontinent
Suite I 4.08
` Ge rge ow 1 TX ~ 78628 - • - B 4 Ohid'Casualty
-
INSURED
- Rictunond Industries C-Texas Workers Comp. Fund
, Ts P .O. sox 548
: • • 'Georgetown; TX 78627. D '
THIS IS T CERTIFY THAT the Insured named above is insured by the Companies listed above with respect to the business
operations hereinafter described, for the types of insurance and in accordance with the provisions of the standard policies used by the
companies, and further hereinafter described. Exceptions to the policies are noted below.
i CO TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY EFFECTIVE EXPIRATION LIMITS
LTR NUMBER DATE DATE
B AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY BAW52733301
"CERTIFICATE OF LIABIL
A GENERAL LIABILITY
EXCESS LIABILITY
C WORKERS' COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY
OTHER
04 — GL - 000031501 6/2/2000 6/2/2001 GENERAL AGGREGATE 5 1,000,000
PRODUCPS. COMP /OPAGG. 5 1,000,000
PERSONAL & ADV. INJURY S 500,000
EACH OCCURRENCE 5 500,000
FIRE DAMAGE (Any one fire) $ 100,000
• MED. EXPENSE (Any one person) 5 5,000
TSF 0001021846 6/2/2000 6/2/2001
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONS/VEHICLES /SPECIAL ITEMS/EXCEPTIONS
Residential and Commercial Builder
The City of Round Rock is named as additional insured with respect to all policies except Workers' Compensation and Employers' Liability. Should any of the
above described policies by cancelled or changed before the expiration date thereof the issuing company will mail thirty (30) days written notice to the certificate
holder named below.
CERTIFICATE HOLDER:
postbid.mv/spec maser
City of Round Rock
221 E. Main Street
Round Rock, Texas 78664
Mtn: Joanne Land
6/2/2000 6/2/2001 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT S 500,000
S
BODILY INJURY (Per person) S
BODILY INJURY (Per accident) $
PROPERTY DAMAGE S
EACH OCCURRENCE S
AGGREGATE S
STATUTORY LIMITS
Typed Name: Doug L. Groves
PBD -7
Title: Pres.
EACH ACCIDENT S 100,000
DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT S 500,000
DISEASE - EACH EMPLOYEE S 100,000
' CERTIFICATE OF LIABILI1tINSURANCE Date: 3 /20/01
PRODUCER
The Insurance Store
1500 West University Ave.
Suite I1108
1
INSURED Richmond Industries, Inc. C Texas Worker's Comp. Fund
P.O. Box 548
Georgetown, TX 78627 D
THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT the Insured named above is insured by the Companies listed above with respect to the business
operations hereinafter described, for the types of insurance and in accordance with the provisions of the standard policies used by the
' companies, and further hereinafter described. Exceptions to the policies are noted below.
I CO TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY EFFECTIVE EXPIRATION LIMITS
LTR NUMBER DATE DATE
I A
1
I B
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Georgetown, TX 78628
GENERAL LIABILITY 04 —GL- 000031501 6/2/2000 6/2/2001 GENERALAGGREGATE $ 1,000,000
PRODUCTSCOMP /OPAGG. S 1,000,000
PERSONAL & ADV. INJURY $ 500,000
EACH OCCURRENCE S 500,000
FIRE DAMAGE (Any onefre) S 100,000
MED. EXPENSE (Any one person) S 5,000
AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY BAW52733301
EXCESS LIABILITY
C WORKERS' COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY STATUTORY LIMITS
OTHER
postbid ma/spec master
TSF- 0001021846
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONS/VEHICLES /SPECIAL ITEMS/EXCEPTIONS
Residential and Commercial Builder
CERTIFICATE HOLDER: City of Round Rock
221 E. Main Street
Round Rock, Texas 78664
attn: Joanne Land
COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE
A Mid — Continent
B Ohio Casualty
6/2/2000 6/2/2001 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT $ 500,000
BODILY INJURY (Per person) $
BODILY INJURY (Per accident) S
PROPERTY DAMAGE S
PBD -7
SIGN
Title: Pres.
EACH OCCURRENCE S
AGGREGATE S
EACH ACCIDENT $ 100,000
DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $ 500,000
DISEASE- EACHEMPLOYEE S 100,000
The City of Round Rock is named as additional insured with respect to all policies except Workers' Compensation and Employers' Liability. Should any of the
above described policies by cancelled or changed before the expiration date thereof, the issuing company will • thirty (30) days written notice to the certificate
holder named below.
TypedName: Doug L, Groves
RIZED REPRESENTATIVE
Attest:
‘
Virgrline M Schulte Secretary
STATE OF WISCONSIN
COUNTY OF DANE }
STATE OF WISCONSIN
COUNTY OF DANE
}
4610 UNIVERSITY AVENUE, SUITE 1400, MADISON, WISCONSIN 53705 -0900
PLEASE ADDRESS REPLY TO PO BOX 5900 MADISON WI 53705 -0900
PHONE (608) 231 -4450 • FAX 1608) 231 -2029
POWER OF ATTORNEY
Know all men by these Presents, That the CAPITOL INDEMNITY CORPORATION, a
corporation of the State of Wisconsin, having its principal offices in the City of Madison, Wisconsin, does make, constitute
and appoint
STEVE P SCHUTZE,JANIS A WINKLER OR MARY A PIERCE
its true and lawful Attorney(s) -in -fact, to make, execute, seal and deliver for and on its behalf, as surety, and as its act and
deed, any and all bonds, undertakings and contracts of suretyship, provided that no bond or undertaking or contract of
suretyship executed under this authority shall exceed in amount the sum of
NOT TO EXCEED $2,000,000 00
This Power of Attorney is granted and is signed and sealed by facsimile under and by the authority of the following
Resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of CAPITOL INDEMNITY CORPORATION at a meeting duly called and held
on the 5th day of May 1960.
'RESOLVED, that the President and Vice- President, the Secretary or Treasurer, acting individually or otherwise, be and they hereby are granted the power
and authorization to appoint by a Power of Attorney for the purposes only of executing and attesting bonds and undertakings, and other writings obligatory In the
nature thereof, one or more resident vice- presidents, assistant secretaries and altorney(s) -in -fact, each appointee to have the powers and duties usual to such
offices to the business of this company, the signature of such officers and seal of the Company may he affixed to any such power of attorney or to any certificate
relating thereto by facsimile, and any such power of attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signatures or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the
Company, and any such power so executed and certified by facsimile signatures and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company in the future with
respect to any bond or undertaking or other writing obligatory m the nature thereof to which it is attached Any such appointment may be revoked, for cause, or
without cause, by any of said officers, at any time "
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the CAPITOL INDEMNITY CORPORATION has caused these presents to be signed by
its officer undersigned and its corporate seal to be hereto affixed duly attested by its Secretary, this 1st day of June, 1999
CAPITOL INDEMNITY CORPORATION
II
o IC ORPORAT
5EAL (it Fad, Pre.nlcm
*4 411 ' 12 0
s
On the 1st day of June, A D., 1999, before me personally came George A Fait, to me known, who being by me duly
sworn, did depose and say that he resides in the County of Dane. State of Wisconsin, that he is the President of
CAPITOL INDEMNITY CORPORATION, the corporation described in and which executed the above instrument, that he
knows the seal of the said corporation, that the seal affixed to said instrument is such corporate seal, that it was so affixed
by order of the Board of Directors of said corporation and that he signed his name thereto by like order.
INDEMNITY CORPORATION
Jane F Endres
Notary Public, Dane Co , WI
My Commission Expires March 23, 2003
oPinfin
Rv Pin
CERTIFICATE
I, the undersigned. duly elected to the office stated below, now the incumbent in CAPITOL INDEMNITY
CORPORATION, a Wisconsin Corporation, authorized to make this certificate, DO HEREBY CERTIFY that the foregoing
attached Power of Attorney remains in full force and has not been revoked, and furthermore that the Resolution of the
Board of Directors, set forth in the Power of Attorney is now in force
Signed and sealed at the City of Madison Dated the 2 2nd day of March
Paul J are "!' r, Treasurer
No, 5 jn ' Li
2001
X/ InIHIIIM IflI \\ �
This power is valid only if the power of attorney number printed in the upper right hand corner apears in red Photocopies, carbon copies
or other reproductions are not binding on the company Inquiries concerning this power of attorney may be directed to the Bond Manager at the
Home Office of the Capitol Indemnity Corporation
General Conditions of the Contract for Construction
AIA Document A201 - 1997
1997 Edition - Electronic Format
This document has important legal consequences. Consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its completion or modification. AUTHENTICATION OF
THIS ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA DOCUMENT D401.
This document has been approved and endorsed by The Associated General Contractors of America.
Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, O 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. FiReenth Edition.
Reproduction of the material herein or substantial quotation of its provisions without wntten permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United States and
will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
TABLE OF ARTICLES
1. GENERAL PROVISIONS
2. OWNER
3. CONTRACTOR
4. ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
5. SUBCONTRACTORS
6. CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS
7. CHANGES IN THE WORK
8. TIME
9. PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
10. PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
11. INSURANCE AND BONDS
12. UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK
13. MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
14. TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT
AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN
INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W , WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright
laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation
until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201 -1997
User Document: A201.DOC -- 2/9/1999. AIA License Number 111808, which expires on 2/28/2000 -- Page 191
1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS
1.1.1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
1.1.2 THE CONTRACT
The Contract Documents consist of the Agreement between Owner and Contractor (hereinafter the Agreement), Conditions of the Contract
(General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract, other
documents listed in the Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of the Contract. A Modification is (1) a written amendment
to the Contract signed by both parties, (2) a Change Order, (3) a Construction Change Directive or (4) a written order for a minor change
in the Work issued by the Architect. Unless specifically enumerated in the Agreement, the Contract Documents do not include other
documents such as bidding requirements (advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms, the Contractor's bid
or portions of Addenda relating to bidding requirements) .
The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the
parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral. The Contract may be amended or
modified only by a Modification. The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind (1)
between the Architect and Contractor, (2) between the Owner and a Subcontractor or Sub - subcontractor, (3) between the Owner and
Architect or (4) between any persons or entities other than the Owner and Contractor. The Architect shall, however, be entitled to
performance and enforcement of obligations of Contractor under the Contract intended to facilitate performance of the Architect's duties.
1.1.3 THE WORK
ARTICLE I
GENERAL PROVISIONS
The term "Work" means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or partially completed, and
includes all other labor, materials, equipment and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's
obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project. The Work also includes what is reasonably inferable from the
Contract Documents to cause the Project to be fit for its intended purposes.
1.1.4 THE PROJECT
The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part and which
may include construction by the Owner or by separate contractors.
1.1.5 THE DRAWINGS
The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the design, location and dimensions of the Work,
generally including plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules and diagrams.
1.1.6 THE SPECIFICATIONS
The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equipment, systems,
standards and workmanship for the Work, and performance of related services.
1.1.7 THE PROJECT MANUAL
The Project Manual is a volume assembled for the Work which may include the bidding requirements, sample forms, Conditions of the
Contract and Specifications.
1.1.8 FINAL COMPLETION
The date of Final Completion shall be the date the Contract Documents have been fully performed, all of the Work has been completed
and a final Certificate for Payment approved by the Owner has been issued by the Architect.
AIA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN
INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D C 20006 -5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright
laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation
until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201 -1997
User Document: A201.DOC -- 2/9/1999. AIA License Number 111808, which expires on 2/28/2000 -- Page #2
1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
1.2.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by
the Contractor. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all;
performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from
them as being necessary to produce the indicated results.
1 2.1.1 In the event of conflicts, explanatory notes in the Drawings take precedence over graphic indications, large scale drawings and
details take precedence over smaller scale drawings and figured dimensions take precedence over scaled dimensions. Where figured
dimensions are not indicated. scaled dimensions may be used upon approval by the Architect. The Contractor shall verify all dimensions,
both figured and scaled, by measurements of conditions and of the Work in place.
1.2.2 Organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and articles, and arrangement of Drawings shall not control the
Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade.
1.2.3 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words which have well -known technical or construction industry meanings
are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings.
1.3 CAPITALIZATION
1.3.1 Terms capitalized in these General Conditions include those which are (1) specifically defined, (2) the titles of numbered articles
and identified references to Paragraphs, Subparagraphs and Clauses in the document or (3) the titles of other documents published by the
American Institute of Architects.
1.4 INTERPRETATION
1.4.1 In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such as "all" and "any" and articles such as
"the" and "an," but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the
interpretation of either statement.
1.5 EXECUTION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
1.5.1 The Contract Documents shall be signed by the Owner and Contractor. If either the Owner or Contractor or both do not sign all
the Contract Documents, the Architect shall identify such unsigned Documents upen- request.
1.5.2 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site, become generally familiar
with local conditions (surface. subsurface and surrounding) under which the Work is to be performed and correlated personal observations
with requirements of the Contract Documents.
1.6 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE
1.6.1 The Drawings, Specifications and other documents, including those in electronic form, prepared by the Architect and the
Architect's consultants are Instruments of Service through which the Work to be executed by the Contractor is described. The Contractor
may retain one record set until expiration of any warranty period. Neither the Contractor nor any Subcontractor, Sub - subcontractor or
material or equipment supplier shall own or claim a copyright in the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the
Architect or the Architects consultants, and unless otherwise indicated the Architect and the Architect's consultants shall be deemed the
authors of them and will retain all common law, statutory and other reserved rights, in addition to the copyrights. All copies of Instruments
of Service, except including the Contractor's record set, shall be returned or suitably accounted for to the Architect, on request, upon
completion of the Work or. in the case of the Contractor's record set. upon expiration of any warranty period. The Drawings, Specifications
and other documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants, and copies thereof furnished to the Contractor, are for use
solely with respect to this Project. They are not to be used by the Contractor or any Subcontractor, Sub - subcontractor or material or
equipment supplier on other projects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of
the Owner, Architect and the Architect's consultants. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub - subcontractors and material or equipment
suppliers are authorized to use and reproduce applicable portions of the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the
Architect and the Architects consultants appropriate to and for use in the execution of their Work under the Contract Documents. All copies
AIA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN
INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D C. 20006-5292 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright
laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation
until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Fomlat A201 - 1997
User Document: A201.DOC -- 2/9/1999. AIA License Number 111808, which expires on 2/28/2000 -- Page #3
made under this authorization shall bear the statutory copyright notice, if any, shown on the Drawings, Specifications and other documents
prepared by the Architect and the Architects consultants. Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other
purposes in connection with this Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Architects or Architects consultants'
copyrights or other reserved rights.
1.6.1.1 Upon Owner's payment therefor, all Plans, Drawings, Specifications and other documents, including those in electronic form, and
copies thereof furnished by the Architect and the Architect's consultants, are and shall remain the property of the Owner. They shall not
be used in whole or in part by any person on any other project without the prior written consent of the Owner and Architect.
2.1 GENERAL
2 _.1.2
ARTICLE 2
OWNER
2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as
if singular in number.
respect to all matters requiring the Owner's approval r authorization. Except as otherwise provided in Subparagraph 1.2.1, the Architect
does not havo suck authority. The term "Owner" means the Owner or the Owner's authorized representative.
record legal title to tho property on which the Project is located, usually r forred to as tho site, and the Owner's interest therein.
2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER
2z4 The Owner shall, at the written request of the Contractor, prior to commencement of' the Work and thereafter, furnish to the
C ntractor r asonablc evidence that financial arrangements have becn made to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract.
Furnishing of such evidence shall be a condition precedent to commencement or continuation of the Work. After sueh evidence has been
furnished, the Owner shall not materially vary such financial arrangements without prior notice to the Contractor.
2.2.2 Except for permits and fees, including those required under Subparagraph 3.7.1, which are the responsibility of the Contractor
under the Contract Documents, the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals, easements, assessments and charges required for
construction, use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing facilities.
2.2.3 The Owner shall famish surveys describing physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations for the site of the Project,
and a legal description of the site. The Contractor shall be entitled to rely on the accuracy of information furnished by the Owner but shall
exercise proper precautions relating to the safe performance of the Work.
2.2.3.1 The famishing of surveys and legal descriptions of the Project Site by Owner shall not relieve the Contractor from its duties under
the Contract Documents. Subcontractors, in reasonable reliance upon the accuracy of information provided, shall be responsible for
determining the existence and location of subsurface lines, cables and pipes, as well as the conditions and characteristics of all subsoils.
2.2.4 Information or services required of the Owner by the Contract Documents shall be famished by the Owner with reasonable
promptness. Any other information or services relevant to the Contractor's performance of thc Work under the Owner's control :hall be
furnished by the Owner attar receipt from the Contractor of a written request for such information or service^.
2.2.5 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor will be furnished, free of charge, such copies of Drawings
and Project Manuals as are reasonably necessary for execution of the Work.
2.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK
2.3.1 If the Contractor fails to correct Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of thc Contract Document as required
by Paragraph 12.2 or persistently fails to carry out work in accordance with the Contract Documents, tho Owner may Imo a written order
to the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until thc cause for such order has been eliminated; however, tho right of tho
AIA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN
INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 -5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright
laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. his document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation
until the date of expiration as rioted below.
Electronic Format A201 - 1997
User Document: A201.DOC -- 2/9/1999. AIA License Number 111808, which expires on 2/28/2000 -- Page #4
ther person or entity, except to the extent required by Subparagraph 6.1.3.
2.3.1 If the Contractor fails to correct defective Work as required by Paragraph 12.2, or fails to complete the Work on time as required
by Article 3 of the Agreement or is in default of any of its material obligations hereunder. the Owner, by a written order signed by an agent
specifically so empowered by the Owner, may order the Contractor to stop the Work or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order
has been eliminated; however, this right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of the Owner to exercise
this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity. This right shall be in addition to and not in restriction of, the
Owner's rights under Paragraph 12.2. -
2.3.2 If, after consultation with the Architect, suspension of the Work is warranted by reason of unforeseen conditions which may
adversely affect the quality of the Work if such Work were continued the Owner may suspend the Work by written notice to the
Contractor. In such event, the Contract Time shall be adjusted accordingly, and the Contract Sum shall be adjusted to the extent, if any.
that additional costs are incurred by reason of such suspension. If the Contractor, in its reasonable judgment, believes that a suspension
is warranted by reason of unforeseen circumstances which may adversely affect the quality of the Work if the Work were continued, the
Contractor shall immediately notify the Owner and the Architect of such belief.
2.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK
2.4.1 If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within a seven -
day period after receipt of written notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence
and promptness, the Owner may
a three day peri d. If thc Contractor within such three day peri d after receipt f such second a tice fails to c
correct any deficiencies, thc Owner may, without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have, correct such deficiencies. In such case
an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the Rescuable cost of correcting
such deficiencies, including Owner's expenses and compensation for the Architect's additional services made necessary by such default,
neglect or failure. Such action by thc Owner and amounts chased to the
If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the
Owner.
2.5 In no event shall the Owner have control over or charge of, or be responsible for. construction means, methods, techniques,
sequences or procedures, or for safety precautions or programs in connection with the Work, since these are solely Contractor's
responsibility. The Owner will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents. The Owner will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor.
Subcontractors or their agents or employees. or of any other persons performing portions of the Work.
3.1 GENERAL
ARTICLE 3
CONTRACTOR
3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents
as if singular in number. The term "Contractor" means the Contractor or the Contractor's authorized representative.
3.1.2 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
3.1.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents either by
activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect's administration of the Contract, or by tests, inspections or approvals required or
performed by persons other than the Contractor.
3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR
3.2.1 Since the Contract Documents are complementary, before starting each portion of the Work, the Contractor shall carefully study
and compare the various Drawings and other Contract Documents relative to that portion of the Work, as well as the information furnished
by the Owner pursuant to Subparagraph 2.2.3, shall take field measurements of any existing conditions related to that portion of the Work
AIA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN
INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W , WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 -5292 WARNING Unlicensed photocopying violates U S. copyright
laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation
until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Form at A201 -1997
User Document: A201.DOC -- 2/9/1999. AIA License Number 111808, which expires on 2/28/2000 -- Page 85
and shall observe any conditions at the site affecting it. These obligations are for the purpose of facilitating construction by the Contractor
and are not for the purpose of discovering errors, omissions, or inconsistencies in the Contract Documents; however, any errors,
inconsistencies or omissions discovered by the Contractor shall be reported promptly to the Architect as a request for information in such
form as the Architect may require.
3.2.2 Any design errors or omissions noted by the Contractor during this review shall be reported promptly to the Architect, but it is
recognized that the Contractor's review is made in the Contractor's capacity as a contractor and not as a licensed design professional unless
otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. The Contractor is not required to ascertain that the Contract Documents are
in accordance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulations, but any nonconformity discovered by
or made known to the Contractor shall be reported promptly to the Architect.
3.2.3 If the Contractor believes that additional cost or time is involved because of clarifications or instructions issued by the Architect
in response to the Contractor's notices or requests for information pursuant to Subparagraphs 3.2.1 and 3.2.2, the Contractor shall make
Claims as provided in Subparagraphs 4.3.6 and 4.3.7. If the Contractor fails to perform the obligations of Subparagraphs 3.2.1 and 32.2,
the Contractor shall pay such costs and damages to the Owner as would have been avoided if the Contractor had performed such
obligations. The Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damages resulting from errors, inconsistencies or omissions
in the Contract Documents or for differences between field measurements or conditions and the Contract Documents unless the Contractor
when exercising the skill and attention required of Contractor hereunder, should have recognized such error, inconsistency, omission or
difference and knowingly failed to report it to the Architect.
3.2.3.1 If the Contractor performs any construction activity involving such error, inconsistency or omission in the Contract Documents
without such notice to the Architect the Contractor shall assume complete responsibility for such performance and shall bear the full
amount of the attributable costs for correction.
3.2.4 Notwithstanding the foregoing or any contrary provisions of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall be responsible for costs
of Work replaced or damaged as a result of errors in the design or the failure of the design when, exercising the skill and attention required
of Contractor hereunder, Contractor knew or should have discovered such errors and failures.
3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES
3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor's best skill and attention. The Contractor shall be subject
to terms of Article 4 solely responsible for and have control over construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures and
for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract, unless the Contract Documents give other specific instructions concerning
these matters. If the Contract Documents give specific instructions concerning construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or
procedures, the Contractor shall evaluate the jobsite safety thereof and, except as stated below, shall be fully and solely responsible for
the jobsite safety of such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. If the Contractor determines that such means, methods,
techniques, sequences or procedures may not be safe, the Contractor shall give timely written notice to the Owner and Architect and shall
not proceed with that portion of the Work without further written instructions from the Architect. If the Contractor is then instructed to
proceed with the required means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures without acceptance of changes proposed by the Contractor,
the Owner shall be solely responsible for any resulting loss or damage.
3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor's employees, Subcontractors and their
agents and employees, and other persons or entities performing portions of the Work for or on behalf of the Contractor or any of its
Subcontractors.
3.3.2.1 It is understood and agreed that the relationship of Contractor to Owner shall be that of an independent contractor. Nothing
contained herein or inferable herefrom shall be deemed or construed to (1) make Contractor the agent, servant, or employee of the Owner,
or (2) create any partnership, joint venture or other association between Owner and Contractor. Any direction or instruction by Owner
in respect to the Work shall relate to the results the Owner desires to obtain from the Work, and shall in no way affect Contractor's
independent contractor status as described herein.
3.3.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of Work already performed to determine that such portions are in
proper condition to receive subsequent Work.
AIA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN
INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W , WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 -5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright
laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation
until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201 -1997
User Document: A201.DOC -- 2/9/1999. AIA License Number 111808, which expires on 2/28/2000 -- Page 146
3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS
3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials, equipment, tools,
construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution
and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work.
3-4:2 The Contractor may make substitutions only with the consent of the wner, after evaluation by the Architect and in accordance
with a Change Order.
3.4.2 At a minimum and unless otherwise modified by applicable sections of the Specifications if, after the Contract Documents are
executed, it becomes necessary for the Contractor to substitute a material or product of a different brand or manufacturer in lieu of that
specified, the Contractor shall submit a written request to the Architect for approval of such proposed substitution. Each request for
substitution shall state any amount of change to the Contract Sum and shall be accompanied by complete descriptive literature and
performance data upon both the specified item and the proposed substitution. plus any samples as may be required by the Architect. Each
proposed substitution shall require the written approval of the Architect before its incorporation into the Work. The Contractor shall submit
requests for substitution as soon as practicable after the need for the substitution is determined to allow for adequate consideration of such
request and to minimize delay in the progress of the Work.
3.4.3 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor's employees and other persons carrying out
the Contract. The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not skilled in tasks assigned to them.
3.5 WARRANTY
3.5.1 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be of geed
the best quality and new unless otherwise required or permitted by the Contract Documents, that the Work will be free from defects not
inherent in the quality required or permitted, and that the Work will conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Work not
conforming to these requirements, including substitutions not properly approved and authorized, may be considered defective. The
Contractor's warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, modifications not executed by the Contractor, improper or
insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear and normal usage If required by the Architect or Owner, the
Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment.
3.5.2 The warranty provided in Paragraph 3.5.1 shall be in addition to and not in limitation of any other warranty or remedy reouired
by law or by the Contract Documents, and such warranty shall be interpreted to require Contractor to replace defective materials and
equipment and re- execute defective Work which is disclosed to the Contractor by the Owner within a period of one (1) year after Final
Completion of the entire Work or within a longer warranty time if such is specifically called for in the Specifications or as otherwise
provided by law. In each instance (if any) where the Contractor becomes obligated to correct defective Work, the one (1) year warranty
period specified shall automatically be renewed and recommenced. beginning when such correction is completed. as to the Work corrected.
so that Contractor's warranty obligation remains in effect as to each portion of the Work until each portion of the Work has functioned
properly for an entire year.
3.5.3 The Contractor shall issue in writing to the Owner as a condition precedent to final payment a "General Warranty" reflecting the
terms and conditions of Paragraphs 3.5.1 and 3.5.2 for all Work under the Contract Documents. This General Warranty shall be assignable.
3.5.4 Except when a longer warranty time is specifically called for in the Specifications or as otherwise provided by law, the Contractor
shall warrant for a period of twelve (12) months from Final Completion that the buildine(s) shall be watertight and leakproof at every point
and in every area, except where leaks can be attributed to damage to the building(s) by external forces beyond Contractor's control. The
Contractor shall, invnediately upon notification by the Owner of water penetration determine the source of water penetration and, at its
own expense, do any work necessary to make the building(s) watertight. Contractor shall also, at its own expense, repair or replace any
other damaged material. finishes. and furnishings damaged as a result of this water penetration. to return the building(s) to its (their) original
condition.
3.5.5 Except when a longer warranty time is specifically called for in the Specifications or as otherwise provided by law. the General
Warranty shall be for twelve (12) months from Final Completion and shall be in form and content otherwise satisfactory to the Owner.
ALA DOCUMENT A201 GENERAL CONDOT1ONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION -1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN
INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N W., WASHINGTON, D.0 20006 -5292 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright
laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation
until the date of eepuation as noted below.
Electronic Format A201 - 1997
User Document: A201.DOC -- 2/9/1999. AIA License Number 111808, which expires on 2/28/2000 -- Page #7
3.5.6 Warranties shall become effective on a date established by the Owner and Architect in accordance with the Contract Documents.
This date shall be the Date of Final Completion of the entire Work.
3.6 TAXES
1
3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall secure and pay for the building permit and other 1
permits and govemmental fees, licenses and inspections necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work which are customarily
secured after execution of the Contact and which are legally required. . . Notwithstanding
the foregoing, the Contractor shall procure all certificates of inspection, use, occupancy, permits and licenses pay all charges and fees
(excluding, however. capital recovery charges and charges and fees of a similar, capital nature required to be paid to cause utility lines or
utility capacity or both to be available at the boundaries of the Project Site, which charges and fees are to be paid by Owner) and give all
notices necessary and incidental to the due and lawful prosecution of the Work. Certificates of inspection, use, and occupancy shall be
delivered to the Owner upon completion of the Work in sufficient time for occupation of the Project in accordance with the approved
schedule for the Work.
3.7.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of public
authorities applicable to performance of the Work.
3.7.3 1
ordinances, building codes, and rules and rogulati ns. IIowever, if If the Contractor observes that portions of the Contract Documents
are at variance therewith with applicable laws, statutes. ordinances, building codes and rules and regulations the Contractor shall promptly •
notify the Architect and Owner in writing, and necessary changes shall be accomplished by appropriate Modification.
3.7.4 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it when, exercising the skill and attention required of Contractor hereunder the
Contractor knows or should have known such Work to be contrary to laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulations '
without such notice to the Architeet and Owner, the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such Work and shall bear the
costs attributable to- serrention.
3.6.1 The Contractor shall pay sales, consumer, use and similar taxes for the Work or portions thereof provided by the Contractor which
are legally enacted
3.7 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES
1
3.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents. Items covered by allowances
shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons or entities as the Owner may direct, but the Contractor shall not be required to
employ persons or entities to whom the Contractor has reasonable objection.
3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents:
.1 allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor of materials and equipment delivered at the site and all required taxes,
less applicable trade discounts;
3.8 ALLOWANCES
1
.3 whenever costs are more than or less than allowances, the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly by Change Order. '
The amount of the Change Order shall reflect (1) the difference between actual costs and the allowances under Clause
3.8.2.1 and (2) changes in Contractor's costs under Clause 3.8.22.
3.8.3 Materials and equipment under an allowance shall be selected by the Owner in sufficient time to avoid unreasonable delay in the
Work.
.2 Contractor's costs for unloading and handling at the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses
contemplated for stated allowance amounts shall be included in the Contract Sum but not in the allowances;
AIA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN
INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W , WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING. Unlicensed photocopying violates U S. copyright
laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation
until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic FotmatA201 -1997
User Document: A201.DOC -- 2/9/1999. AIA License Number 111808, which expires on 2/28/2000 -- Page #8
1
3.9 SUPERINTENDENT
3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the Project site
during performance of the Work. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor, and communications given to the superintendent shall
be as binding as if given to the Contractor. Important communications shall be confirmed in writing. Other communications shall be
similarly confirmed on written request in each case. Selection of the superintendent shall be approved in writing by the Owner. The
Contractor shall not replace the superintendent without the prior written consent of the Owner and until the selection of another
superintendent approved by the Owner in accordance with the Contract.
3.10 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
3.10.1 The Contractor, promptly after being awarded the Contract, shall prepare and submit for the Owner's and Architect's infecinatrien
review and approval a Contractor's construction schedule for the Work. The schedule shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract
Documents, shall be revised at appropriate intervals as required by the conditions of the Work and Project, shall be related to the entire
Project to the extent required by the Contract Documents, and shall provide for expeditious and practicable execution of the Work.
3.10.2 The Contractor shall prepare and keep current, for the Architect's approval, a schedule of submittals which is coordinated with
the Contractor's construction schedule and allows the Architect reasonable time to review submittals.
3.10.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in general accordancc with adherence to the most recent schedules submitted to the Owner
and Architect, unless specifically authorized by the Architect to begin work earlier than called for on such schedules.
3.10.4 The Contractor shall prepare a monthly schedule summary report in a form and of sufficient detail and character as approved by
the Owner. The report at a minimum shall specify whether the Project is on schedule and, if not, the reasons therefor and the terms of the
new schedule. The Contractor shall hold weekly progress meetings at the Project Site or at such other times and frequency as are acceptable
to the Owner. Progress of the Work shall be reported in detail with reference to construction schedules.
3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE
3.11.1 The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner one record copy of the Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders
and other Modifications, in good order and marked currently to record field changes and selections made during construction, and one
record copy of approved Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar required submittals. These shall be available to the Architect
and shall be delivered to the Architect for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work.
3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES
3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or a
Subcontractor, Sub - subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work.
3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams and other information
furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work.
3.12.3 Samples are physical examples which illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship and establish standards by which the Work
will be judged.
3.12.4 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals are not Contract Documents. The purpose of their submittal is to
demonstrate for those portions of the Work for which submittals are required by the Contract Documents the way by which the Contractor
proposes to conform to the information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. Review by the Architect is
subject to the limitations of Subparagraph 4.2.7. Informational submittals upon which the Architect is not expected to take responsive action
may be so identified in the Contract Documents. Submittals which are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the
Architect without action.
3.12.5 The Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents, approve and submit to the Architect Shop Drawings,
Product Data, Samples and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as
AIA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN
INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W , WASHINGTON, D C 20006 -5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright
laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can he reproduced without violation
until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201 -1997
User Document: A201.DOC -- 2/9/1999. AIA License Number 111808, which expires on 2/28/2000 -- Page #9
to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of separate contractors. Submittals which are not marked as reviewed
for compliance with the Contract Documents and approved by the Contractor may be returned by the Architect without action.
3.12.6 By approving and submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals, the Contractor represents that the
Contractor has determined and verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto, or will do so, and has
checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract
Documents.
3.12.7 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittal and review of Shop
Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals until the respective submittal has been approved by the Architect.
3.12.8 The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals except that the Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for
deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect's approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar
submittals unless the Contractor has specifically informed the Architect in writing of such deviation at the time of submittal and (1) the
Architect has given written approval to the specific deviation as a minor change in the Work, or (2) a Change Order or Construction Change
Directive has been issued authorizing the deviation. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop
Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals by the Architect's approval thereof.
3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar
submittals, to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous submittals. In the absence of such written notice the
Architect's approval of a resubmission shall not apply to such revisions.
3.12.10 The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services which constitute the practice of architecture or engineering
unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless the Contractor needs to provide
such services in order to carry out the Contractor's responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures.
The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services in violation of applicable law. If professional design services or
certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials or equipment are specifically required of the Contractor by the Contract
Documents, the Owner and the Architect will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. The Contractor
shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a properly licensed design professional, whose signature and seal shall appear
on all drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop
Drawings and other submittals related to the Work designed or certified by such professional, if prepared by others, shall bear such
professional's written approval when submitted to the Architect. The Owner and the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy,
accuracy and completeness of the services, certifications or approvals performed by such design professionals, provided the Owner and
Architect have specified to the Contractor all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. Pursuant to this Subparagraph
3.12. 10, the Architect will review, approve or take other appropriate action on submittals only for the limited purpose of checking for
conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall not be responsible
for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria required by the Contract Documents.
3.12.11 Shop drawings for architectural, structural, mechanical and electrical work shall be submitted for approval to the Architect and
Owner.
3.12.12 The Contractor shall assemble for approval by the Architect and the Owner three (3) complete copies in loose -leaf binders of all
operating and maintenance data for all equipment installed as a part of the Work.
3.12.13 Prior to Final Payment, and as a condition of Final Payment the Contractor shall submit to Owner two (2) complete sets of
built" drawings.
3.13 USE OF SITE
3.13.1 The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits and the Contract Documents
and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment.
AIA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL CONDrr10NS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AlA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN
INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 -5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright
laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation
until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201 -1997
User Document: A201.DOC -- 2/9/1999. AIA License Number 111808, which expires on 2/28/2000 -- Page #10
3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING
3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting or patching required to complete the Work or to make its parts,fit together
properly, and to present an acceptable completed appearance.
' 3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed construction of the Owner or
separate contractors by cutting, patching or otherwise altering such construction, or by excavation. The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise
alter such construction by the Owner or a separate contractor except with prior written consent of the Owner and of such separate
contractor; such consent shall not bo unreasonably withheld. The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold from the Owner or a separate
contractor the Contractor's consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work.
3.15 CLEANING UP
3.15.1 The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of waste materials ee and rubbish
caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the Work, the Contractor shall remove from and about the Project waste
materials, rubbish, the Contractor's tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus materials.
3.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so and the cost thereof shall be
charged to the Contractor.
3.15.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for damaged or broken glass, and at completion of the Work shall replace such damaged or
broken glass. At a minimum and unless otherwise modified by applicable sections of the Specifications, the Contractor shall perform the
following final cleaning at completion of the Work: (a) remove all temporary protections: and (b) remove marks. stains, fingerprints and
other soil or dirt from all surfaces and other work; and (c) remove spots, mortar, plaster, soil and paint from ceramic tile, marble, and other
finish materials from all surfaces and other work; and (d) clean fixtures, cabinetwork, and equipment, removing stains, paint, dirt, and dust
and leave in an undamaged and new condition; and (e) clean all surfaces and other work in accordance with recommendations of the
manufacturers.
3.16 ACCESS TO WORK
3.16.1 The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever located.
3.17 ROYALTIES, PATENTS AND COPYRIGHTS
3.17.1 The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of copyrights
and patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof, but shall not be responsible for such
defense or loss when a particular design, process or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract
'
Documents or where the copyright violations are contained in Drawings, Specifications or other documents prepared by the Owner or
Architect. However, if the Contractor has r ason to believe when, exercising the skill and attention required of Contractor hereunder
knows or should have known that the required design, process or product is an infringement of a copyright or a patent, the Contractor shall
be responsible for such loss unless such information is promptly furnished to the Architect, in which case the Architect shall be liable to
the Owner for such loss.
3,18 rwmcr nr C-AXIG.r ^ ^r ^N
1 3.18.1
Management Pr tective Liability insurance purchased by the C ntractor in accordance with Paragraph 11.3, th C ntractor shall indemnify
and h Id harmless the Owner, Architect, Architect's c nsultants, and- agents -and employees of any of them fr m and a ninst claims,
et not limited to attorneys' fees, arisin out f or resulting from performance of the Work,
provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily-fiats , siclatess, dis aso or d ath, er to injury to or destruction
f tangible pr perty ( thcr than the W rk itself), but my t the extent enured -by the ncglia e«:,.nisi ns-of the C ntract r, a
' Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them-er--anyone for whose acts they- may- be-Iiabic, regardless of whether or not
34-8-
AIA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN
INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 -5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright
laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation
until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201 -1997
User Document: A201.DOC -- 2/9/1999. AIA License Number 111808, which expires on 2/28/2000 -- Page #11
3.13 .2 In claims again..t any person or entity indemnified under this Pararaph 3.18 by an employee of the Contractor, a Subcontractor,
anyone directly or indirectly employed by them r anyone for whose acts they may bo liable, the indemnification obligation under
Subparagraph ;.18.1 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of dama compensation or benefits payable by or for the
4.1 ARCHITECT
ARTICLE 4
ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
4.1.1 The Architect is the person lawfully Licensed to practice architecture or an entity lawfully practicing architecture identified as such
in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term "Architect" means the Architect
or the Architects authorized representative. The Architect is identified as such in the Agreement, or such successor Architect as the Owner
may appoint by written notice to the Contractor from time to time.
4:1-2 Duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not bo restricted,
modified or extended without written consent of the Owner, Contractor and Architect. Con.,ent shall not be unreasonably withheld.
4 1.2 Owner reserves the rieht to appoint a representative empowered to act for Owner during the Construction Phase and to supersede
the Architect's Construction Phase responsibility to the extent set forth in written notice to the Architect and Contractor. With respect to
such superseded responsibilities as set forth in the notice to the Architect and Contractor, Architect shall no longer bear responsibility in
those areas from and after the effective date of such notice, unless and only to the extent from the time that Architect shall be redirected
to resume responsibility by Owner. Similarly, from time to time. Owner may expand or reduce Owner's delegation of powers to the
Architect, with Owner so notifying Contractor of any such changes. The Architect shall not be construed as a third -party beneficiary to
the Contract and can in no way object to any expansion or reduction of powers as set forth herein. In no event, however shall Owner have
control over or charge of. or be responsible for. construction means, methods. techniques, sequences or procedures, or for safety precautions
or programs in connection with the Work. since these are solely the Contractor's responsibility. The Owner will not be responsible for the
Contractor's failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Owner will not have control over or charge
of and will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor, Subcontractors, or their agents or employees, or of any other persons
performing portions of the Work.
4.1.3 If the employment of the Architect is terminated, the Owner shall employ a new Architect o
whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former Architect.
4.2 ARCHITECTS ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents, and will be an Owner's
representative (1) durin construction, (2) until final payment is due and (3) with the Owner's concurrence, from time to time during the
one year period for correction of Work described in paragraph 12.2. The Architect will advise and consult with the Owner. The Architect
will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents, unless otherwise modified in
writing in accordance with other provisions of the Contract. The Architect shall administer the performance of the Work. The Architect
will advise the Contractor with regard to matters set forth m the Drawings and Specifications. In addition to any specific responsibilities
assigned elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the Architect shall make recommendations with respect to any and all questions which
may arise as to the rate of progress of the Work. The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided
in the Contract Documents, unless otherwise modified by written instrument in accordance with Paragraph 4.1.2.
4.2.2 The Architect, as a representative of the Owner, will regularly visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of the Contractor's
operations (I) to become generally familiar with and to keep the Owner informed about the progress and quality of the portion of the Work
completed, (2) to endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work, and (3) to determine in general if the Work
is being performed in a manner indicating that the Work when fully completed, will be in accordance with the Contract Documents.
However, tho The Architect will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous make regular on - site inspections to check the quality
or quantity of the Work. The Architect will neither have control over or charge of, nor be responsible for, the construction means, methods,
techniques, sequences or procedures, or for the safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, since these are solely the
Contractor's rights and responsibilities under the Contract Documents, except as provided in Subparagraph 3.3. I.
AIA DOCUMENT A20I- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN
INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W , WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright
laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation
until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201 -1997
User Document: A201.DOC -- 2/9/1999. AIA License Number 111808, which expires on 2/28/2000 -- Page #12
4.2.2.1 On the basis of on -site observations. the Architect will keep the Owner informed of progress of the Work. and will use best
efforts to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work.
4.2.3 The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the
Contract Documents. The Architect will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of the
Contractor, Subcontractors, or their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. However, the
Architect will be responsible for notifying the Owner in writing, of any illegal improper or unsound means, methods. techniques,
sequences. procedures. safety precautions or programs and/or any acts or omissions of Contractor that are known or should have reasonably
been discovered by Architect.
4.2.4 Communications Facilitating Contract Administration. Except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or when
direct communications have bccn specially authorized are deemed necessary by Owner, the Owner and Contractor shall endeavor to
communicate with each other through the Architect about matters arising out of or relating to the Contract. Communications by and with
the Architect's consultants shall be through the Architect. Communications by and with Subcontractors and material suppliers shall be
through the Contractor. Communications by and with separate contractors shall be through the Owner.
4.2.4.1 Except as provided in Paragraph 3.12.12. the Contractor shall forward all communications to the Architect directly, along with
a copy to the Owner.
4 2.5 Based on the Architects observations and evaluations of the progress and quality of the Work and Contractor's Applications for
Payment, the Architect will review and. after consultation with and receipt of approval from Owner, certify the amounts due the Contractor
and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts.
4.2.6 The Architect will have authority to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever the Architect
considers it necessary or advisable, the Architect will have authority to require inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with
Subparagraphs 13.5.2 and 13.5.3, whether or not such Work is fabricated, installed or completed.
entitica
performing portions ofthc Work.
4.2.7 The Architect will review and approve or take other appropriate action upon the Contractor's submittals such as Shop Drawings,
Product Data and Samples, bat -el* for the limited purpose of, including without limitation. checking for conformance with information
given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The Architect's action will be taken with such reasonable promptness
as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner, Contractor or separate contractors, while allowing sufficient time in the
Architect's professional judgment to permit adequate review. Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining
the accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instructions for installation or
performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract Documents. The
Architect's review of the Contractor's submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligations under Paragraphs 3.3, 3.5 and 3.12. The
Architect's review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions or, unless otherwise specifically stated by the Architect, of any
construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. The Architect's approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval
of an assembly of which the item is a component.
4.2.8 The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Construction Change Directives, and may authorize minor changes in the Work
as provided in Paragraph 7.4.
4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion and the date of final completion,
will receive and forward to the Owner, for the Owner's review and records, written warranties and related documents required by the
Contract and assembled by the Contractor, and will issue a final Certificate for Payment upon compliance with the requirements of the
Contract Documents.
4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree, the Architect will provide one or more project representatives to assist in carrying out the
Architect's responsibilities at the site. The duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of such project representatives shall be as
AIA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL CONDmoNS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN
INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N W., WASHINGTON, D C 20006 -5292. WARNING Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright
laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation
until the date of expiration as noted below
Electronic Format A201 -1997
User Document: A201.DOC -- 2/9/1999. AIA License Number 111808, which expires on 2/28/2000 -- Page #I3
set forth in an exhibit to be incorporated in the Contract Documents.
4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under, and requirements of, the Contract Documents on
written request of either the Owner or Contractor. The Architect's response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits
agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness. If no agreement is made concerning the time within which interpretations required
of the Architect shall be furnished in compliance with this Paragraph 4.2, then delay shall not be recognized on account of failure by the
Architect to furnish such interpretations until 15 days after written request is made for them.
4.2.12 Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from the Contract
Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings. When making such interpretations and initial decisions, the Architect will
endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor, and will not show partiality to either and will not be liable for
4.3 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES
4.3.1 Definition. A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking, as a matter of right, adjustment er interpretetien of
Contract terms, payment of money, extension of time or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. The term "Claim" also
includes other disputes and matters in question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract. Claims must
be initiated made by written notice. The responsibility to substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim.
4.3.2 Time Limits on Claims. Claims by either party must be initiated within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such
Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim, whichever is later. Claims must be
initiated by written notice to the Architect and the other party.
4.3.3 Continuing Contract Performance. Pending final resolution ofa Claim except as otherwise agreed in writing or as provided
in Subparagraph 9.7.1 and Article 14, the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue
to make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents.
4.3.4 Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions. Contractor represents that rt has fully investigated all physical aspects of the
Proiect Site and verified all dimensions. measurements, property lines. utility locations. grades and elevations, existing improvements,
surface and subsurface soil conditions, drainage of both surface and subsurface, soil plasticity, and general suitability of conditions at the
Project Site, and shall not be entitled to any increase in the Contract Sum as a consequence of what is reflected thereby or what the
Contractor. exercising the skill and prudence ofa first class contractor knew or should have known. Subiect to the foregoing if conditions
are encountered at the site which are (1) subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions which differ materially from those indicated
in the Contract Documents or (2) unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature, which differ materially from those ordinarily found
to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents, then notice
by the observing party shall be given to the other party promptly before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than 21 days after
first observance of the conditions. The Architect will promptly investigate such conditions and, if they differ materially and cause an
increase or decrease in the Contractor's cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the Work, will recommend an equitable
adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. If the Architect determines that the conditions at the site are not materially
different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified, the Architect shall
so notify the Owner and Contractor in writing, stating the reasons. Claims by either party in opposition to such determination must be made
within 21 days after the Architect has given notice of the decision. If the conditions encountered are materially different, the Contract Sum
and Contract Time shall be equitably adjusted, but if the Owner and Contractor cannot agree on an adjustment in the Contract Sum or
Contract Time, the adjustment shall be referred to the Architect for initial determination, subject to further proceedings pursuant to
Paragraph 4.4.
4.3.5 Claims for Additional Cost. If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum, detailed written notice
as provided herein shall be given before proceeding to execute the Work. Prior notice is not required for Claims relating to an emergency
endangering life or property arising under Paragraph 10.6.
AIA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN
INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N W , WASHINGTON, D C 20006 -5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright
laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation
until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201 -1997
User Document: A201.DOC — 2/9/1999. AIA License Number 111808, which expires on 2/28/2000 -- Page 414
4.3.6 If the Contractor believes additional cost is involved for reasons including but not limited to (1) a written interpretation from the
Architect, (2) an order by the Owner to stop the Work where the Contractor was not at fault, (3) a written order for a minor change in the
Work issued by the Architect, (4) failure of payment by the Owner, (5) termination of the Contract by the Owner, (6) Owner's suspension
or (7) other reasonable grounds, Claim shall be filed in accordance with this Paragraph 4.3. In the event anv Claim for additional cost
hereunder shall increase the Contract Sum by greater than ten percent (10%), the Owner may terminate the Contract Documents without
being liable for damages to the Contractor, the Architect or any employees, agents, subcontractors or any other persons or parties related
thereto except to the extent of the cost of such out -of- pocket expenses reasonably incurred by Contractor.
4.3 6.1 WAIVER OF CLAIMS: FINAL PAYMENT
The making of Final Payment shall not constitute a waiver of any Claims by the Owner.
4.3.7 Claims for Additional Time
4.3.7.1 If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase in the Contract Time, written notice as provided herein shall be given. The
Contractor's Claim shall include an estimate of cost and of probable effect of delay on progress of the Work. In the case of a continuing
delay only one Claim is necessary.
4.3.72 If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Claim for additional time, such Claim shall be documented by data substantiating
that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time, could not have been reasonably anticipated and had an adverse effect on the
scheduled construction. Such Claims shall be submitted monthly or shall be conclusively deemed to have been waived.
4.3.8 Injury or Damage to Person or Property. If either party to the Contract suffers injury or damage to person or property because
of an act or omission of the other party, or of others for whose acts such party is legally responsible, written notice of such injury or
damage, whether or not insured, shall be given to the other party within a reasonable timo not exceeding 21 ten (101 days after discovery.
The notice shall provide sufficient detail to enable the other party to investigate the matter.
4.3.9 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon, and if quantities originally contemplated are
materially changed in a proposed Change Order or Construction Change Directive so that application of such unit prices to quantities of
Work proposed will cause substantial inequity to the Owner or Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted.
4.3.10 Claims for Consequential Damages. The Contractor and Owner waive Claims against each other for consequential damages
arising out of or relating to this Contract. This mutual waiver includes:
.1 damages incurred by the Owner for rental expenses, for losses of use, income, profit, financing, business and reputation,
and for Toss of management or employee productivity or of the services of such persons; and
.2 damages incurred by the Contractor for principal office expenses including the compensation of personnel stationed
there, for losses of financing, business and reputation, and for loss of profit except anticipated profit arising directly from
the Work.
This mutual waiver is applicable, without limitation, to all consequential damages due to either party's termination in accordance with
Article 14. Nothing contained in this Subparagraph 4.3.10 shall be deemed to preclude an award of liquidated direct damages, when
applicable, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
4.4 RESOLUTION OF CLAIMS AND DISPUTES
4.4.1 Decision of Architect. ; 6
Paragraphs 10.3 through 10.5, shall Any Claim mav, upon request of Owner, be referred initially to the Architect for decision. An initial
persons or entities other than tho Owner.
AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN
INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N W, WASHINGTON, D.0 20006 -5292 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright
laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation
unul the date of expiration as noted below.
Ele ctronic Format A201 -1997
User Document: A201.DOC -- 2/9/1999. AIA License Number 111808, which expires on 2/28/2000 -- Page #15
4.4.2 The Architect (if the matter is referred to the Architect for initial decision) will review Claims and within ten (10) days after receipt
of a Claim will either (I) reject the Claim in whole or in part, (2) recommend approval of the Claim in whole or in part, (3) request the
Claimant provide additional information in support of the Claim, or (4) suggest a compromise. The Architects action under the preceding
sentence shall be reported to the Owner and the Contractor. If a Claim is not resolved after consideration of the foregoing and of any further
evidence provided to the Architect, the Claimant shall be entitled to pursue its Claim in any lawful manner, subject to any limitations
contained in the Contract Documents. Any recommendation of the Architect for the disposition of any Claim shall not be binding on the
Owner or the Contractor.
4.4.3 In evaluating Claims, the Architect may, but shall not be obligated to, consult with or seek information from either party or from
persons with special knowledge or expertise who may assist the Architect in rendering a decision. The Architect may request the Owner
to authorize retention of such persons at tho Owner's expense.
4.4.4 Ifthe Architect requests a party to provide a response to a Claim or to furnish additional supporting data, such party shall respond,
within ten clays after receipt of such request, and shall either provide a response on the requested supporting data, advise the Architect when
the response or supporting data will be furnished or advise the Architect that no supporting data will be furnished. Upon receipt of the
response or supporting data, if any, the Architect will either reject or approve the Claim in whole or in part.
4.4.5 The Architect will approve or reject Claims by written decision, which shall state the reasons therefor and which shall notify the
parties of any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both. The approval or rejection of a Claim by the Architect shall be final
and binding on the parties but subject to mediation and arbitration advisory only and shall be subiect to mediation.
4.4_5. If a Claim has been resolved the Architect (or at the Owners sole option the Owner) will prepare or obtain appropriate
documentation.
4.4.5.2 Ifa Claim has not been resolved, the party making the Claim shall, within ten (10) days after the Architect's preliminary response.
take one or more of the followino actions: (1) submit additional supporting data requested by the Architect, (2) modify the initial Claim
or (3) notify the Architect that the initial Claim stands.
4:4,6 When a written deoision of tho Architect ..tates that (I) thc decision is final bat .abject to mediation and arbitration and (2) a
demand for arbitration of a Claim covored by such decision must bo- taado-within 3Q-days- #ter tho-dato -on which -rho party making tho
demand receives the fatal written decision, then failure to demand arbitration within said 30 days' period shall result in the Architect's
decision bccomin final and bindin upon the Owltcr and Contractor. If thc Architect renders a decision after arbitration proceedings havo
been initiated, such decision may be entered as evidence, but - hall not super cde proeecdings unless thc decisi n is acceptable
to all parties concerned.
4,4, Upon receipt of a Claim against the Contractor or at any time thereafter, the Architcct or the Owner may, but is not obli to,
a
cif) thc zurcty, if any, f the nature and aen unt f thc Claim. If thc Claim relates to a possibility of a C ntractor's default, the Architcct
or the Owner may, but is not blip tod t , n tify the surety and request the sur ty's assistanc in resolving the c ntrovorsy.
4.4.8 If a Claim relates to or is the subject of a mechanic's lien, the party asserting such Claim may proceed in accordance with
applicable law to comply with the lien notice or filing deadlines prior to resolution of the Claim by the Architect, by or by mediation
o r b bit- .,
4.5 MEDIATION
4.5.1 Any Claim arising out of or related to the Contract, except Claims relating to aesthetic effect and except those waived as
provided for in Subparagraphs 4.3.10, 9.10.4 and 9.10.5 shall, after initial decision by the Architect or 30 days after submission of
AIA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN
INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright
laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation
until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201 -1997
User Document A201 DOC -- 2/9/1999. AIA License Number 111808, which expires on 2/28/2000 -- Page #16
the Claim to the Architect, be subject to mediation as a condition precedent to srbice tier' *' n er the'„ „s tion of legal or equitable
proceedings by oithor party.
4.5.2 The parties shall endeavor to resolve their Claims by mediation which, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise, shall
be in accordance with the Construction Industry Mediation Rules of tho American Arbitration Association currently in effect.
Request for mediation shall be filed in writing with the other party to the Contract and with the American Arbitration Association.
The request may be made concurrently with the filing of a demand for arbitration but, in such :rent, mediation shall procecd in
advance of arbitration or legal or equitable proceedings, which shall bo stayed pending mcdiation-fer a period of 60 days from the date
f filing, unless stayed for a longer poriod by agreement of tho parties or court order.
4.5.3 The parties shall share the mediator's fee and any filing fees equally. The mediation shall be held in the place where the
Project is located, unless another location is mutually agreed upon. Agreements reached in mediation shall be enforceable as settlement
agreements in any court having jurisdiction thereof.
4.6 ARBITRATION
4 - 61 - Any Claim arising out efor related to the Contract, except Claims sclating to aesthetic -effect and except thoso waived as
with the provisions of Paragraph 1.5.
4.6.2 - b
in acc rdance with tho Construction Industry Arbitration Roles - tho American Arbitration Association currently in effect Tho
and a copy shall be filed with tho Architect.
4.6.3
to Paragraph 13.7.
•
4.6.5
4.6 Owner and Contractor hereby agree that no Claims or disputes between Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to
the Contract Documents or a breach thereof shall be decided by any arbitration proceeding including. without limitation, any proceeding
AIA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN
INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 -5292. WARNLNG• Unlicensed photocopying violates U S. copyright
laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation
until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201 -1997
User Document: A201.DOC -- 2/9/1999. AIA License Number 111808, which expires on 2/28/2000 -- Page #17
under the Federal Arbitration Act (9 U.S C. Section 1 - 14) or any applicable state arbitration statute, except that in the event that
Owner is subject to an arbitration proceeding related to the Project, Contractor consents to be joined in the arbitration proceeding if
Contractor's presence is required or requested by Owner for complete relief to be accorded in the arbitration proceeding.
5.1 DEFINITIONS
ARTICLE 5
SUBCONTRACTORS
5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work at the
site or otherwise furnish labor or materials. The term "Subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular
in number and means a Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcontractor. The term "Subcontractor" does not include
a separate contractor or subcontractors of a separate contractor.
5.1.2 A Sub - subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform a portion of
the Work at the site or otherwise furnish labor or materials. The term "Sub- subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract
Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub - subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Sub - subcontractor.
5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK
5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or the bidding requirements, the Contractor, as soon as practicable after
award of the Contract, shall furnish in writing to the Owner tltrea�Js and the Architect the names of persons or entities (including those
who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for each principal portion of the Work. The
Architect will promptly reply to the Contractor in writing stating whether or not the Owner or the Architect, after due investigation,
has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity. Failure of the Owner or Architect to reply promptly shall constitute
notice of no reasonable objection.
5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed person or entity to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable and
timely objection. The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the Contractor has made reasonable written
objection to the Owner and the Architect.
5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has r asonablo objection to a person or entity proposed by the Contractor, the Contractor
shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no reasonable objection. If the proposed but rejected Subcontractor was
real nably capable of performing tho Worlz, tho C ntract Sum and C ntract Time shall be increased or decreased by tho dill renco,
if any, occasioned by such change, and an appropriato Change rdor shall be issued boforo commencement of tho substitute
Subcontractor's Work. IIowever, no incr ase in the Contract Sum or Contract Time :hall be allowed for such change unlct' tho
Contractor has acted promptly and responsively in submitting names as required.
5.2.4 The Contractor shall not change a Subcontractor, person or entity previously selected if the Owner or Architect makes
reasonable objection to such substitute.
5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS
5.3.1 By appropriate written agreement, written where legally required for validity, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor,
to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents,
and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities, including the responsibility for safety of the
Subcontractor's Work, which the Contractor, by these Contract Documents, assumes toward the Owner and Architect. Each subcontract
agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work
to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor,
unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies and redress against the Contractor
that the Contractor, by the Contract Documents, has against the Owner. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall require each
Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub - subcontractors. The Contractor shall make available to each proposed
Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will
be bound, and, upon written request of the Subcontractor, identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed
AIA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN
INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright
laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation
until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201 -1997
User Document: A201.DOC -- 2/9/1999. AIA License Number 111808, which expires on 2/28/2000 -- Page #18
subcontract agreement which may be at variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors will similarly make copies of applicable
portions of such documents available to their respective proposed Sub - subcontractors.
5.3.2 Any part of the Work performed for the Contractor by a Subcontractor shall be pursuant to a written subcontract between
the Contractor and such Subcontractor. Each such subcontract shall: (a) require that such Work be performed in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents; (b) waive all rights the contracting parties may waive against one another or that the
Subcontractor may have against the Owner for damages caused by fire or other perils covered by the property insurance required by
:he Contract Documents; (c) require the Subcontractor to carry and maintain liability insurance in accordance with the Contract
Documents; and (d) require the Subcontractor to furnish such certificates and waivers as the Owner may reasonably request.
5.4 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTS
5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor to the Owner provided that:
.1 assignment is effective only
only for those subcontract agreements which the Owner accepts by notifying the Subcontractor and Contractor in
writing; and
.2 assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety, if any, obligated under bond relating to the Contract.
5.1.2 Upon such assignment, if tho Work has been cusp ndod for more than 30 days, tho- Subcontractor's compensation 'hall bo
equitably adjusted for incr ases in cost resulting-Cr-am-the susponsi n.
5.4.2 Owner shall only be responsible for compensating Subcontractors for work done or materials supplied accruing after the date
that Owner gives written notice of its acceptance of the Subcontractor's subcontract.
6.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS
6.1.1 The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces, and
to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site ender
make such claim as provided in Paragraph 1.3.
6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site, the
term "Contractor" in the Contract Documents in each case shall mean the Contractor who executes each separate Owner - Contractor
Agreement.
6.1.3 The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activities of the Owner's own forces and of each separate contractor with the
Work of the Contractor, who shall cooperate with them. The Contractor shall participate with other separate contractors and the Owner
in reviewing their construction schedules when directed to do so. The Contractor shall make any revisions to the construction schedule
deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement. The construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used
by the Contractor, separate contractors and the Other until subsequently revised.
Article 6 and Articles 10, 11 and 12
ARTICLE 6
CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS
AIA DOCUMENT A201 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN
INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 -5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copynght
laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation
until the date of expiration as noted below
Electronic Format A201 -1997
User Document: A201.DOC -- 2/9/1999. AIA License Number 111808, which expires on 2/28/2000 -- Page #19
6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY
6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of their
materials and equipment and performance of their activities, and shall connect and coordinate the Contractors construction and
operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documents.
6.2.2 If part of the Contractor's Work depends for proper execution or results upon construction or operations by the Owner or a
separate contractor, the Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work, promptly report to the Architect in writing
apparent discrepancies or defects in such other construction that would render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results.
Failure of the Contractor so to report shall constitute an acknowledgment that the Owner's or separate contractor's completed or
partially completed construction is fit and proper to receive the Contractor's Work, except as to defects not then reasonably
discoverable.
construction of a separate contractor.
6.2.3 Subject to Paragraph 8.3 hereof, costs caused by delays or by improperly timed activities or defective construction shall be
borne by the party responsible therefor.
6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage wrongfully caused by the Contractor to completed or partially completed
construction or to property of the Owner or separate contractors as provided in Subparagraph 10.2.5 as well as to property of any other
erp son.
6,24
Contractor in Subparagraph 3.11.
6.2.5 Claims and other disputes and matters in question between the Contractor and a separate contractor shall be subject to the
provisions of Paragraph 4.4 provided the separate contractor has reciprocal obligations.
6.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP
6.3.1 If a dispute arises among the Contractor, separate contractors and the Owner as to the responsibility under their respective
contracts for maintaining the premises and surrounding area free from waste materials and rubbish, the Owner may clean up and the
A'_ hi m °` w allocate the cost among those responsible.
7.1 GENERAL
ARTICLE 7
CHANGES IN THE WORK
7.1.1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execution of the Contract, and without invalidating the Contract, only by
Change Order, Construction Change Directive or field order for a minor change in the Work, subject to the limitations stated in this
Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
7.1.1.1 A field directive or field order shall not be recognized as having any impact upon the Contract Sum or the Contract Time
and Contractor shall have no Claim therefor unless it shall, prior to complying with same and in no event later than ten (101 working
days from the date such direction or order was given, submit to Owner for Owner's approval its change proposal.
7.1.1.2 When submitting its change proposal, Contractor shall include and set forth in clear and precise detail breakdowns of labor
and materials for all trades involved and the estimated impact on the construction schedule. Contractor shall famish spread sheets from
which the breakdowns were prepared. plus spread sheets if requested of any Subcontractors.
AIA DOCUMENT A20I- GENERAL CONDmONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN
INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.1V., WASHINGTON, D C. 20006 -5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright
laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation
until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201 -1997
User Document: A201.DOC -- 2/9/1999. AIA License Number 111808, which expires on 2/28/2000 -- Page 620
7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon written agreement among the Owner, Contractor and Architect; a Construction Change
Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect and may or may not be agreed to by the Contractor; an order for a minor
change in the Work may be issued by the Architect alone, subject to written approval of Owner.
7.1.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract Documents, and the Contractor shall
proceed promptly, unless otherwise provided in Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work.
7.2 CHANGE ORDERS
7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by tho Architect and signed by the Owner, Contractor and Architect,
stating their agreement upon all of the following:
.1 change in the Work;
.2 the amount of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum; and
.3 the extent of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Time.
7.2.2 Methods used in determining adjustments to the Contract Sum may include those listed in Subparagraph 7.3.3.
7.2.3 If changes in plans or specifications are necessary after the performance of the Contract is begun or if it is necessary to
decrease or increase the quantity of Work to be performed or of materials. equipment, or supplies to be furnished, the governing body
of the Owner may approve Change Orders making the changes. The original contract price may not be increased by Change Orders
by more than 25 percent. No change in the Work, whether by way of alteration or addition to the Work. shall be the basis of an
addition to the Contract Sum or a change in the Contract Time unless and until such alteration or addition has been authorized by a
Change Order executed and issued in accordance with and in strict compliance with the requirements of 9252.048 Local Government
Code. and the Contract Documents. This requirement is of the essence of the Contract Documents. Accordingly, no course of conduct
or dealings between the parties, nor express or implied acceptance of alterations or additions to the Work, and no claim that the Owner
has been unjustly enriched by any alteration or addition to the Work. whether or not there is in fact any such unjust enrichment, shall
be the basis for any claim to an increase in the Contract Sum or change in the Contract Time.
7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES
7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order prepared by the An-kneel-and signed by the Owner and Architect, directing
a change in the Work and stating a proposed basis for adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum or Contract Time,
or both. The Owner may by Construction Change Directive, without invalidating the Contract, order changes in the Work within the
general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions, the Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted
accordingly.
7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change Order.
7.3.3 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum, the adjustment shall be based on one
of the following methods:
.1 mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit
evaluation;
.2 unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon;
.3 cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage fee; or
.4 as provided in Subparagraph 7.3.6.
AIA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN
INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W , WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 -5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright
laws and wdl subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation
until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic FormatA201 -1997
User Document: A201.DOC -- 2/9/1999. AIA License Number 111808, which expires on 2/28/2000 -- Page #21
7.3.4 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive, the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in the Work involved
and advise the Architect and Owner of the Contractor's agreement or disagreement with the method, if any, provided in the
Construction Change Directive for determining the proposed adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time.
7.3.5 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contractor indicates the agreement of the Contractor therewith, including
adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the method for determining them. Such agreement shall be effective immediately
and shall be recorded as a Change Order.
7.3.6 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment in the Contract Sum, the method
and the adjustment shall be determined by the Architect on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the
Work attributable to the change, including, in case of an increase in the Contract Sum, a reasonable allowance for overhead and profit
not exceeding the percentages included in Paragraph 7.3.6.1 and otherwise herein. In such case, and also under Clause 7.3.3.3, the
Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as the Architect may prescribe, an itemized accounting together with appropriate
supporting data. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, actual costs for the purposes of this Subparagraph 7.3.6 shall
be limited to the following:
.1 reasonable costs of labor, including social security, old age and unemployment insurance, fringe benefits required
by agreement or custom, and workers' compensation insurance;
.2 reasonable costs of materials, supplies and equipment, including cost of transportation, whether incorporated or
consumed;
.3 reasonable rental costs of machinery and equipment, exclusive of hand tools, whether rented from the Contractor or
others;
.4 reasonable costs of premiums for all bonds and-- insurance, permit fees, and sales, use or similar taxes related -te the
Werk,efiel directly attributable to the Work; and
.5 additional reasonable costs of supervision and field office personnel directly attributable to the change.
7.3.6.1 Notwithstanding the foregoing, actual cost does not include any item which could be deemed to be a General Conditions cost
or overhead. such as but not limited to, the cost of Contractor and Subcontractor supervisory personnel assigned to the Work. and field
office and related expenses.
7.3.6.2 The Contractor, in connection with any proposal it makes for a Contract Modification, shall furnish a price breakdown
itemized as required by the Owner or Architect. Unless otherwise directed, the breakdown shall be in sufficient detail to permit an
analysis of all material. labor, equipment. subcontract and overhead costs as well as profit, and shall cover all work involved in the
Modification. whether such work was deleted. added. or changed. Any amount claimed for subcontracts shall be supported by a similar
price breakdown. In addition, if the proposal includes a time extension. a justification therefor shall also be furnished. The proposal
together with the price breakdown and time extension justification, shall be fumished within thirty (30) days of the date first requested
by the Architect. In such proposals, profit and overhead shall be as follows: (I) Subcontractor's profit and overhead shall not exceed
fifteen percent (15 %) of total direct costs; (2) Contractor's profit and overhead on work performed by its own crews shall not exceed
fifteen percent (15%) of total direct costs: (3) Contractor's profit and overhead on work performed by its subcontractors shall not
exceed five percent (5%) of total direct costs: and (4) on credit changes profit and overhead on the originally estimated work will
not have to be returned to the Owner.
7.3.7 The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for a deletion or change which results in a net decrease
in the Contract Sum shall be actual stet cost to the Owner as confirmed by the Architect and Owner. When both additions and credits
covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis
of net increase, if any, with respect to that change.
7.3.8 Pending final determination of the total actual cost of a Construction Change Dircctivo to the Owner, amounts not in dispute
for such change, in tho Work shall be included in Applications for Payment accompanied by a Change Order indicating the parties'
AEA DOCUMENT A20I- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN
INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W, WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 -5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S copyright
laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution This document was electronically produced wnh permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation
until the date of expiranan as noted below.
Electronic Format A201 -1997
User Document: A201.DOC -- 2/9/1999. AIA License Number 111808, which expires on 2/28/2000 -- Page #22
agreement with part or all of such costs. For any portion of such cost that remains in dispute, the Architect will make an interim
determination for purposes of monthly certification for payment for those costs. That determination of cost shall adjust the Contract
Sum on the same basis as a Change Order, subject to the right of either party to disagree and assert a claim in accordance with Article
4.
7.3.9 When the Owner and Contractor ogee with tho determination made by the Architect— concoming tho adjustments in the
Contract Sum and Contract Time, or otherwise reach agreement upon the adjustments made, such agreement determination shall be
effective immediately and shall be recorded by preparation and execution of an appropriate Change Order.
7.4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
7.4.1 The Architect will have authority, subject to the approval of Owner in each case. to order minor changes in the Work not
involving adjustment in the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent and lanauaee of the
Contract Documents. Such changes shall be effected by written field order and shall be binding on the Owner and Contractor. The
Contractor shall carry out such written orders promptly.
8.1 DEFINITIONS
ARTICLE 8
TIME
8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided, Contract Time is the period of time, including authorized adjustments, allotted in the Contract
Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work.
8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Agreement.
8.1.2.1 The date of commencement of the Work shall not be postponed by the failure to act of the Contractor or of persons or entities
for which the Contractor is responsible.
8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect and approved by the Owner in accordance with
Paragraph 9.8.
8.1.4 The term "day" as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically defined.
8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION
8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. By executing the Agreement the Contractor
confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work.
8.2.2 The Contractor shall not lotowingly, except by agreement or instruction of the Owner in writing, prematurely commence
operations on the site or elsewhere prior to the effective date of insurance required by Article 11 to be furnished by the Contractor
and Owner. The date of commencement of the Work shall not be changed by the effective date of such insurance. Unless the date of
commencement is established by the Contract Documents or a notice to proceed given by the Owner, the Contractor shall notify the
Owner in writing not less than five days or other agreed period before commencing the Work to permit the timely filing of mortgages,
mechanic's liens and other security interests.
8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract
Time.
8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME
8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work by an act or neglect of the Owner or
Architect, or of an employee of either, or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the Work, or by
AIA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN
INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006.5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U S. copynght
laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation
until the date of expiration as noted below
Electronic Format A201 - 1997
User Document: A201.DOC -- 2/9/1999. AIA License Number 111808, which expires on 2/28/2000 -- Page #23
labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in deliveries, unavoidable casualties or other causes beyond the Contractor's control and fault, or
by delay authorized by the Owner pending mediation and - - - -
delay, then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as the Architect and Owner may determine.
8.3.2 Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance with applicable provisions of Paragraph 43.
84-3
Documents.
8.3.4 If Contractor fails to achieve Substantial Completion of the Work (or any portion thereof) on or before the date(s) specified for
Substantial Completion in the Agreement, Contractor shall pay to Owner, as liquidated damages, the sum of One Thousand and No /100
Dollars ($1,000.00) for each calendar day that Substantial Completion is delayed after the date(s) specified for Substantial Completion
due to failure of Contractor to have achieved Substantial Completion in accordance with the Contract Documents. It is hereby agreed that
the liquidated damages to which Owner is entitled hereunder are a reasonable forecast of lust compensation for the harm that would be
caused by Contractor's failure to achieve Substantial Completion of the Work for any portion thereof) on or before the date(s) specified
for Substantial Completion in the Agreement. It is agreed that the harm that would be caused by such failure, which includes loss of
expected use of the Project areas provision of alternative storage facilities and rescheduling of moving and occupancy dates, is one that
is incapable or very difficult of accurate estimation. It is hereby agreed that if Substantial Completion of the Work (or any portion thereof)
is not achieved on or before thirty (30) days after the date(s) specified for Substantial Completion in the Agreement, the harm that would
be caused to Owner cannot be reasonably forecast because it would include business disruption to Owner in addition to loss of expected
use of the Project areas, provision of alternative storage facilities and rescheduling of moving and occupancy dates. Thus, the liquidated
damages set forth herein and above will cease to be assessed under the Contract Documents after thirty (30) days after the date(s) specified
for Substantial Completion in the Agreement, and Owner shall thereafter rely on its remedies under the Contract Documents and at law
and in equity, including without limitation, the recovery of actual damages. The date(s) specified for Substantial Completion of the Work
for any portion thereof) in the Agreement shall be subject to adjustment as provided in the Contract Documents.
9.1 CONTRACT SUM
ARTICLE 9
PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
9.1.1 The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and, including authorized adjustments, is the total amount payable by the
Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents.
9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
9.2.1 Before the first Application for Payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect a schedule of values allocated to various
portions of the Work, prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect and Owner may
require. This schedule, unless objected to by the Architect and Owner shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's
Applications for Payment.
9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
9.3,1 At l`rr� east -,v° ten days boforo tho date established f r ach progress payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect an
itemized Application for Payment for operations completed in accordance with the schedule of values. Such application shall be
notarized, if required, and supported by such data substantiating the Contractor's right to payment as the Owner or Architect may
require, such as copies of requisitions from Subcontractors and material suppliers, and reflecting retainage if provided for in the
Contract Documents. Each month the Contractor shall submit four (4) notarized. completed copies of AIA Document G702, Application
and Certificate for Payment and AIA Document G702A. Continuation Sheet, supported by lien waivers from Contractor and all
Subcontractors, laborers and materialmen for Work done. Provided that an Application for Payment is received by the Architect and
Owner, and Architect issues a Certificate of Payment not later than the tenth (10th) day of a month, the Owner shall make payment
to the Contractor not later than the tenth (10th) day of the next month. If an Application for Payment is received by the Architect and
AIA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN
INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 -5292. WARNING. Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright
laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation
until the date of expiration as noted below
Electronic Format A201 - 1997
User Document: A201.DOC -- 2/9/1999. AIA License Number 111808, which expires on 2/28/2000 -- Page #24'
1
Owner after the application date fixed above, payment shall be made by the Owner not later than one month after the Architect issues
a Certificate of Payment. The Architect shall not certify any payment based thereon if obiected to by the Owner. for good cause shown.
1 9.3.1.1 As provided in Subparagraph 7.3.8, such applications may include requests for payment on account of changes in the Work
which have been properly authorized
I included in Change Orders.
9.3.1.2 Such applications may not include requests for payment for portions of the Work for which the Contractor does not intend
to pay to a Subcontractor or material supplier, unless such Work has been performed by others whom the Contractor intends to pay.
I 9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in thc Contract Documents, p Payments shall be made on account of materials and equipment
delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work. If approved in advance by the Owner, payment may
I similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing. Payment for materials
and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon compliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the
Owner to establish the Owner's title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner's interest, and shall include the
I costs of applicable insurance, storage and transportation to the site for such materials and equipment stored off the site.
9.3.3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no lator than
thc time of on the earlier of incorporation into the Work or upon payment. The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an
1 Application for Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the
Owner shall, be free and clear of liens, claims, security interests or
encumbrances in favor of the Contractor, Subcontractors, material suppliers, or other persons or entities making a claim by reason of
I having provided labor, materials and equipment relating to the Work.
9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT
I 9.4.1 The Architect will, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, either issue to the Owner a
Certificate for Payment, with a copy to the Contractor, for such amount as the Architect determines is properly due, or notify the
Contractor and Owner in writing of the Architect's reasons for withholding certification in whole or in part as provided in
1 Subparagraph 9.5. I.
9.42 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the
I Architect's evaluation of the Work and observations at the Site and the data comprising the Application for Payment, that the Work
has progressed to the point indicated and that, to the best of the Architect's knowledge, information and belief, the quality of the Work
is in accordance with the Contract Documents. The foregoing representations are subject to an evaluation of thc Work for senfenazianee
I : specific qualifications expressed by the Architect. The issuance
of a Certificate for Payment will further constitute a representation that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified.
However, the issuance of a Certificate for Payment will not be a representation that the Architect has (1) made exhaustive GE
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose
the Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum.
9.4.3 In addition to and not in derogation of the provisions of Subparagraph 9.4.2, the issuance of a Certificate for Payment shall
constitute a recommendation to Owner by Architect in respect to the amounts to be paid to Contractor. Such recommendation shall
be non - binding on Owner, and Owner shall be entitled to refuse to make payment on any Certificate of Payment as provided in
Subparaeraoh 9 6.1 hereof.
9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION
9.5.1 The Architect may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to protect the
Owner, if in the Architect's opinion the representations to the Owner required by Subparagraph 9.4.2 cannot be made. If the Architect
AIA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN
INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W , WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING. Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright
lass and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation
until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201
User Document: A201.DOC -- 2/9/1999. AIA License Number 111808, which expires on 2/28/2000 -- Page #25
is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application, the Architect will notify the Contractor and Owner as provided in
Subparagraph 9.4. 1. If the Contractor and Architect cannot agree on a revised amount, the Architect will promptly issue a Certificate
for Payment for the amount for which the Architect is able to make such representations to the Owner. The Architect may also
withhold a Certificate for Payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence, may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate
for Payment previously issued, to such extent as may be necessary in the Architect's opinion to protect the Owner from loss for—which
tho Contractor is rosponsiblo, including loss resulting from acts and omissions doscribod in Subparagraph 3.3.2, because of:
.1 defective Work not remedied;
.2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims unless security acceptable
to the Owner is provided by the Contractor;
.3 failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for labor, materials or equipment;
.4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum;
.5 damage to the Owner or another contractor;
.6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time, and or that the unpaid balance
would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay; or
.7 persistent failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
9.5.2 When the above reasons for withholding certification are removed, certification will be made for amounts previously
withheld.
9 5.3 If Contractor disputes any determination by the Architect with regard to all or any part of a Certificate of Payment which
disputed amount is 550,000.00 or Tess, Contractor shall nevertheless expeditiously continue to prosecute the Work. If the disputed
amount is more than $50,000.00. Contractor may stop work until the dispute is resolved. If the Architect declines to certify payment
and withholds its Certificate for any reason, the Architect will promptly notify the Owner in writing of such reasons therefor. If the
Owner fails to perform any of its obligations to its construction lender which results in such lender's failure or refusal to fund any
Application for Payment of more than $50,000.00, the Contractor may stop work until such Application for Payment is funded.
9.5.4 Owner shall not be deemed to be in breach of these Contract Documents by reason of the withholding of any payment
pursuant to any provision of the Contract Documents, provided the Architect has approved the Owner's actions or the work in question
shall have been rejected by any governmental authority.
9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS
9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall make payment in the manner and within the time
provided in the Contract Documents, and shall so notify the Architect.
9.6.1.1 Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Owner may refuse to make payment on any Certificate for Payment (including without
limitation, the final Certificate for Payment) for any default under the Contract Documents, including but not limited to those defaults
set forth in Sections 9.5.1.1. through 9.5.1.7 hereof. The Owner shall not be deemed in default by reason of withholding payment while
any of such defaults remain uncured.
9.6.2 The Contractor shall promptly pay each Subcontractor, upon receipt of payment from the Owner, out of the amount paid to
the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work, the amount to which said Subcontractor is entitled, reflecting
percentages actually retained from payments to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work. The Contractor
shall, by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payments to Sub - subcontractors in a
similar manner.
AIA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION -1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN
INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U S. copyright
laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation
until the date of expiration as noted below.
E lectromc Format A201 -1997
User Document: A201.DOC -- 2/9/1999. AIA License Number 111808, which expires on 2/28/2000 -- Page #26
9.6.3 The Architect will, on request, fumish to a Subcontractor, if practicable, information regarding percentages of completion or
amounts applied for by the Contractor and action taken thereon by the Architect and Owner on account of portions of the Work done
by such Subcontractor.
9.6.4 Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to pay or to see to the payment of money to a Subcontractor except
as may otherwise be required by law.
9.6.5 Payment to material suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided in Subparagraphs 9.6.2, 9.6.3 and 9.6.4.
9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment, a progress payment, or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner shall not
constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents.
9.6.7 Unless the Contractor provides the Owner with a payment bond in the full penal sum of the Contract Sum, payments received
by the Contractor for Work properly performed by Subcontractors and suppliers shall be held by the Contractor for those
Subcontractors or suppliers who performed Work or furnished materials, or both, under contract with the Contractor for which payment
was made by the Owner. Nothing contained herein shall require money to be placed in a separate account and not commingled with
money of the Contractor, shall create any fiduciary liability or tort liability on the part of the Contractor for breach of trust or shall
entitle any person or entity to an award of punitive damages against the Contractor for breach of the requirements of this provision.
9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT
9.7.1 If the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment, through no fault of the Contractor, within seven days after receipt
of the Contractor's Application for Payment, or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven days after the date established
in the Contract Documents the amount certified by the Architect or awarded by arbitration, then the Contractor may, upon seven
additional days' written notice to the Owner and Architect, stop the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received. The
Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor's reasonable
costs of shut -down, delay and start -up, plus interest as provided for in the Contract Documents.
9.7.1.1 Notwithstanding the foregoing, no sum shall be added as a result of a bona fide dispute between Owner and Contractor;
provided, however, if such dispute is resolved in Contractor's favor, the Contract Sum shall be increased as provided in the preceding
paragraph.
9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is sufficiently
complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use.
9.8.1.1 The Work will not be considered suitable for Substantial Completion review until all Project systems included in the Work
are operational as designed and scheduled, all designated or required governmental inspections and certifications have been made and
posted, designated instruction of Owner's personnel in the operation of systems has been completed. and all final finishes within the
Contract Documents are in place. In general. the only remaining Work shall be minor in nature. so that the Owner and/or Owner's
tenants could occupy the Project on that date and the completion of the Work by the Contractor would not materially interfere with
or hamper the Owner or Owners tenants' (or those claiming by, through or under Owner) normal business operations. As a further
condition of Substantial Completion acceptance, the Contractor shall certify that all remaining Work, the same being solely of a
"punchlist' nature. will be completed within thirty (30) consecutive calendar days or as agreed upon following the Date of Substantial
Completion ( "Final Completion "). Notwithstanding the foregoing. the Owner may refuse to make payment on any Certificate of
Substantial Completion or any Certificate of Payment (including without limitation. the final Certificate of Payment) for anv default
of the Contractor. The Owner shall not be deemed in default by reason of withholding payment while any of such defaults remain
uncured.
9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work, or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately, is substantially
complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected grief
ALA DOCUMENT A20l- GENERAL- CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN
INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006.5292. WARNING Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright
laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation
until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201 -1997
User Document: A201.DOC -- 2/9/1999. AIA License Number 111808, which expires on 2/28/2000 -- Page #27
10 f
.�,all -pa nt- Failure to include an item on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in
accordance with the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall proceed promptly to complete and correct items on such list.
9.8.3 Upon receipt of the Contractor's list, the Architect will make an inspection to determine whether the Work or designated
portion thereof is substantially complete. If the Architect's inspection discloses any item, whether or not included on the Contractor's
list, which is not surrioiea• smplete in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents co that the Owner can occupy
, the Contractor shall, before issuance of the Certificate of
Substantial Completion, complete or correct such item upon notification by the Architect. In such case, the Contractor shall then submit
a request for another inspection by the Architect to determine Substantial Completion.
9.8.4 When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial
Completion for approval by Owner which shall establish the date of Substantial Completion, shall establish responsibilities of the
Owner and Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and shall fix the time within which
the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate. Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall
commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate
of Substantial Completion.
9.8.5 The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written acceptance of
responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate. Upon such acceptance and consent of surety, if any, the Owner shall make payment
of retainage applying to such Work or designated portion thereof. Such payment shall be adjusted for Work that is incomplete or not
in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE
9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work at any stage when ^u^h p rtiien
designated by separate agreement with the Contractor, provided such occupancy or use is consented to by the insurer as required under
Clause 11.1.1.5 and authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the Work. Such partial occupancy or use may commence
whether or not the portion is substantially complete. provided tho The Owner and Contractor have- assepted shall agree to a
designation in writing of the responsibilities assigned to each of them for payments, retainage, if any, security, maintenance, heat,
utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and have shall agree weed in writing concerning the period for correction of the Work
and commencement of warranties required by the Contract Documents. When the Contractor considers a portion substantially complete,
the Contractor shall prepare and submit a list to the Architect as provided under Subparagraph 9.8.2. Consent of tho Contractor to
partial occupancy or uco shall not- boamreasonably withhold. The stage of tho prop o:r of tho Work shall be determined by written
r, if no agreement is reached, by decision of the Architect.
9.9.2 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use, the Owner, Contractor and Architect shall jointly inspect the area to be
occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to determine and record the condition of the Work.
9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon in writing, partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the Work shall not
constitute acceptance of Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT
9.10.1 Upon receipt of written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of a fmal
Application for Payment, the Architect will promptly make such inspection and, when the Architect finds the Work acceptable under
the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed, the Architect will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that
to the best of the Architect's knowledge, information and belief, and on the basis of the Architect's on -site visits and inspections, the
Work has been completed in accordance with terms and conditions of the Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to
be due the Contractor and noted in the final Certificate is due and payable. The Architect's final Certificate for Payment will constitute
a further representation that conditions listed in Subparagraph 9.10.2 as precedent to the Contractor's being entitled to final payment
have been fulfilled.
MA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN
INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 -5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright
laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation
until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201 -1997
User Document: A201.DOC -- 2/9/1999. AIA License Number 1 1 1808, which expires on 2/28/2000 -- Page #28
9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits to the Architect
and Owner (1) an affidavit that payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which
the Owner or the Owner's property might be responsible or encumbered (less amounts withheld by Owner) have been paid or otherwise
satisfied, (2) a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is
currently in effect and will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to the
Owner, (3) a written statement satisfactory to Owner that the insurance will
cover the period required by the Contract Documents, (4) consent of surety, if any, to final payment and (5), if
required by the Owner, other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations, such as receipts, releases and waivers of liens,
claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract, to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the
Owner. If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner, the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory
to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien. If such lien remains unsatisfied after payments are made, the Contractor shall
refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien, including all costs and reasonable
attorneys' fees.
9.10.3 If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor
or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion, and the Architect so confirms, the Owner shall, upon application by the
Contractor and certification by the Architect, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion
of the Work fully completed and accepted, less five percent (5 %) retainage. If the remaining balance for Work not fully completed
or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Contract Documents, and if bonds have been furnished, the written consent of surety
to payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor to the
Architect prior to certification of such payment. Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions governing final payment,
except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims.
9404 The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by tho Owner except those arising from:
4
4
4 terms of spacial warranties required by the C ntract Documents.
9.10.5 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor, a Subcontractor or material supplier shall constitute a waiver of claims by
that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at the time of final Application for
Payment.
ARTICLE 10
PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS
10.1.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in
connection with the performance of the Contract.
10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
10.2.1 The Contractor shall take eeasenable all necessary precautions for safety of, and shall provide eeasonable all necessary
protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to:
.1 employees all persons on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby;
.2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site, under care,
custody or control of the Contractor or the Contractor's Subcontractors or Sub - subcontractors; and
AIA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN
INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W , WASHINGTON, D C. 20006 -5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright
laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution This document was electrontcally produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation
until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201 -1997
User Document: A201.DOC -- 2/9/1999. AIA License Number 111808, which expires on 2/28/2000 -- Page #29
.3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto, such as trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures
and utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction.
10,2.2 The Contractor shall give notices and comply with applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of public
authorities bearing on safety of persons or property or their protection from damage, injury or loss.
10.2.3 The Contractor shall erect and maintain, as required by existing conditions and performance of the Contract, reasonable all
necessary safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards, promulgating safety
regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities.
10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods are necessary for execution
of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel.
10.2.5 The Contractor, at its sole cost and expense shall promptly remedy damage and loss (other than damage or loss insured under
property insurance required by the Contract Documents) to property referred to in Clauses 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3 caused in whole or
in part by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub - subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone
for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under Clauses 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3, except damage or
loss attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them or by
anyon for wk se acts either f them may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or noeligenco f the Contractor. The foregoing
obligations of the Contractor are in addition to the Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 3.18.
10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor's organization at the site whose duty shall be the
prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor's superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor in writing
to the Owner and Architect.
10.2.7 The Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the construction or site to be loaded so as to endanger its safety.
10.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
10.3.1 If reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death to persons resulting from a material
or substance, including but not limited to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) or any other hazardous material. encountered
on the site by the Contractor, the Contractor shall, upon recognizing the condition, immediately stop Work in the affected area and
report the condition to the Owner and Architect in writing.
10.3.1.1 The Work in the affected area shall not thereafter be resumed except by written agreement of the Owner and Contractor if
in fact the material is asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) and has not been rendered harmless. The Work in the affected area
shall be resumed in the absence of asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) or when it has been rendered harmless. only upon
written direction by Owner. The term "hazardous material or substance" shall be defined as any toxic or hazardous material as
described in the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability Act of 1980, with all amendments and revisions
thereto.
10.3.2 The Owner shall obtain the services of a licensed laboratory to verify the presence or absence of the material or substance
reported by the Contractor and, in the event such material or substance is found to be present, to verify that it has been rendered
harmless. Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish in writing to the Contractor and Architect
the names and qualifications of persons or entities who are to perform tests verifying the presence or absence of' such material or
substance or who are to perform the task of removal or safe containment of such material or substance. The Contractor and tho
. When the material or substance has
been rendered harmless, Work in the affected area shall resume upon written agreement of the Owner and Contractor. The Contract
Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased in the amount of the Contractor's reasonable additional
costs of shut -down, delay and start-up, which adjustments shall be accomplished as provided in Article 7.
AIA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN
INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W , WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 -5292 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright
laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation
until the date of expiration as noted below
Electronic Format A201 -1997
User Document: A201.DOC -- 2/9/1999. AIA License Number 111808, which expires on 2/28/2000 -- Page 630
1 10.3.3 .
I but not limited to attorneys' fees, arising out of r resulting from performance f the Work in- the-affected ar a if in fact di material
r substance presents the risk of b dily injury or death as described in Subparagraph 10.3.1 and has not b __ _,. r........'.. -.
provided that such claim, damage, loss or oxponso is attributable to b dily injury, sickness, disease r death, or to injury to r
negligence of a party seeking indemnity.
10.4 The Owner shall not be responsible under Paragraph 10.3 for materials and substances brought to the site by the Contractor
unless such materials or substances were required by the Contract Documents.
10.5 It without negligence on the part of the Contractor, the Contractor is held liable for the cost of remediation of a hazardous
material or substance solely by reason of performing Work as required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall indemnify the
Contractor for all cost and expense thereby incurred.
10.6 EMERGENCIES
10.6.1 In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall act, at the Contractor's discretion, take all
reasonable and necessary actions to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. Additional compensation or extension of time claimed
by the Contractor on account of an emergency shall be determined as provided in Paragraph 4.3 and Article 7.
ARTICLE 11 BELOW (PARAGRAPH 11.1 THROUGH PARAGRAPH 11.5.2) IS DELETED IN ITS ENTIRETY AND IS
REPLACED BY EXHIBIT "A" ATTACHED HERETO AND INCORPORATED HEREIN BY REFERENCE FOR ALL PURPOSES.
ARTICLE 11 INS DICE AND BONDS
444 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE
11.1.1
whose acts any of them may bo liable:
4
2
4
4
4
4.
claims under w risers' c mpensati n, disability benefit r othcr similar cmpl ye benefit acts which ar applicabl
to the Work to be performed;
employees;
claims for damages because of b dily injury, sickness r dis aso, r death of any pens n other than tho Contractor'°
loss of use rcsiulting therefrom;
maintenance or use of a motor vehicle;
AIA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN
1NSTITVFE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N W , WASHINGTON, D C. 20006 -5292. WARNING Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright
laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation
until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201 -1997
User Document: A201.DOC -- 2/9/1999. AIA License Number 111808, which expires on 2/28/2000 -- Page #31
4
11.1.2 The insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than ((nits of liability specified in the Contract
11.1 3 Certificates of insuranc acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of the W rk. Theso
tho foregoing insurance coverages arc required to remain in force after final payment and aro reasonably available, an additional
and belief.
4 OWNER'S LIABILITY INSURANCB
11.2.1 The Owner shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining the Owner's usual liability insurance.
4-14 PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROTECTIVE LIABILITY INSURANCE
11.3.1
C ntractor by increasing the C ntract Sum to pay the c st f purchasing and maintaining such ptional insurance coverage, and tho
liability purchased with such coverage shall be equal to the a of the limits required for Contractor's Liability Insurance under
Causes 11.1.1.2 through 11.1.1.5.
11.3 .2 To the extent damages are covered by Project Management Protective Liability insurance, the Owner, Contractor and Architect
waive all rights against ach other for damages, except such rights as they may have to the proceeds of such insurance. The policy
shall provide for such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise.
11.3.3 The Owner shall not require the Contractor to include the Owner, Architect or other per..ons or entities as additional insured.,
on the Contractor's Liability Insurance coverage under Para 11.1.
4-1 4 PROPERTY INSURANCE
11.1.1 Unless otherwise provided, the Owner shall purchase and maintain, in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do
form in tho amount of tho initial Contract Sum, plus value of subsequent Contract modifications and cost of materials supplied or
installed by fliers, comprising total value for the entire Project at tho site on a replacement cost basis without optional deductibles.
greed in writing by
all persons and entities who are beneficiaries f such insurance, until final payment has been mad as pr vided in Paragraph 9.10 r
00 41 00 ^anon o - ent ot than the Owner has an insurable intere.,t in tho property required by this Paragraph 11.1 to be covered,
whichever is later. This insurance shall include interests of the Owner, the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub subcontractors in tho
Project.
11,1.1 1 Pr party insurance shall be n an "all risk" r equivalent p licy f rm and shall include, without limitation, insuranc against
the perils of fire (with extended coverac) and physical lo.,5 or dama includin„ without duplication of coverage, theft, vandalism,
malicious mischief, collapse, earthquake, flood, windstorm, falsework, testing and startup, temporary buildings and debris removal
AIA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL. CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN
INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N W., WASHINGTON, D C 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U S. copyright
laws and wit subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation
until the date of exptration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201 - 1997
User Document: A201.DOC -- 2/9/1999. AIA License Number 111808, which expires an 2/28/2000 -- Page #32
Architect's and Contractor's services and oxp tees required as a result of such insured loss
hall boar all reasonable costs properly attributable thereto.
11.1.1.3
11.1.1.1 This pr perty insurance shall c ver porti ns f the W rk st red off the site, and also p rti ns f tho W tic in transit.
11.1.1.5
the Owner and Contractor shall bo named insurods.
to the Contractor by appropriate Change Order.
11.1.5
11.1.7
11.1.6
applicable to tho Work, except such rights as they have te- pwceeds-of such-luau-ague-held by tho- Owner as fiduciary. The Owner
promium directly OF
AIA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN
INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 -5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright
laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation
until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201 -1997
User Document: A201.DOC -- 2/9/1999. AIA License Number 111808, which expires on 2/28/2000 -- Page #33
11.1.8
Subparagraph 11.1.10. Tho Contractor shall pay Subcontractors their just sharos of insurance proceeds rocoivod by tho Contractor,
subcontractors in similar manner.
11.1.9 If required in writing by a party in interest, the Owner as fiduciary shall, upon occurrenco of an insurod loss, give bond for
11.1.10-
hall b resolved as provided in Paragaphs 1.5 and 1.6. Tho Owner as fiduciary shall, in the caso of arbilrati n, make settlement with
insurers in accordance with directions of the arbitrators. If distribution f insurance proceeds by arbitration is required, tho arbitrator
will direct such distribution.
444 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND
11.5.1
the date of execution of tho Contract.
1152
arising under tho Contract, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall permit a copy to bo mado.
ARTICLE 12
UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK
12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK
12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Architect's or Owner's request or to requirements specifically expressed
in the Contract Documents, it must, if required in writing by the Architect or Owner be uncovered for the Architect's or Owner's
examination and be replaced at the Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Time or Contract Sum.
12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered which the Architect has not specifically requested to examine prior to its being
covered, the Architect may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. If such Work is in accordance with
the Contract Documents, c sts of uncovering and replacement shall, by appropriato Change Order, be at tho Owner's expense. If such
Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, correction shall be at the Contractor's expense unless the condition was caused
by the Owner or a separate contractor in which event the Owner shall be responsible for payment of such costs.
12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK
12.2.1 BEFORE OR AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
12.2.1.1 The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or Owner or failing to conform to the requirements of
the Contract Documents, whether discovered before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or
AIA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN
INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 -5292. WARNING. Unlicensed photocopying violates U S. copyright
laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation
until the date of expiration as noted below
Electronic FotmatA201 -1997
User Document: A201.DOC -- 2/9/1999. AIA License Number 111808, which expires on 2/28/2000 -- Page #34
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
completed. Costs of correcting such rejected Work, including additional testing and inspections and compensation for the Architect's
and Owner's services and expenses made necessary thereby, shall be at the Contractor's expense.
1222 AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
12.2.2.1 In addition to the Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 3.5, if, within one year after the date of Substantial Completion
of the Work or designated portion thereof or after the date for commencement of warranties established under Subparagraph 9.9. 1,
or by terms of an applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be net-in defective
or otherwise not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt
of written notice from the Owner to do so
The Owner shall give such notico promptly after discovery of tho condition. During the -eno year period for correction of Work, if
the Owner fails to notify the Contract r and vivo the C ntractoran opportunity to -make tho - correction, tho-Owner waives the rights
to roquiro correction by tha Contractor and to make a claim for broach of warranty. If the Contractor fails to correct defective or
otherwise nonconforming Work within a reasonable time during that period after receipt of notice from the Owner or Architect, the
Owner may correct it in accordance with Paragraph 2.4. If the Contractor does not proceed with correction of such defective or
otherwise nonconforming Work within a reasonable time fixed by written notice from the Architect, the Owner may remove it and
store the materials or equipment at the Contractor's expense. If the Contractor does not pay costs of such removal and storage within
ten (10) days after written notice, the Owner may sell such materials and equipment at auction or at private sale and shall account for
the net proceeds thereof, after deducting costs and damages that should have been bome by the Contractor including compensation
for the Architects' services and expenses made necessary thereby. If such proceeds of sale do not cover costs which the Contractor
should have borne, the Contract Sum shall be reduced by the deficiency. If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not
sufficient to cover such amount. the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner.
122.2.2 The one -year period for correction of Work shall be extended with respect to portions of Work first performed after
Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual performance of the Work.
12.2.2.3 The one -year period for correction of Work shall not be extended by corrective Work performed by the Contractor pursuant
to this Paragraph 12.2.
12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work which are defective or otherwise not in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the Contractor nor accepted by the Owner.
122.4 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction, whether completed or partially completed,
of the Owner or separate contractors caused in whole or in part by the Contractor's correction or removal of Work which is defective
or otherwise not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
12.2.5 Nothing contained in this Paragraph 12.2 shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations
which the Contractor might have under the Contract Documents. Establishment of the one -year period for correction of Work as
described in Subparagraph 12.2.2 relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct the Work, and has no relationship
to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within
which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor's liability with respect to the Contractor's obligations other than
specifically to correct the Work.
12 2.5 1 The corrective remedies set forth in Paragraph 12.2 are not exclusive and shall not deprive the Owner of any action, right
or remedy otherwise available to it for breach of any of the provisions of the Contract Documents.
12.3 ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORK
12 3.1 If the Owner prefers to accept Work which is defective or otherwise not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract
Documents, the Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case the Contract Sum will be reduced
as appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made.
AIA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL. CONDm0NS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN
INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.N., WASHINGTON, D C 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright
laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation
until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201 -1997
User Document: A201.DOC -- 2/9/1999. AIA License Number 111808, which expires on 2/28/2000 -- Page #35
13.1 GOVERNING LAW
13.1.1 The Contract shall be governed by the law of tho placo where tho Project is located. laws of Texas, and venue shall lie in
Williamson County, Texas.
13.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS
ARTICLE 13
MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves, their partners, successors,. assigns and legal representatives to the
other party hereto and to partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives of such other party in respect to covenants, agreements
and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Except as provided in Subparagraph 13.2.2, noithcr party to the Contract shall
Contractor may not assign its
rights under the Contract Documents or assign any rights to any monies due or to become due. Any entity which shall succeed to the
rights of Owner shall be entitled to enforce the rights of Owner hereunder. Any assignment by Contractor without prior written consent
from Owner shall be void.
13.2.2 Tho Own r may, without c nsant of the Contractor, assign the Contract to an institutional lender providing construction
The Contractor shall execute all consents r asonably required to facilitate -uch assignment.
13.3 WRITTEN NOTICE
13.3.1 Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or a member of the firm or
entity or to an officer of the corporation for which it was intended, or if delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail to the last
business address known to the party giving notice.
13.4 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES
13.4.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition
to and not a limitation of duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law.
13.4.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner, Architect or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded them
under the Contract, nor shall such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach thereunder, except as may
be specifically agreed in writing.
13.4.3 The invalidity of any part or provision of the Contract Documents shall not impair or affect in any manner whatsoever the
validity, enforceability or effect of the remainder of the Contract Documents.
13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
13.5.1 Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Work required by the Contract Documents or by laws, ordinances, rules,
regulations or orders of public authorities having jurisdiction shall be made at an appropriate time. Unless otherwise provided, the
Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable
to the Owner, or with the appropriate public authority, and shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections and approvals. The
Contractor shall give the Architect and Owner timely written notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that
the Architect and Owner may be present for such procedures. The Owner shall bear costs of tests, inspections or approvals which do
not become requirements until after bids arc received or negotiations concluded
ALA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT' 1997 - THE AMERICAN
INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 -5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright
laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the ALA and can be reproduced without violation
until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201 -1997
User Document: A201.DOC -- 2/9/1999. AIA License Number 111808, which expires on 2/28/2000 -- Page #36
13.5.2 If the Architect, Owner or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require additional testing,
inspection or approval not included under Subparagraph 13.5. 1, the Architect will, upon written authorization from the Owner, instruct
the Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing, inspection or approval by an entity acceptable to the Owner, and the
Contractor shall give timely written notice to the Architect and Owner of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that
the Architect may be present for such procedures. Such costs, except as provided in Subparagraph 13.5.3, shall be at the Owner's
expense.
13.5.3 If such procedures for testing, inspection or approval under Subparagraphs 13.5.1 and 13.5.2 reveal failure of the portions
of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents, or reveal faulty or otherwise defective Work, all
costs made necessary by such failure including those of repeated procedures and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses
shall be at the Contractor's expense.
13.5.4 Required certificates of testing, inspection or approval shall, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, be secured
by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Architect.
13.5.5 If the Architect is to observe tests, inspections or approvals required by the Contract Documents, the Architect will do so
promptly and, where practicable, at the normal place of testing.
13.5.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid unreasonable delay in
the Work.
13.6 INTEREST
13.6.1 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Documents shall bear interest from the date payment is due at such rate as the
parties may agree upon in writing
ea ail No interest shall be due on sums properly retained by Owner.
434
13.7.1
13.7 COSTS AND ATTORNEYS FEES
13.7.1 If any action at law or in equity is necessary to enforce or interpret the terms of the Contract Documents, the prevailine party
shall be entitled to reasonable attorney's fees, costs. and necessary disbursements in addition to any relief to which it may be entitled.
ALA DOCUMENT A20I- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN
INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N W., WASHINGTON, DC 20006-5292 WARNING• Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S copyright
laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation
until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201 -1997
User Document: A201.DOC -- 2/9/1999. AIA License Number 111808, which expires on 2/28/2000 -- Page 837
13.8 CONTRACTOR'S RECORDS
13.8.1 Contractor agrees to furnish Owner such information as may be available in Contractor's files and records for the Project for
the purpose of aiding Owner in establishing a depreciation schedule for the Project or such portions thereof as Owner may determine.
13.9 MECHANICS' AND MATERIALMEN'S LIENS
13.9.1 Contractor shall save and keep Owner, Owner's loan proceeds and Owner's property free from all mechanics' and
materialmen's liens and all other liens and claims, legal or equitable, arising out of Contractor's Work hereunder. In the event any
such lien or claim is filed by anyone claiming by, through or under Contractor, Contractor shall remove and discharge same within
ten (10) days of the filing thereof.
13.9.2 Contractor shall and hereby does subordinate any and all liens, rights and interest (whether choate or inchoate and including
without limitation, all mechanics' and materialmen's liens under the applicable laws of the State of Texas, whether contractual.
statutory or constitutional) owned, claimed or held, or to be owned, claimed or held by Contractor in and to any part of the Work or
the property on which the Work is performed, to the liens securing payments of sums now or hereafter borrowed by Owner in
connection with the development, desien and/or construction of the Project and to all liens, rights and interests of any long - term ground
lessee of the Project. Contractor shall execute such further and additional evidence of the subordination of liens, rights and interests
as Owner. Owner's interim or permanent lenders, or any long -term ground lessee may require. The subordination of liens is made in
consideration of and as an inducement to the execution and delivery of the Contract Documents, and shall be applicable despite any
dispute between the parties hereto or any others, or any default by Owner under the Contract Documents or otherwise.
13.9.3 Contractor shall include in every subcontract relating to the Work to which it is a party and in each and every lower tier
subcontract. provisions (1) that the person or entity doing Work, performing labor or furnishing materials pursuant to each subcontract
agrees to subordinate any mechanics' or materialmen's lien or any other claim against any part of the Work or the property on which
the Work is performed or materials furnished under the Contract Documents or such subcontract, to the liens securing payment of sums
now or hereafter borrowed by Owner in connection with the development, design and/or construction of the Project and to all liens,
rights and interests of any long - term ground lessee of the Project. (2) that the required subordinations are made in consideration of
and as an inducement to the execution and delivery of the Contract Documents and the subcontract in which it appears, and shall be
applicable despite any dispute between or among Owner, Contractor or any Subcontractor or any default by Owner, Contractor or any
Subcontractor under the Contract Documents or any other subcontract or agreement and (3) that Owner. Owner's interim and
permanent lenders and any long -term ground lessee are express third - party beneficiaries who have supplied consideration for such
subordinations.
14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR
4
4
requirod by Subparagraph 2..2.1.
ARTICLE 14
TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT
AIA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL. CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN
INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 -5292. WARNING: Unhcensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright
laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation
until the date of expiration as noted below.
E lecuronic Format A201 - 1997
User Document: A201.DOC -- 2/9/1999. AIA License Number 111808, which expires on 2/28/2000 -- Page #38
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
' 14.1 .2 Tho Contractor may terminate the Contract if, through n
the Contractor, repeated suspensions, delays or interruptions of the entire W rk by th Owner as described in Paragraph 11.2 c nstituto
in the aggregate m re than 100 percent of the t tal number f days scheduled f r c repletion, r 120 days in any 365 day period,
whichever is loss.
11.1.2 If one of the reasons described in Subparagraph 11.1.1 or 14.1.2 exists, the Contractor may, upon seven days' written notice
to the Owner and Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work executed and for proven loss with
respect to materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery, including reasonable overhead, profit and damages
11.1.1 If the Work is stopped for a period of 60 consecutive days through no actor fault of the C enactor or a Subcontractor or
their agents or employees or any other persons performing portions- ef-the Work under contract with the Contractor because the wner
has persistently failed to fulfill the- Gwnei =s oblip boas under the Contract Docu :^°^' -..�., s- with- respect to matters important to the progress
and recover from the Owner as provided in Subparagraph 11.1 3.
14.1.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract Documents in the manner provided in Paragraph 14.1.2 if repeated suspensions
delays or interruptions by the Owner constitute in the aggregate more than one hundred percent (100 %) of the total number of days
scheduled for completion, or one hundred twenty (120) days in any 365 -day period, whichever is less or if all the Work is entirely
stopped for a continuous period of sixty (60) days for any of the following reasons through no act or fault of the Contractor or a
Subcontractor, Sub - subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing portions of the Work under contract
with the Contractor: (1) issuance of an order of a court or other public authority having jurisdiction: (2) an act of government, such
as a declaration of national emergency, making material unavailable:or (3) because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for
Payment and has not notified the Contractor of the reason for withholding certification or because the Owner has not made payment
on a Certificate of Payment (without cause) within the time stated in the Contract Documents.
14.1.2 If one of the above reasons exists, the Contractor may, upon fourteen (14) days' written notice to the Owner and Architect.
terminate the Contract Documents, unless such reason is cured prior to the expiration of the notice period, and Owner shall incur no
liability to Contractor by reason of such termination, except that Contractor shall be entitled to recover from the Owner payment for
Work properly executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination (the basis for such
payment shall be as provided in the Contract Documents) and for payment for costs directly related to Work theretofore and thereafter
performed by Contractor in terminating such Work including reasonable demobilization and cancellation charges provided such Work
is authorized in advance by Architect and Owner.
14.1.3 The Owner shall not be responsible for damages for loss of anticipated profits on Work not performed on account of any
termination described in Paragraphs 14.1.1 and 14.1.2.
14.1.4 Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, the Contractor's right to terminate the Contract Documents shall always be
subject and subordinate to the right of any lender on the Project to assume the position of Owner under the Contract Documents.
444 Tr .e - n Tr9N BY THE OWNER FO CAUSE
112.1
4
4
h thcrwiso is guilty of substantial breach f a pr vision of the Contract Documents.
AIA DOCUMENT A20I- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN
INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N W , WASHINGTON, DC. 20006 -5292. WARNING' Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copynght
laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation
until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic FormatA201 -1997
User Document: A201.DOC -- 2/9/1999. AIA License Number 111808, which expires on 2/28/2000 -- Page 439
4
owned by the Contractor;
accept a:figlarnent of subcontracts pursuant to Paragraph 5.1; an
the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor a detailed accounting of th costs incurred by the wneF-in finishing tho
Work.
11 2.3 When the Owner terminates tho Contract for no of tho reasons stated in Subparagraph 11.2,1, the C ntractor shall not be
entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished.
11.2.1
be paid to the Contractor. If suck costs and damages exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to tho Owner.
The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner, as the case may be, shall be certified by the Architect, upon application, and this
obligation for payment shall survive termination of the - Contract,
14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER
14 2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract Documents if the Contractor: (1) refuses or fails to supply sufficient skilled workers
or suitable materials or equipment to complete the Work in a diligent, efficient, timely, workmanlike skillful and careful manner: (2)
fails to make prompt payments to Subcontractors for labor, materials and/or equipment in accordance with the respective agreements
between the Contractor and the Subcontractors; (3) disregards laws, ordinances, rules regulations or orders of a public authority having
jurisdiction: (4) disregards the instruction of Architect or Owner (when such instructions are based on the requirements of the Contract
Documents); (5) files or records or allows anyone claiming by, through or under Contractor to file or record a lien or other claim
against Owner, Owner's loan proceeds or Owner's property without removing and discharging same as required under the Contract
Documents: or (6) otherwise does not fully comply with the Contract Documents
14.2.2 When any of the above reasons exists, the Owner may, without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Owner and
after giving the Contractor and the Contractor's surety, if any, seven (7) days' written notice (except in cases of emergency as
reasonably determined by the Owner), terminate the services of the Contractor and may: (1) take possession of the site and Project
and of all materials. equipment, tools and construction equipment and machinery thereon owned, rented or leased by the Contractor
and (2) finish the Work by whatever method the Owner may deem expedient.
14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract Documents for one of the reasons stated in Paragraph 14.2.1, the Contractor shall
not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished.
14.2.4 To the extent the costs of completing Work, including compensation for additional professional services and expenses. exceed
those costs which would have been payable to Contractor to complete the Work except for Contractor's default, Contractor will pay
the difference to Owner, and this obligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract Documents. Such costs incurred by
Owner will be determined by the Owner and confirmed by the Architect.
14.2.5 It is recognized that (1) if an order for relief is entered on behalf of Contractor pursuant to Title 11 of the United States Code,
(2) if any other similar order is entered under any other debtor relief laws, (3) if Contractor makes a general assignment for the benefit
of its creditors. (4) if a receiver is appointed on account of its insolvency, any such event could impair or frustrate Contractor's
performance of the Contract Documents. Accordingly, it is areed that upon the occurrence of any such event. Owner shall be entitled
to request of Contractor or its successor in interest adequate assurance of future performance in accordance with the terms and
conditions of the Contract Documents. Failure to comply with such request within ten (10) days of delivery of the request shall entitle
AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN
INSTFrUrE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 -5292. WARNING. Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copynght
laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation
until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201 -1997
User Document: A201.DOC -- 2/9/1999. AIA License Number 111808, which expires on 2/28/2000 -- Page #40
Owner to terminate the Contract Documents and to the accompanying rights set forth above in Paragraphs 14.2.1 through 14.2.4 hereof.
In all events pending receipt of adequate assurance of performance and actual performance in accordance therewith, Owner shall be
entitled to proceed with the Work with its own forces or with other contractors on a time and material or other appropriate basis. the
cost of which will be backcharged against the Contract Sum.
14.2.6 In addition to Owner's right to remove Contractor from any part of the Work pursuant to the Contract Documents, Owner
may, at any time, at will and without cause, terminate any part of the Work or any subcontract or all remaining Work for any reason
whatsoever by giving seven (71 days' prior written notice to Contractor specifying the Work or subcontract to be terminated and the
effective date of termination. Contractor shall continue to prosecute the part of the Work or the Work not terminated. If the Work or
any subcontract is so terminated. Owner shall incur no liability to Contractor by reason of such termination. except that Contractor
shall be entitled to payment for Work done and properly executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective
date of termination, (the basis for such payment shall be as provided in the Contract Documents) and for costs directly related to Work
theretofore and thereafter performed by Contractor in terminating such Work or subcontract including reasonable demobilization and
cancellation charges provided said Work is authorized in advance by Architect and Owner. No payment shall be made by Owner,
however, to the extent that such Work or subcontract is. was or could have been terminated under the Contract Documents or an
equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the Contract Documents. In case of such termination, Owner will
issue a Construction Change Directive or authorize a Change Order in making any required adjustment to the date of Substantial
Completion and/or the Contract Sum. For the part of the Work terminated, the applicable provisions of the Contract Documents shall
continue in full force and effect as to all Work performed prior to the effective date of termination. For the remainder of the Work.
the Contract Documents shall remain in full force and effect.
14.2.7 The Owner shall not be responsible for damages for loss of anticipated profits on Work notperformed on account of any
termination described in Paragraph 14.2.6.
14.2.8 Upon a determination by a court of competent jurisdiction that termination of Contractor pursuant to the Contract Documents
was wrongful, such termination will be deemed converted to a termination for convenience, and Contractor's remedy for wrongful
termination shall be limited to the recovery of the payments permitted for termination for convenience as set forth herein.
14.3 SUSPENSION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE
14.3.1 The Owner may, without cause, order the Contactor in writing to suspend, delay or interrupt the Work in whole or in part
for such period of time as the Owner may determine.
14.3.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted for increases in the cost and time caused by suspension, delay or
interruption as described in Subparagraph 14.3.1. Adjustment of the Contract Sum shall include profit. No adjustment shall be made
to the extent:
that performance is, was or would have been so suspended, delayed or interrupted by another cause for which the
Contractor is responsible; or
.2 that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the Contract.
14.4 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE
14.4.1 The Owner may, at any time, terminate the Contract for the Owner's convenience and without cause.
14.4.2 Upon receipt of written notice from the Owner of such termination for the Owner's convenience, the Contractor shall:
.1 cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice;
.2 take actions necessary, or that the Owner may direct, for the protection and preservation of the Work; and
.1
AIA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AlA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN
INSTTiTTTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, DC. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright
laws and will subject the vtoiator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation
until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201-1997
User Document: A201.DOC -- 2/9/1999. AIA License Number 111808, which expires on 2/28/2000 -- Page 641
.3 except for Work directed to be performed prior to the effective date of termination stated in the notice, terminate
all existing subcontracts and purchase orders and enter into no further subcontracts and purchase orders.
14.4.3 In case of such termination for the Owner's convenience, the Contractor shall be entitled to receive payment for Work
executed, and costs incurred by reason of such termination, along with reasonable overhead and profit on the Work not executed.
OWNER: CITY OF ROUND ROCK, TEXAS CONTRACTOR •
By: By:
Its
Dated: Dated:
AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT TOR CONSTRUCTION • 1997 EDITION - AIA • COPYRIGHT 1997 • THE AMERICAN
INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.IV.. WASHINGTON. D C. 20006 -5292. WARNING Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright
laws end will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation
until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201 -1997
User Document: A201.DOC -- 219'i9' %9 AiA License Number 111808, which expires on 2/28/2000 -- Page #42
1
1
1
THIS ADDENDUM TO STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR AND
I ADDENDUM TO GENERAL CONDITIONS ( "Addendum ") shall (i) amend certain provisions of the Standard Form of Agreement
between Owner and Contractor to which this Addendum is affixed (the "Standard Form "), and (ii) amend, supplement, modify, delete
and replace by substitution the indicated provisions of the General Conditions. If the numerical section referenced below is not one
contained in the General Conditions, then such text shall be added as a new section. If the numerical section referenced below is one
I for which there is a counterpart section referenced in the General Conditions, then the referenced text shall be deemed added to the
referenced section in the General Conditions, unless otherwise indicated below. Wherever the terms hereof are inconsistent with the
General Conditions, the terms hereof shall be controlling.
1
1 ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE
11.1.1 Contractor shall, at its sole expense, maintain in effect at all times during the full term of its Work under the
1 Contract Documents and as otherwise required under the Contract Documents, insurance coverages with limits not
less than those set forth below in the Schedule of Insurance Coverages with insurers licensed to do business in the
State of Texas and acceptable to Owner and under forms of policies satisfactory to Owner. None of the requirements
1 contained herein as to types, limits or Owner's approval of insurance coverage to be maintained by Contractor is
intended to and shall not in any manner limit, qualify or quantify the liabilities and obligations assumed by
Contractor under the Contract Documents or otherwise provided by law. In the event of any failure by Contractor
to comply with the provisions of this Article 11, Owner may, without in any way compromising or waiving any right
1 or remedy at law or in equity, on notice to Contractor, purchase such insurance, at Contractor's expense, provided
that Owner shall have no obligation to do so and if Owner shall do so, Contractor shall not be relieved of or excused
from the obligation to obtain and maintain such insurance amounts and coverages.
1 11.2 SCHEDULE OF INSURANCE COVERAGES
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ADDENDUM TO STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND
CONTRACTOR AND ADDENDUM TO GENERAL CONDITIONS
Coverage Minimum Amounts and Limits
11.2.1 Worker's Compensation
Worker's Compensation Statutory Limits
Employer's Liability 5500,000
The policy shall include a Waiver of Subrogation in favor of the Indemnitees (as defined in the Contract Documents).
11.2.2 Commercial General Liability
Bodily Injury/
Property Damage
(Occurrence Basis)
- ADDENDUM TO STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT
This policy shall be on a form acceptable to Owner, endorsed to include the Indemnitees as additional insureds,
contain cross - liability and severability of interest endorsements, state that this insurance is primary insurance as
regards any other insurance carried by the Indemnitees, and shall include the following coverages:
.1 Premises /Operations.
.2 Independent Contractors.
.3 Completed Operations for a period of two (2) years following the acceptance of Contractor's Work.
.4 Broad Form Contractual Liability specifically in support of, but not limited to, the Indemnity sections of
the contract.
43
51,000,000 each occurrence, or
equivalent, subject to a S1,000,000
aggregate applicable to the Project
.5 Broad Form Property Damage.
.6 Personal Injury Liability with employee and contractual exclusions removed.
.7 Delete Exclusions relative to Collapse, Explosion and Underground Property Damage Hazards.
11.2.3 Comprehensive Automobile Liability
.1 Bodily Injury
.2 Property Damage
This policy shall be on a standard form written to cover all owned, hired and non - owned automobiles. The policy
shall be endorsed to include the Indemnitees as additional insureds, contain cross - liability and severability of interest
endorsements, and state that this insurance is primary insurance as regards any other insurance carried by the
Indemnitees.
11.2.4 Umbrella Excess Liability Insurance
Bodily Injury/
Property Damage
(Occurrence Basis)
This policy shall be written on an umbrella excess basis above coverages as described herein, endorsed to include
the Indemnitees as additional insureds, contain cross - liability and severability of interest endorsements, and state that
this insurance is primary insurance as regards any other insurance carried by the Indemnitees. In addition, the policy
shall be endorsed to provide defense coverage obligations.
11.2.5 Broad Form Boiler and Machinery Insurance
11.2.6 Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond
11.3 BUILDER'S RISK INSURANCE
44
$250,000 per person
$500,000 per occurrence
$100,000 per occurrence,
or equivalent
$2,000,000 per occurrence
$2,000,000 aggregate
Contractor shall maintain, at its sole expense, such boiler and machinery insurance as may be required by the
Contract Documents or by law. This insurance shall include the interests of Owner, Contractor and Subcontractors
in the Work as set forth herein (and in Subparagraph 11.3.1 below).
.1 If requested by Owner, Contractor shall obtain, and shall require each Subcontractor designated by Owner
to obtain, a Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment bond in the amount of 100% of the
Contract Sum in the case of Contractor, and 100% of the applicable contract amount for designated
Subcontractor. Contractor shall deliver the executed originals and two (2) executed copies of each of its
required bonds to Owner not later than the date of execution of the Agreement and deliver the executed
originals and two (2) executed copies of each of the required Subcontractor bonds to Owner not later than
the date of execution of the Subcontractor bond with any such Subcontractor.
.2 The bonds shall in all respects conform to the requirements of the laws of the State of Texas.
Contractor shall maintain, at its sole expense, all -risk builder's risk insurance as follows:
11.3.1 Contractor shall carry completed value form builder's risk property insurance upon the entire Work for 100% of the
full replacement cost value thereof (100% includes additional costs of architectural and engineering services in the
event of a loss). This policy shall include the interests of the Owner and the other Indemnitees, Contractor, and
Subcontractors in the Work as named insureds, as their interests may appear, and shall be on an "All Risk" basis for
physical loss or damage including, without limitation, fire, flood, earthquake, subsidence, hail, theft, vandalism and
malicious mischief and shall include coverage for portions of the Work while it is stored off the site or is in transit.
This policy shall provide, by endorsement or otherwise, that Contractor shall be solely responsible for the payment
of all premiums under the policy, and that Owner and the other Indemnitees shall have no obligation for the payment
thereof, notwithstanding that Owner and the other Indemnitees are named insureds under the policy. Any insured
loss or claim of loss shall be adjusted by the Owner, and any settlement payments shall be made payable to the
Owner as trustee for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to the requirements of any applicable
mortgage clause. Upon the occurrence of an insured loss or claim of loss, monies received will be held by Owner
who shall make distribution in accordance with an agreement to be reached in such event between Owner and
Contractor. If the parties are unable to agree between themselves on the settlement of the loss, such dispute shall
be submitted to a court of competent jurisdiction to determine ownership of the disputed amounts but the Work of
the Project shall nevertheless progress during any such period of dispute without prejudice to the rights of any party
to the dispute. The Contractor shall be responsible for any loss within the deductible area of the policy.
11.4 CONTRACTOR'S EQUIPMENT POLICY
11.4.1 Any such insurance policy covering Contractor's or its Subcontractors' equipment against loss by physical damage
shall include an endorsement waiving the insurer's right of subrogation against the Indemnitees. Such insurance shall
be Contractor's and its Subcontractors' sole and complete means of recovery for any such loss. Should Contractor
or its Subcontractors choose to self - insure this risk, it is expressly agreed that the Contractor and its Subcontractors
hereby waive any claim for damage or loss to said equipment in favor of the Indemnitees.
11.5 EVIDENCE OF INSURANCE
11.5.1 Evidence of the insurance coverage required to be maintained by the Contractor under this Article 11, represented
by Certificates of Insurance issued by the insurance carrier, must be famished to the Owner prior to Contractor
starting Work. Certificates of Insurance shall specify the insured status mentioned above in this Article 11, as well
as the waivers of subrogation. Such Certificates of Insurance shall state that Owner will be notified in writing thirty
(30) days prior to cancellation, material change, or non - renewal of insurance. Contractor shall provide to Owner
a certified copy of any and all applicable insurance policies upon request of Owner. Timely renewal certificates will
be provided to Owner as the coverage renews.
11.6 SUBCONTRACTORS' INSURANCE
11.6.1 Insurance similar to that required of Contractor shall be provided by or on behalf of all Subcontractors to cover their
operations performed under the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be held responsible for any modification in
these insurance requirements as they apply to Subcontractors. Contractor shall maintain Certificates of Insurance
from all Subcontractors, enumerating among other things, the waivers in favor of, and insured status of, the
Indemnitees, as required herein, and make them available to Owner upon request.
11.6.2 The term "Subcontractor(s)" for the purposes of this Article 11 shall include subcontractors of any tier.
11.7 RELEASE AND WAIVER OF SUBROGATION
11.7.1 Contractor hereby releases, and shall cause its Subcontractors to release, Owner and the other Indemnitees from any
and all claims or causes of action whatsoever which Contractor and/or its Subcontractors might otherwise possess
resulting in or from or in any way connected with any loss covered or which should have been covered by insurance,
including the deductible portion thereof, maintained and/or required to be maintained by Contractor and/or its
Subcontractors pursuant to the Contract Documents, including without limitation, those arising out of the sole or
concurrent negligence of Owner and the other indemnitees.
11.8 INDEMNIFICATION
11.8.1 To the fullest extent permitted by applicable law, Contractor shall and does agree to indemnify, protect, defend and
hold harmless the Owner, Owner's partners, affiliated companies of Owner and of any partner, Architect and their
respective officers, directors, shareholders, employees and agents (collectively the "Indemnitees ") from and against
all claims, damages, losses, liens, causes of action, suits, judgments, and expenses, including attorney fees, of any
nature, kind or description of any person or entity, directly or indirectly arising out of, caused by, or resulting from
(in whole or in part), (1) the Work performed hereunder, or any part thereof, (2) the Contract Documents, or (3) any
act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them, or anyone that
45
they control or exercise control over, (collectively the "Liabilities "). The obligations of Contractor under this
indemnification shall apply to liabilities even if such liabilities are caused in whole or in part by the negligence
of any indemnitee. Contractor shall promptly advise Owner in writing of any action, administrative or legal
proceeding or investigation as to which this indemnification may apply, and Contractor, at Contractor's expense, shall
assume on behalf of Owner (and the other Indemnitees) and conduct with due diligence and in good faith the defense
thereof with counsel satisfactory to Owner; provided, however, that Owner shall have the right, at its option, to be
represented therein by advisory counsel of its own selection and at its own expense. In the event of failure by the
Contractor to fully perform in accordance with this indemnification paragraph, Owner, at its option, and without
relieving Contractor of its obligations hereunder, may so perform, but all costs and expenses so incurred by Owner
in that event shall be reimbursed by Contractor to Owner, together with interest on the same from the date any such
expense was paid by Owner until reimbursed by Contractor, at the rate of interest provided to be paid on judgments
under the laws of the State of Texas. This indemnification shall not be limited to damages, compensation or benefits
payable under insurance policies, workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employees' benefit acts.
11.8.2 It is understood and agreed that Subparagraph 11.8 above is subject to, and expressly limited by, the terms and
conditions of TEX. CIV. PRACT. & REM. CODE ANN. § §130.001 - 130.005 (Vemon Supp. 1989), as amended.
Contractor shall not be obligated under Subparagraph 9.12 to indemnify or hold harmless Architect or an agent,
servant, or employee of Architect from liability or damage that:
.1 is caused by or results from:
(A) defects in plans, designs, or specifications prepared, approved, or used by the Architect; or
(B) negligence of the Architect in the rendition or conduct of professional duties called for or arising
out of the Contract Documents and the plans, designs or specifications that are a part of the
Contract Documents; and
.2 arises from:
(A) personal injury or death;
(B) property injury; or
(C) any other expense that arises from personal injury, death or property injury.
11.8.3 It is agreed with respect to any legal limitations now or hereafter in effect and affecting the validity or enforceability
of the indemnification obligation under this Paragraph 9.12, such legal limitations are made a part of the
indemnification obligation and shall operate to amend the indemnification obligation to the minimum extent necessary
to bring the provision into conformity with the requirements of such limitations, and as so modified, the
indemnification obligation shall continue in full force and effect.
11.9 CLAIMS MADE POLICIES
11.9.1 With respect to any of the insurance policies provided by Contractor pursuant to the Contract Documents which are
"claims made" policies, in the event at any time any such policies are canceled or not renewed, Contractor shall
provide a substitute insurance policy(ies) with terms and conditions and in amounts which comply with the terms
of the Contract Documents and which provide for retroactive coverage to the date of cancellation or non - renewal
to fill any gaps in coverage which may exist due to the cancellation or non - renewal of the prior "claims made"
policies. With respect to all "claims made" policies which are renewed, Contractor shall provide coverage retroactive
to the date of commencement of the Work in said renewed policy. All said substitute or renewed "claims made"
policies shall be maintained in full force and effect for the longer of (i) two years from the date of completion of
the work or (ii) as otherwise required by the Contract Documents. A certificate evidencing continuation of such
policies shall be submitted with the final Application for Payment as required by Subparagraph 9.10.2. Nothing
herein shall affect the continuing effect of the indemnity clauses in the Contract Documents.
46
1.04 CONTRACT METHOD
SECTION 01010
SUMMARY OF WORK
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Title of Work, and type of Contract.
B. Work by Others, and Future Work.
C. Work Sequence.
D. Use of Premises.
E. Owner Occupancy.
F. Pre - Ordered Products.
G. Owner - Fumished Items.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Document 00100 - Instructions to Bidders: Method of determining assigned subcontractors.
B. Document 00500 - Agreement Forms: Identification of assigned subcontractors.
C. Document 00700 - General Conditions: Provisions for use of site, and Owner occupancy.
Relations of Contractor- subcontractors.
1.03 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. Work of this Contract comprises general /remodeling construction of facilities located at 2008
Enterprise Drive as indicated on the location map provided in the contract documents for the
Project.
A. Construct the Work under a single lump sum contract.
B. Relations and responsibilities between Contractor and subcontractors shall be as defined in
Conditions of the Contract. Subcontractors shall, in addition:
1. Furnish to Contractor bonds covering faithful performance of subcontracted work and
payment of all obligations thereunder when Contractor is required to furnish such bonds to
Owner.
2. Purchase and maintain liability insurance to protect Contractor from claims for not less
than the limits of liability which Contractor is required to provide to Owner.
1.05 WORK BY OTHERS
A. Work of the Project which should be begun prior to start of Work of this Contract, and which is
specifically excluded from this Contract:
B. Work of the Project which will be executed after completion of Work of this Contract (or
coordinated during with owners forces), and which is specifically excluded from this Contract
1.06 FUTURE WORK
1. Removal of owner laboratory and office equipment. Removal of any asbestos containing
materials as reported in the owner's contracted sampling and reporting.
1. Telephone equipment and wiring installation.
A. Project may be designed for future expansion.
B. Insure that Work avoids encroachment into areas required for future work or work being
constructed by other contractors on adjacent sites.
1.07 WORK SEQUENCE
A. Required stages:
1. Locate and identify via barriers connections for incoming
utilities and take appropriate precautions to protect these locations from any damage. Any
damage to these lines shall be repaired at Contractor's expense, at no additional expense
to the Owner.
Provide all necessary electrical power and connections.
B. Remainder of work covered by the Contract Documents, as scheduled by the General
Contractor.
C. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to schedule this work and determine the order in
which it is to be executed. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect
epsting utilities and elements that are not scheduled in this project. Any utilities and /or
building elements not scheduled that are damaged shall be repaired to like -new condition
by the Contractor to the Architects satisfaction, at no additional expense to the Owner.
1.08 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES
A. Contractor shall limit use of premises for Work, for storage, and for access, to allow:
1. Owner adjacent occupancy.
2. Work by other contractors.
3. Public usage.
4. On -going Owner adjacent operations.
B. Coordinate use of premises under direction of Owner and Architect.
Summary of work 01010 - 2
C. Assume full responsibility for protection and safekeeping of products under this Contract.
D. Obtain and pay for use of additional storage or work areas needed for operations under this
Contract.
1.09 OWNER OCCUPANCY
A. Owner will occupy adjacent premises during entire construction period for conduct of his normal
operations. Cooperate with Owner in scheduling operations to minimize conflict and to facilitate
Owner usage.
PART2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not used
END OF SECTION
Summary of Work 01010 - 3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
B. At closeout of Contract, funds remaining in allowance
will be credited to Owner by Change Order.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
1
1
1.4 USE OF ALLOWANCE
SECTION 01023
BETTERMENT FUND
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Monetary amount of allowance in Contract Sum.
B. Disbursement of funds from allowance.
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 00700 - General Conditions: Contractor and subcontractor percentages of
overhead and profit for Change Orders.
B. Section 00700 - General Conditions: Changes in Contract Sum due to adjustment of
costs.
C. Section 01370 - Schedule of Values: Scheduling of allowance.
1.3 ALLOWANCE
A. Allow the lump sum of $8,500.00, to be included in the Base Bid for disbursal at Owner's
instructions.
B. Contractor's costs for products, labor, insurance, payroll taxes, bond, transportation,
equipment rental, and overhead and profit will be included in Change Orders authorizing
expenditure of funds from this allowance.
A. Funds will be drawn from allowance only by Change Order should Owner wish to upgrade
or add to the contract.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
NOT USED
1 NOT USED
1
1
END OF SECTION
SECTION 01041
PROJECT COORDINATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Coordinate Work with that of other contractors and work by Owner under administration of
Construction Superintendent.
B. Construction Superintendent is to be appointed by the General Contractor.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Document 00700 - General Conditions: Duties of Construction Superintendent.
B. Section 01010 - Summary of Work: Work covered by each contract Work sequence. Owner
occupancy.
C. Section 01200 - Project Meetings.
D. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout Closeout procedures.
1.03 CONSTRUCTION MOBILIZATION
A. Cooperate with Construction Superintendent in allocation of mobilization areas of site: for field offices
and sheds, for materials storage, access, traffic, and parking facilities. During construction coordinate
use of site and facilities through Construction Superintendent.
B. Comply with Construction Superintendent's procedures for intra- project communications: Submittals,
reports and records, schedules, coordination drawings, and recommendations; and resolution of
ambiguities and conflicts.
C. Comply with instructions of Construction Superintendent for use of temporary utilities and construction
facilities.
D. Coordinate field engineering and layout work under instructions of Construction Superintendent.
1.04 SCHEDULES
A. Submit preliminary progress schedule in accordance with Section 01340 to Construction
Superintendent coordinated with Construction Superintendent's Project construction schedule. After
review, revise and resubmit schedule to comply with revised Project schedule.
B. During progress of work revise and resubmit as directed by Construction Superintendent.
1.05 SUBMITTALS TO CONSTRUCTION MANAGERJARCHTECT
A. Submit preliminary shop drawings, product data and samples in accordance with Section 01340 for
review for compliance with Contract Documents, for field dimensions and clearances, for relation to
available space, and for relation to work of separate contracts. After review, revise and resubmit for
transmittal to Architect.
B. Submit applications for payment on AIA G702 AND G703 forms for review, and for transmittal to
Architect.
C. Submit requests for interpretation of Contract Documents, and obtain instructions through Construction
Superintendent.
D. Process requests for substitutions, and change orders, through Construction Superintendent.
E. Deliver closeout submittals for review and preliminary inspections, and for transmittal to Architect.
1.06 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Provide information required by Construction Superintendent for his preparation of coordination
drawings.
B. Review drawings prior to Construction Superintendent's submittals to Architect.
1.07 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A. Notify Construction Superintendent when Work is considered ready for Substantial Completion.
Accompany Construction Superintendent on preliminary inspection to determine items to be listed for
completion or correction in Contractor's notice of Substantial Completion.
B. Comply with Construction Superintendents instructions to correct items of work listed in executed
Certificates of Substantial Completion and for access to Owner- occupied areas.
C. Notify Construction Superintendents when Work is considered finally complete. Accompany
Construction Manager /Architect on preliminary final inspection.
D. Comply with Construction Superintendent's instructions for completion of items of work determined in
Architect final inspection.
PART2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
Project Coordination 01041 - 2
1
1
SECTION 01045
' CUTTING AND PATCHING
1 PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
' A. Work included: This Section establishes general requirements pertaining to cutting (including
excavating), fitting, and patching of the Work required to:
1 1. Make the several parts fit properly;
2 Uncover work to provide for installing, inspecting, or both, of ill -timed work;
3. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirement of the Contract Documents; and
' 4. Remove and replace defective work.
B. Related work:
1 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications.
2. In addition to other requirements specified, upon the Architects request uncover work to
' provide for inspection by the Architect of covered work, and remove samples of installed
materials for testing.
3. Do not cut or alter work performed under separate contracts without the Architect's written
'
permission.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1 A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary
crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for
proper performance of the work of this Section.
'
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Request for Architect's consent:
1. Prior to cutting which effects structural safety, submit written request to the Architect for
permission to proceed with cutting.
2. Should conditions of the Work, or schedule, indicate a required change of materials or
methods for cutting and patching, so notify the Architect and secure his written permission
and the required Change Order prior to proceeding.
B. Notices to the Architect:
1 1. Prior to cutting and patching performed pursuant to the Architect's instructions, submit cost
estimate to the Architect. Secure the Architects approved cost estimates and type of
reimbursement before proceeding with cutting and patching.
2. Submit written notice to the Architect designating the time the Work will be uncovered, to provide
for the Architect's observation.
1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. For replacement of items removed, use materials complying with pertinent Sections of these
Specifications.
2.2 PAYMENT FOR COSTS
A. The Owner will reimburse the Contractor for cutting and patching performed pursuant to the written
Change Order, after claim for such reimbursement is submitted by the Contractor. Perform other
cutting and patching needed to comply with the Contract Documents at no additional cost to the
Owner.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Inspection:
1. Inspect easting conditions, including elements sub -ject to
movement or damage during cutting, excavating, patching, and backfilling.
2. After uncovering the work, inspect conditions affect- ing installation of new work.
B. Discrepancies:
1. If uncovered conditions are not as anticipated, im- mediately notify the Architect and secure
needed directions.
2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION PRIOR TO CUTTING
A. Provide required protection including, but not necessarily limited to, shoring, bracing, and support to
maintain structural integrity of the Work.
3.3 PERFORMANCE
A. Perform required excavating and backfilling as required under pertinent other Sections of these
Specifications.
1. Perform cutting and demolition by methods which will prevent damage to other portions of
the Work and provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repair and new work.
2. Perform fitting and adjusting of products to provide finished installation complying with the
specified tolerances and finishes.
END OF SECTION
Cutting & Patching 01045 - 2
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
SECTION 01050
FIELD ENGINEERING
A. Work included: Provide such field engineering services as are required for proper completion of the
Work including, but not necessarily limited to:
1. Establishing and maintaining lines and levels;
2. Structural design of shores, forms, and similar items provided by the Contractor as part of
his means and methods of construction.
B. Related work:
1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications.
2. Additional requirements for field engineering also may be described in other Sections of
these Specifications.
3. As described in subparagraph 3.3.12 of the General Conditions, the Owner will furnish
survey describing the physical characteristics, legal limitations, utility locations, and legal
description of the site.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods
needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340.
B. Upon request of the Architect, submit:
1. Data demonstrating qualifications of persons proposed to be engaged for field engineering
services.
2. Documentation verifying accuracy of field engineering work.
3. Certification, signed by the Contractor's retained field engineer, certifying that elevations and
locations of improvements are in conformance or non - conformance with requirements of the
Contract Documents.
1.4 PROCEDURES
A. In addition to procedures directed by the Contractor for proper performance of the Contractor's
responsibilities:
1. Locate and protect control points before starting work on the site.
2. Preserve permanent reference points during progress of the Work.
3. Do not change or relocate reference points or items of the Work without specific approval
from the Architect.
4. Promptly advise the Architect when a reference point is lost or destroyed, or requires relocation
because of other changes in the Work.
a. Upon direction of the Architect, require the field engineer to replace reference stakes or
markers.
b. Locate such replacements according to the original survey control.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 01090
REFERENCE STANDARDS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Applicability of Reference Standards.
B. Provision of Reference Standards at site.
C. Acronyms used in Contract Documents for Reference Standards. Source of Reference
Standards.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Document 00700 - General Conditions: Reference Standards.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or Federal Standards, comply with
requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by
applicable codes.
B. The date of the standard is that in effect as of the Bid date, or date of Owner - Contractor Agreement
when there are no bids, except when a specific date is specified.
C. When required by individual Specifications section, obtain copy of standard. Maintain copy atjobsite
during submittals, planning, and progress of the specific work, until Substantial Completion.
1.04 SCHEDULE OF REFERENCES
AA Aluminum Association
818 Connecticut Avenue, N.W.
Washington, DC 20006
AABC Associated Air Balance Council
1000 Vermont Avenue, N.W.
Washington, DC 20005
AASHTO American Association of State Highway
and Transportation Officials
444 North Capitol Street, N.W.
Washington, DC 20001
ACI American Concrete Institute
Box 19150
Reford Station
Detroit, MI 48219 •
01090 -1
ADC Air Diffusion Council
230 North Michigan Avenue
Chicago, IL 60601
AGC Associated General Contractors of America
1957 E Street, N.W.
Washington, DC 20006
Al Asphalt Institute
Asphalt Institute Building
College Park, MD 20740
ARC American Institute of Timber Construction
333 W. Hampden Avenue
Englewood, CO 80110
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
400 North Michigan Avenue
Eighth Floor
Chicago, IL 60611
AISI American Iron and Steel Institute
1000 16th Street, N.W. '
Washington, DC 20036
AMCA Air Movement and Control Association
30 West University Drive
Arlington Heights, IL 60004
ANSI American National Standards Institute
1430 Broadway
New York, NY 10018
APA American Plywood Association
Box 11700
Tacoma, WA 98411
ARI Air- Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
1815 North Fort Myer Drive
Arlington, VA 22209
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and
Air Conditioning Engineers
1791 Tullie Circle, N.E.
Atlanta, GA 30329
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
345 East 47th Street
New York, NY 10017
ASPA American Sod Producers Association
Association Building
Ninth and Minnesota
Hastings, NE 68901
01090 - 2
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
1916 Race Street
Phildelphia, PA 19103
AWWA American Water Works Association
6666 West Quincy Avenue
Denver, CO 80235
AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute
2310 South Walter Reed Drive
Arlington, VA 22206
AWPA American Wood - Preservers' Association
7735 Old Georgetown Road
Bethesda, MD 20014
AWS American Welding Society
550 LeJeune Road
Miami, FL 33135
CDA Copper Development Association
57th Floor, Chrysler Building
405 Lexington Avenue
New York, NY 10174
CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute
1101 Connecticut Avenue, N.W.
Washington, DC 20036
CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
933 Plum Grove Road
Schaumburg, IL 60195
EJCDC Engineers' Joint Contract Documents
Committee
American Consulting Engineers Council
1050 15th Street, N.W.
Washington, DC 20005
EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association
707 Westchester Avenue
White Plains, NY 10604
FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association
3310 Harrison
White Lakes Professional Building
Topeka, KS 66611
FM Factory Mutual System
01090 - 3
1151 Boston - Providence Tumpike
Norwood, MA 02062
FS Federal Specification
General Services Administration
Specifications and Consumer Information
Distribution Section (WFSIS)
Washington Navy Yard, Bldg. 197
Washington, DC 20407
GA Gypsum Association
1603 Orrington Avenue
Evanston, IL 60201
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics
Engineers
345 East 47th Street
New York, NY 10017
IMIAC International Masonry Industry All- Weather
Council
International Masonry Institute
815 15th Street, N.W.
Washington, DC 20005
MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association
2400 East Devon
Suite 205
Des Plaines, IL 60018
MIL Military Specification
Naval Publications and Forms Center
5801 Tabor Avenue
Philadelphia, PA 19120
ML/SFA Metal Lath /Steel Framing Association
221 North LaSalle Street
Chicago, IL 60601
NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal
Manufacturers
221 North LaSalle Street
Chicago, IL 60601
NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau
8224 Old Courthouse Road
Vienna, VA 22180
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers' Association
2101 L Street, N.W.
Washington, DC 20037
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
Battery March Park
01090 - 4
Quincy, MA 02269
NFPA National Forest Products Association
1619 Massachusetts Avenue, N.W.
Washington, DC 20036
NSWMA National Solid Wastes Management
Association
1120 Connecticut Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20036
NTMA National Terrazzo and Mosiac Association
3166 Des Plaines Avenue
Des Plaines, IL 60018
PCA Portland Cement Association
5420 Old Orchard Road
Skokie, IL 60077
PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute
201 North Wacker Drive
Chicago, IL 60606
PS Product Standard
U. S. Department of Commerce
Washington, DC 20203
RIS Redwood Inspection Service
One Lombard Street
San Francisco, CA 94111
RCSHSB Red Cedar Shingle and Handsplit Shake Bureau
515 116th Avenue
Bellevue, WA 98004
SDI Steel Deck Institute
Box 3812
St. Louis, MO 63122
SDI Steel Door Institute
712 Lakewood Center North
Cleveland, OH 44107
SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Assoc.
111 East Wacker Drive
Chicago, IL 60601
SJI Steel Joist Institute
1703 Parham Road
Suite 204
Richmond, VA 23229
01090 - 5
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors'
National Association
8224 Old Court House Road
Vienna, VA 22180
SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council
4400 Fifth Avenue
Pittsburgh, PA 15213
TAS Technical Aid Series
Construction Specifications Institute
601 North Madison Street
Alexandria, VA 22314
TCA Tile Council of America, Inc.
Box 326
Princeton, NJ 08540
UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
333 Kingston Road
Northbrook, IL 60062
WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau
Box 23145
Portland, OR 97223
PART2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used
01090 - 6
END OF SECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
SECTION 01152
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A. Work included: Comply with procedures described in this Section when applying for progress payment
and final payment under the Contract.
B. Related work:
1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications.
2. The Contract Sum and the schedule for payments are described in the Form of Agreement.
3. Payments upon Substantial Completion and Completion of the Work are described in the
General Conditions and in Section 01700 of these Specifications.
4. The Architect's approval of applications for progress payment and final payment may be
contingent upon the Architect's approval of status of Project Record Documents as
described in Section 01720 of these Specifications.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Prior to start of construction, secure the Architect's approval of the schedule of values required to be
submitted under Paragraph 9.2 of the General Conditions, and further described in Section 01370
of these Specifications.
B. During progress of the Work, modify the schedule of values as approved by the Architect to reflect
changes in the Contract Sum due to Change Orders or other modifications of the Contract.
C. Base requests for payment on the approved schedule of values.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Informal submittal: Unless otherwise directed by the Architect:
1. Make an informal submittal of request for payment by filling in, with erasable pencil, pertinent
portions of A.I.A. Document G702, "Application and Certificate for Payment" plus
continuation sheet or sheets.
2. Make this preliminary submittal to the Architect at the last regular job meeting of each month.
3. Revise the informal submittal of request for payment as agreed at the job meeting, initialing all
copies.
B. Formal submittal: Unless otherwise directed by the Architect
1. Make formal submittal of request for payment by filling in the agreed data, by typewriter or neat
lettering in ink, on A.I.A. Document G702, "Application and Certificate for Payment," plus
continuation sheet or sheets.
2. Sign and notarize the Application and Certificate for Payment.
3. Submit the original of the Application and Certificate for Payment, plus three identical copies to
the Architect.
4. The Architect will compare the formal submittal with the approved informal submittal and, when
approved, will sign the Application and Certificate for Payment, will make required copies, and
will distribute:
a. One copy to Contractor,
b. One copy to Owner; and
c. One copy to Architect's file.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 01200
PROJECT MEETINGS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Contractor participation in preconstruction conferences.
B. Contractor administration of progress meetings and pre - installation conferences.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Document 00100 - Instructions to Bidders: Pre -Bid Conference.
B. Section 01340 - Submittals and Substitutions: Progress Schedules.
C. Section 01340 - Submittals and Substitutions: Shop drawings, product data, and samples.
D. Section 01400 - Quality Control.
E. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout Project record documents. 01720 - Project Record Documents.
F. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Operation and maintenance data. 01730 - Operation and
Maintenance Data.
1.03 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCES.
A. Architect will administer preconstruction conference for execution of Owner - Contractor Agreement
and exchange of preliminary submittals.
B. Architect will administer site mobilization conference at Project site for clarificiation of Owner and
Contractor responsibilities in use of site and for review of administrative procedures.
1.04 PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. Schedule and administer Project meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum monthly
intervals, called meetings, and preinstallation conferences.
B. Make physical arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at
meetings, record minutes, and distribute copies within two days to Architect, participants, and those
affected by decisions made at meetings.
C. Attendance: Job superintendent, major subcontractors and suppliers; Owner and Architect as
appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting.
D. Suggested Agenda: Review of Work progress, status of progress schedule and adjustments thereto,
delivery schedules, submittals, maintenance of quality standards, pending changes and substitutions,
and other items affecting progress of Work.
1.05 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCES
1
A. When required in individual specification Section, convene a preinstallation conference prior to ,
commencing work of the Section.
B. Require attendance of entities directly affecting, or affected by, work of the Section. 1
C. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures, and coordination with related 1
work.
PART2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
1
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used 1
1
END OF SECTION 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Project Meetings 01200 - 2 1
1
PART 1 GENERAL
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 01310
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE
1.01 REQUIREMENT
A. Procedures for preparation, submission, and review of construction progress schedules, and
periodic updating.
A. Section 01010 - Summary of Work: Work sequence. Owner occupancy.
B. Section 01152 - Applications for Payment
C. Section 01200 - Project Meetings: Review of schedules.
D. Section 01340 - Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples.
E. Section 01370 - Schedule of Values.
1.05 FORMAT
A. Listings: Read from left to right, in ascending order for each activity. Identify each activity with the
applicable specification section number.
B. Diagram Sheet Size: Multiples of 11 inches high x 8.5 inches wide.
C. Scale and Spacing: Allow for notations and revisions.
1.06 SCHEDULES
A. Prepare a horizontal bar chart with a separate line for each major section of work or separate set of
operations, identifying the first work day of each week.
1.07 SUBMITTALS
A. Within 10 days after the date established in Notice to Proceed, submit a proposed preliminary
schedule defining planned operations for the Work.
B. Participate in review of preliminary and complete schedule jointly with Architect and Owner's.
C. Within 20 days after joint review of proposed preliminary schedule, submit draft of proposed
complete schedule diagram for review. Include written certification that major mechanical and
electrical subcontractors have reviewed and accepted proposed schedule.
D Submit updated network schedules with each Application for Payment.
E. Submit the number of opaque reproductions Contractor requires, plus two copies which will .
retained by Architect and Owner.
1.08 REVIEW AND EVALUATION
A. Participate in joint review and evaluation of the schedule with Architect at each submittal.
B. Evaluate project status to determine work behind schedule and work ahead of schedule.
C. After review, revise as necessary as result of review, and resubmit within 5 days.
1.09 UPDATING SCHEDULES
A. Maintain schedules to record actual start and finish dates of completed activities.
B. Indicate progress of each activity to date of revision, with projected completion date of each activity.
Update diagrams to graphically depict current status of Work.
C. Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in Work, and other identifiable
changes.
D. Indicate changes required to maintain Date of Substantial Completion.
E. Submit reports required to support recommended changes.
F. Provide narrative report to define problem areas, anticipated delays, and impact on Schedule.
Report corrective action taken, or proposed, and its effect, including the effect of changes on
schedules of separate contractors.
1.10 DISTRIBUTION
A. Following joint review, distribute copies of updated schedules to Contractor's job site file, to
subcontractors, suppliers, Architect, Owner, and other concerned entities.
B. Instruct recipients to promptly report, in writing, problems anticipated by projections shown in
schedules.
PART2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
Construction Progress Schedules 01311 - 2
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work included: Make submittals required by the Contract Documents, and revise and resubmit as
necessary to establish compliance with the specified requirements.
B. Related work:
1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications.
2. Individual requirements for submittals also may be described in pertinent Sections of these
Specifications.
C. Work not included:
1. Unrequired submittals will not be reviewed by the Architect.
2. The Contractor may require his subcontractors to provide drawings, setting diagrams, and
similar information to help coordinate the Work, but such data shall remain between
the Contractor and his subcontractors and will not be reviewed by the Architect.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Coordination of submittals:
SECTION 01340
SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS
1. Prior to each submittal, carefully review and coordinate all aspects of each item being
submitted.
2. Verify that each item and the submittal for it conform in all respects with the specified
requirements.
3. By affixing the Contractor's signature to each submittal, certify that this coordination has been
performed.
4. All Materials used in construction of the Work shall be 100% Asbestos Free. Refer to
General Conditions for other references concerning Asbestos. Contractor shall submit
a letter of verification stating all products provided and/or Installed are 100% Asbestos
Free.
B. Substitutions:
1. The Contract is based on the standards of quality established in the Contract Documents.
Substitutions will be considered only when listed at time of bidding, on the form provided
therefore in the bidding documents, and when substantiated by the Contractor's submittal of
required data within 35 calendar days after award of the Contract.
2. The following products do not require further approval except for interface within the Work:
a. Products specified by reference to standard specifications such as ASTM and similar
standards.
b. Products specified by manufacturer's name and catalog model number.
3. Do not substitute materials, equipment, or methods unless such substitution has been
specifically approved in writing for this Work by the Architect.
C. "Or equal ":
1. Where the phrase "or equal," or "or equal as approved by the Architect," occurs in the Contract
Documents, do not assume that the materials, equipment, or methods will be approved
as equal unless the item has been specifically so approved for this Work by the Ar-
chitect.
2. The decision of the Architect shall be final.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals of Shop Drawings, Samples, substitution requests, and other items in accordance
with the provisions of this Section.
PART2- PRODUCTS
2.1 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Scale and measurements: Make Shop Drawings accuratq_ly to a scale sufficiently large to show all
pertinent aspects of the item and its method of connection to the Work.
B. Types of prints required:
1. Submit Shop Drawings in the form of one sepia trans- parency of each sheet plus four
blueline or blackline prints of each sheet.
2. Whiteline (blueprints) will not be acceptable.
C. Review comments of the Architect will be shown on the sepia transparency when it is returned to the
Contractor. The Contractor may make and distribute such copies as are required for his purposes.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS' LITERATURE
A. Where contents of submitted literature from manufacturers includes data not pertinent to the
submittal, clearly show which portions of the contents is being submitted for review.
B. Submit the number of copies which are required to be returned, plus one copy which will be retained
by the Architect, one which will be retained by the Owner, one which will be retained by a Consultant
and one to be retained by the Contractor.
2.3 SAMPLES
A. Provide Sample or Samples identical to the precise article proposed to be provided. Identify as
described under "Identification of submittals" below.
B. Number of Samples required:
1. Unless otherwise specified, submit Samples in the quantity which is required to be returned,
plus one which will be retained by the Architect.
2. By prearrangement in specific cases, a single Sample may be submitted for review and,
when approved, be installed in the Work at a location agreed upon by the Architect.
2.4 COLORS AND PATTERNS
A. Unless the precise color and pattern is specifically called out in the Contract Documents, and
whenever a choice of color or pattern is available in the specified products, submit accurate color and
pattern charts to the Architect for selection.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 IDENTIFICATION OF SUBMITTALS
A. "Consecutively" number all submittals.
Submittals & Substitutions 01340 - 2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1. When material is resubmitted for any reason, transmit under a new letter of transmittal and
with a new transmittal number, dash, and the old transmittal number.
2. On resubmittals, cite the original submittal number for reference in subsequential text.
B. Accompany each submittal with a letter of transmittal showing all information required for
identification and checking.
C. On at least the first page of each submittal, and elsewhere as required for positive identification,
show the submittal number in which the item was included.
D. Maintain an accurate submittal log for the duration of the Work, showing current status of all
submittals at all times. Make the submittal log available to the Architect for his review upon request
and copy the Architect with the log at each draw request.
3.2 GROUPING OF SUBMITTALS
A. Unless otherwise specified, make submittals in groups containing all associated items to assure that
information is available for checking each item when it is received.
1. Partial submittals may be rejected as not complying with the provisions of the Contract.
2. The Contractor may be held liable for delays so occasioned.
3.3 TIMING OF SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals far enough in advance of scheduled dates for installation to provide time required for
reviews, for securing necessary approvals, for possible revisions and resubmittals, and for placing orders
and securing delivery.
B. In scheduling, allow at least ten working days for review by the Architect, and an additional ten should
the submittal involve one or more of the Consultants listed in the project directory, following the
Architect's receipt of the submittal.
3.4 ARCHITECTS REVIEW
A. Review by the Architect does not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors which may
exist in the submitted data.
B. Revisions:
1. Make revisions required by the Architect.
2. If the Contractor considers any required revision to be a change, he shall so notify the Architect
as provided for in Paragraph 12.2 of the General Conditions.
3. Make only those revisions directed or approved by the Architect.
C. Reimbursement of Architect's costs:
1. In the event substitutions are proposed to the Architect after the Contract has been awarded,
the Architect will record all time used by him and by his consultants in evaluation of
each such proposed substitution.
2. Whether or not the Architect approves a proposed substitution, the Contractor promptly upon
receipt of the Architects billing shall reimburse the Architect at the rate of two and one -
half times the direct cost to the Architect and his consultants for all time spent by them
in evaluating the proposed substitutions.
END OF SECTION
Submittals & Substitutions 01340 - 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work included: Provide a detailed breakdown of the agreed Contract Sum showing values allocated
to each of the various parts of the Work, as specificied herein and in other provisions of the Contract
Documents.
B. Related work:
SECTION 01370
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications.
2. Schedule of values is required under Paragraph 9.2 of the General Conditions.
3. Schedule of values is required to be compatible with the "continuation sheet' accompanying
applications for payment, as described in Section 01152.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use required means to assure arithmetical accuracy of the sums described.
B. When so required by the Architect, provide copies of the subcontracts or other data acceptable to the
Architect, substantiating the sums described.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Prior to first application for payment, submit a proposed schedule of values to the Architect.
1. Meet with the Architect and determine additional data, rf any, required to be submitted.
2. Secure the Architects approval of the schedule of values prior to submitting first application
for payment.
3. Schedule any accepted alternates.
4. Included with each Schedule of Values, on separate sheets broken down by Specification
section, shall be a listing of quantities involved in each section listed in the Schedule of
Values. These quantities shall be in the form of Bd.Ft, Lin.Ft., Sq.Ft, Sq.Yds., Cu.Ft.,
Cu.Yd., or as appropriate for the particular section.
5. The Base Bid shall be apportioned on Values based on areas defined in the Drawings. Meet
with Architect prior to submittal to finalize these figures.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 01400
QUALITY CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. General Quality Control.
B. Workmanship.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions.
D. Manufacturer's Certificates.
E. Mockups.
F. Manufacturer's Field Services.
G. Testing Laboratory Services.
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Document 00700 - General Conditions: Inspection and testing required by governing
authorities.
B. Section 01340 - Submittals and Substitutions: Submittal of Manufacturer's Instructions.
C. Section 01410 - Testing Laboratory Services: Tests required for earthwork, concrete, paving.
1.3 QUALITY CONTROL, GENERAL
A. Maintain quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and
workmanship, to produce work of specified quality.
1.4 WORKMANSHIP
A. Comply with industry standards except when more restrictive tolerances or specked
requirements indicate more rigid standards or more precise workmanship.
B. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality.
C. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand
stresses, vibration, and racking.
1.5 MANUFACTURERS' INSTRUCTIONS
A. Comply with instructions in full detail, including each step in sequence. Should instructions
conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect/Engineer before
proceeding.
1.6 MANUFACTURERS' CERTIFICATES
A. When required by individual Specifications Section, submit manufacturer's certificate, in
duplicate, that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.7 MOCKUPS
A. When required by individual Specifications Section, erect complete, full -scale mockup of
assembly at Project site. Tests will be performed in accordance with Section 01410. Remove
mockup at completion, when approved by Architect/Engineer
1.8 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES
A. When specified in respective Specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide qualified
personnel to observe field conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of
workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust and balance of equipment as applicable, and
to make appropriate recommendations.
B. Representative shall submit written report to Architect /Engineer listing observations and
recommendations.
1.9 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
A. Owner will employ and pay for services of an Independent Testing Laboratory to perform
inspections, tests, and other services required by individual Specification Sections.
B. Services will be performed in accordance with requirements of governing authorities and with
specified standards.
C. Reports will be submitted to Architect/Engineer in triplicate giving observations and results of
tests, indicating compliance or non - compliance with specified standards and with Contract
Documents.
D. Contractor shall cooperate with Testing Laboratory personnel; furnish tools, samples of
materials, design mix, equipment, storage and assistance as requested.
1. Notify Architect/Engineer and Testing Laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for
operations requiring testing services.
2. Make arrangements with Testing Laboratory and pay for additional samples and tests
for Contractor's convenience.
E. Any re- testing and re- working necessary due to non- compliance of initial tests shall be paid
for by the Contractor, at no additional cost to the Owner.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
PART 3 EXECUTION
NOT USED
NOT USED
END OF SECTION
Quality Control 01400 - 2
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
B. Related work:
SECTION 01410
TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
A. Work included:
1. Cooperate with the Owner's selected testing agency and all others responsible for testing and
inspecting the Work.
2. Provide such other testing and inspecting as are specified to be furnished by the Contractor
in this Section and /or elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications.
2. Requirements for testing may be described in various Sections of these Specifications.
3. Where no testing requirements are described, but the Owner decides that testing is required,
the Owner may require such testing to be performed under current pertinent standards for
testing. Payment for such testing will be made as described in this Section.
C. Work not included:
1. Selection of testing laboratory: The Owner will select a prequalified independent testing
laboratory.
2. Payment for initial testing: The Owner will pay for all initial services of the testing laboratory as
further described in Article 2.1 of this Section.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The testing laboratory will be qualified to the Owner's approval in accordance with ASTM E329.
B. Testing, when required, will be in accordance with all pertinent codes and regulations, and with
selected standards of the American Society of Testing and Materials.
1.3 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01640.
B. Promptly process and distribute required copies of test reports and related instructions to assure
necessary retesting and replacement of materials with the least possible delay in progress of the
Work.
PART2- PRODUCTS
2.1 PAYMENT FOR TESTING
A. Initial services:
1. The Owner will pay for initial testing services requested by the Owner.
2. When initial tests indicate non - compliance with the Contract Documents, the costs of initial
tests associated with the non - compliance will be deducted by the Owner from the Contract
Sum
B. Retesting: When initial tests indicate non - compliance with the Contract Documents, subsequent
retesting occasioned by the non - compliance shall be performed by the same testing agency, and
costs thereof will be deducted by the Owner from the Contract Sum.
2.2 CODE COMPLIANCE TESTING
A. Inspections and tests required by codes or ordinances, or by a plan approval authority, and which are
made by a legally constituted authority, shall be the responsibility of and shall be paid for by the
Contractor, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents.
2.3 CONTRACTOR'S CONVENIENCE TESTING
A. Inspecting and testing performed exclusively for the Contractor's convenience shall be the sole
responsibility of the Contractor.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 COOPERATION WITH TESTING LABORATORY
A. Representatives of the testing laboratory shall have access to the Work at all times and at all
locations where the Work is in progress. Provide facilities for such access to enable the laboratory
to perform its functions properly.
3.2 TAKING SPECIMENS
A. All specimens and samples for testing, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, shall
be taken by the testing personnel. All sampling equipment and personnel will be provided by the
testing laboratory. All deliveries of specimens and samples to the testing laboratory will be performed
by the testing laboratory.
3.3 SCHEDULES FOR TESTING
A. Establishing schedule:
1. By advance discussion with the testing laboratory selected by the Owner, determine the time
required for the laboratory to perform its tests and to issue each of its findings.
2. Provide all required time within the construction schedule.
B. Revising schedule: When changes of construction schedule are necessary during construction,
coordinate all such changes with the testing laboratory as required.
C. Adherence to schedule: When the testing laboratory is ready to test according to the established
schedule, but is prevented from testing or taking specimens due to incompleteness of the Work, all extra
charges for testing attributable to the delay may be back - charged to the Contractor and shall not be
borne by the Owner.
END OF SECTION
Testing Laboratory Services 01410 - 2
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 REQUIREMENTS
A. Pay not less than the minimum wage scale and benefits indicated on the "Minimum Wage
Schedule" provided herein.
B. Wages listed are minimum rates only.
C. No claims for additional compensation will be considered by the Owner because of payments
of wage rates in excess of the applicable rate contained in this contract.
1.2 APPLICABLE STATUTES
1.03 PAYROLL
1.04 MINIMUM WAGE RATES
SECTION 01425
WAGE RATES
A. Vernon's Civil Statutes, Section 2 of Article 5159a which states as follows:
"The Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the State, County, City and County, City, Town,
District or other political subdivision on whose behalf the Contract is made or awarded, ten
dollars ($10.00) for each laborer, workman or mechanic is paid less than the said stipulated
rates for any work done under said Contract, by him, or by any subcontractor under him, and
the public body awarding the Contract shall cause to be inserted in the Contract a stipulation
to this effect."
A. In compliance with Article 515a, Sections 2 & 3, and Article 5159d, Section II of the Revised
Civil Statute referenced above, the owner reserves the following rights:
1. To receive weekly payroll records.
2. To have the Contractor provide required earning statements to employees.
A. Pay prevailing basic wage listed, plus any applicable fringe benefits.
B. Basic Rates as stated on the attached "Prevailing Wage Rate Determination" for Building
Construction Trades as provided by the Texas General Services Commission. The rates are
stated as last updated May 29, 1998. The attached is for General Decision Number
TX960043 for the State of Texas, including the Counties of Bell, Bexar, Brazos, Comal,
Coryell, Guadalupe, Hays, McLennan, Travis and Williamson.
END OF SECTION
CLASSIFICATION Rate
Health
Pension
Vacation
Total Wage
ASBESTOS WORKER ]I $10.36
$0.89',
$0.00
$0.00
$1125
!CARPENTER I $15.67
$1.62
$0.99
$0.00
$18.29
CARPET LAYER/FLOORING INSTALLER 58.001
$0.001
50.001
$0.00
$8.00
CONCRETE FINISHER $9.96!
$0.00r
$0.001
$0.00
$9.96
DATA COMMUNICATION/TELECOM INSTALLER I $12.70
$0.46?
$0.38;
$0.00
$13.54
DRYWALL INSTALLER /CEILING INSTALLER $15.881
$1.551
$0.951
$0.00
S18.38
ELECTRICIAN $17.29
$217
, $1271
$0.49
521.22 1
ELEVATOR MECHANIC $16.75
$3.86
"•; -, y
$1.50
S24.29
FIRE PROOFING INSTALLER $8.001
$0.001
- $0.00, $0.00
$8.001
GLAZIER 1 513.601
$2.24
$1.15
$0.54
S17.53
HEAVY EQUIPMENT OPERATOR $11.92
$0.00
$0.001
$0.00
$11.92
INSULATOR $16.28
$2.54
$215;
$0.00
S20.97'
IRON WORKER S12.00
$0.63!
$0.79
$0.45
813.86
LABORER/HELPER $6.75!
$0.051
$0.00)
$0.02
$6.8
$15.5171
$7.881
814.451
LATHER/PLASTERER
1 $15.501
$0.00:
$0.00
$0.00
LIGHT EQUIPMENT OPERATOR
$7.88
$0.001
$0.00
$0.00
MASON
$14A5
$0.00!
$0 - 00
$0.00
METAL BUILDING ASSEMBLER
I 810.371
$0.02'
$0.01
$0.01
810.4211
$18.64
MILLWRIGHT
816.01
$1.631
$1.00
$0.00
PAINTER/WALL COVERING INSTALLER
$8.00'
$0.00;
$0.00;
$0.00
88.00
PIPEFITTER
$18-10
$1.42
$1.80
$0.00
$21.32
PLUMBER
518.10
$1.42
51.881
80.00
$21.40
ROOFER
$10.00
$0.00
50.001
80.00
510.00
SHEET METAL WORKER
$18.401
$2.391
$2.551
$0.33
823.67
SPRINKLER FITTER
518.251
$3.401
$2.201
50.00
$23.85
TERRAZZO WORKER
80.00
$14.781
50.001
$0.27'
$0.00
moo
50.00
$0.00
TILE St I I tR
$0.00
815.04
WATERPROOFER/CAULKER
S10.44
$0.00
$0.001 $0.00
810.44
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
PREVAILIN WAGE RATE DETERMINATION
BUILDING CONSTRUCTION TRADES
COUNTY NAME : TRAVIS Corrected Copy
Date Printed : May 29, 1998
$0.00 in the rate field indicates insufficient aata was received to determine a prevailing wage rate for
this classification. Government Code Title 10, Section 2258.023, paragraph C states: "A contractor
or subcontractor does not violate this section if a public body awarding a contract does not determine
the prevailing wage rates and specify the rates in the contract as provided in Section 2258.022.°
Properly of General Services Commission
Based on 1996 Survey Results
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
B. Related work:
1.2 PRODUCT HANDLING
PART2- PRODUCTS
2.1 UTILITIES
SECTION 01500
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
A. Work included: Provide temporary facilities and controls needed for the Work including, but not
necessarily limited to:
1. Temporary utilities such as heat, water, electricity, and telephone;
2. Field office for the Contractor's personnel;
3. Sanitary facilities;
4. Enclosures such as tarpaulins, barricades, and canopies;
5. Temporary fencing of the construction site;
6. Project sign.
1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications.
2. Except that equipment furnished by subcontractors shall comply with requirements of pertinent
safety regulations, such equipment normally furnished by the individual trades in execution of
their own portions of the Work are not part of this Section.
3. Permanent installation and hookup of the various utility lines are described in other Sections.
A. Maintain temporary facilities and controls in proper and safe condition throughout progress of the
Work.
A. Water:
1. Provide necessary temporary piping and water supply and, upon completion of the Work,
remove such temporary facilities.
2. Provide and pay for water used in construction.
B. Electricity:
1. Provide necessary temporary wiring and, upon completion of the Work, remove such
temporary facility.
2. Provide area distribution boxes so located that the individual trades may furnish and use 100
ft maximum length extension cords to obtain power and lighting at points where needed for
work, inspection, and safety.
3. Provide and pay for electricity used in construction.
C. Heating: Provide and maintain heat necessary for proper conduct of operations needed in the Work.
D. Telephone:
1. Make necessary arrangements and pay costs for installation and operation of telephone
service to the Contractor's office at the site.
2. Make the telephone available to the Architect for use in connection with the Work.
E. Existing utilities will not be available for use by the Contractor or any Sub - Contractors.
2.2 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS
A. Contractor's facilities:
1. Provide a field office building and sheds adequate in s and accommodation for
Contractor's offices, supply, and storage.
2. Within the Contractor's facilities, provide enclosed space adequate for holding project
meetings. Furnish with table, chairs, and utilities.
B. Sanitary facilities:
1. Provide temporary sanitary facilities in the quantity required for use by all personnel.
2. Maintain in a sanitary condition at all times.
3. Existing sanitary facilities will not be available for use by the Contractor or any Sub -
Contractors.
2.3 ENCLOSURES
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A. Provide and maintain for the duration of construction all scaffolds, tarpaulins, canopies, warning signs,
steps, platforms, bridges, and other temporary construction necessary for proper completion of the Work 1
in compliance with pertinent safety and other regulations.
2.4 TEMPORARY FENCING
A. Provide and maintain for the duration of construction a temporary fence of design and type needed to 1
prevent entry onto the Work by the public.
2.5 PROJECT SIGNS
1
A. Prior to start of construction, secure from the Architect directions on content of the standard job signs.
Mount at the job site where directed by the Architect two project signs, one 4x8, one 8x8. Design shall 1
be coordinated between owner and Architect. Average content consists of a listing as directed by the
Architect of Project title, Owner Architect, Consultants, Contractor and major Subcontractors.
B. Upon completion of the Work, demount and dispose of the signs.
C. Except as otherwise specifically approved by the Architect, do not permit other signs or advertising on
the job site.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 MAINTENANCE AND REMOVAL
B. Remove such temporary facilities and controls as rapidly as progress of the Work will permit, or as'
directed by the Architect.
END OF SECTION
Temporary Facilities & Controls 01500 - 2
1
1
1
A Maintain temporary facilities and controls as long as needed for the safe and proper completion of the 1
Work.
1
1
1
1.03 SUBMITTALS
PART 2 - (NOT APPLICABLE)
PART 3 - (NOT APPLICABLE)
SECTION 01501
MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 INCLUSIONS
A. Provisions of General Conditions and Supplementary, General Conditions shall be included by
reference and considered part of this section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Payment for such flagging and protective flagmen services shall be borne by Contractor.
B. Contractor shall retain responsibility for traffic operations. Contractor shall cooperate with Owner so
that traffic flow is least impeded by execution of work under this Contract. In event of conflict, the
Contractor shall be sole judge of adequacy of Contractor's protective measure to assure flow of traffic.
C. The Contractor shall schedule with the proper authorities, any work that could interfere with traffic in
any way.
A. Prior to starling any work, Contractor shall submit detailed plans of his proposed method for controlling
traffic at each affected location. Proposed traffic control plan shall show and describe proposed
locations and time durations covering following:
1. Vehicular traffic routing.
2. Traffic blockage anticipated to be caused by work under this Contract.
1.04 TRAFFIC MAINTENANCE FACILITIES
A. Other than as shown on approved traffic control plans, at no time shall Contractor's operations interfere
with safe and orderly operation of the highway. Encroachment by Contractors operations will not be
permitted.
B. For duration of Contract, Contractor shall immediately repair or replace any and all appurtances
damaged or destroyed in performance of work included herein.
C. Upon completion of work, temporary traffic maintenance items furnished by Contractor shall remain
his property and shall be removed from site by Contractor.
D. Contractor shall utilize water application methods to control dust on access streets and project site to
satisfaction of Architect.
Maintenance of Traffic 01501 - 1
END OF SECTION
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Construction Parking Control.
B. Flagmen.
C. Flares and Lights.
D. Haul Routes.
E. Traffic Signs and Signals.
F. Removal.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01010 - Summary of Work: Owner occupancy.
B. Section 01041 - Project Coordination.
C. Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Barriers and enclosures.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SIGNS, SIGNALS, AND DEVICES
A. Post- mounted and wall- mounted traffic control.
B. Traffic Control Signals: As approved by local jurisdictions.
C. Traffic Cones and Drums, Flares and Lights: As approved by local jurisdictions.
D. Flagman Equipment: As required by local jurisdictions.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 CONSTRUCTION PARKING CONTROL
SECTION 01570
TRAFFIC REGULATION
A. Control vehicular parking to prevent interference with public traffic and parking, access by
emergency vehicles.
B. Monitor parking of construction personnel's vehicles. Maintain vehicular access to and through
parking areas.
C. Prevent parking on or adjacent to access roads or in non - designated areas.
D. E fisting parking facilities are not available for Contractor use or by any Sub - Contractor.
3.02 FLAGMEN
A. Provide trained and equipped flagmen to regulate traffic when construction operations or
traffic encroach on public traffic lanes.
3.03 FLARES AND LIGHTS
A. Use flares and lights during hours of low visibility to delineate traffic lanes and to guide traffic.
3.04 HAUL ROUTES
A. Consult with authorities, establish public thoroughfares to be used for haul routes and site access.
B. Confine construction traffic to designated haul routes.
C. Provide traffic control at critical areas of haul routes to regulate traffic, to minimize interference with
public traffic.
3.05 TRAFFIC SIGNS AND SIGNALS
A. At approaches to site and on site, install at crossroads, detours, parking areas, and
elsewhere as needed to direct constuction and affected public traffic.
B. Install and operate traffic control signals to direct and maintain orderly flow of traffic in areas
under Contractor's control, and areas affected by Contractor's operations.
C. Relocate as Work progresses, to maintain effective traffic control.
3.06 REMOVAL
A. Remove equipment and devices at Substantial Completion. Repair damage caused by
installation. Remove post settings to a depth of 2 feet.
END OF SECTION
Traffic Regulation 01570 - 2
2.01 SIGN MATERIALS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Project Identification Sign.
B. Project Informational Signs.
C. Maintenance.
D. Removal.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01010 - Summary of Work: Contractor use of premises. Owner occupancy.
B. Section 01570 - Traffic Regulation.
C. Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Field offices and sheds.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Design sign and structure to withstand 50 miles/hr wind velocity.
B. Sign Painter: Engaged as professional sign painter for not less than three years.
C. Finishes, Painting: Adequate to withstand weathering, fading, and chipping for duration of
construction.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01340.
B. Show content, layout, lettering, colors; foundation, structure, s and grades of members.
PART2 PRODUCTS
SECTION 01580
PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS
A. Structure and Framing: New wood structurally adequate.
B. Sign Surfaces: Exterior grade plywood with medium density overlay, minimum 3/4 inch thick,
standard large sizes to minimize joints.
1
C. Rough Hardware: Galvanized, aluminum, or brass.
D. Paint and Primers: Exterior quality, two coats. Colors designated by Architect.
E. Lettering: Exterior quality paint, contrasting colors designated by Architect. 1
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION 1
A. Install project identification sign within 20 days after date fixed by Notice to Proceed.
B. Erect at designated location.
C. Erect supports and framing on secure foundation, rigidly braced and framed to resist wind
loadings. '
D. Install sign surface plumb and level, with butt joints. Anchor securely.
E. Paint sight- eposed surfaces of sign, supports, and framing.
3.02 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN
A. Two painted signs of construction, design, and content shown in Specifications, with the location
to be designated. (See also Section 01500 para.2.5.A)
B. Content '
1. Project title, and name of Owner as shown on Contract Documents.
2. Names and titles of Authorities.
3. Names and titles of Architect and Consultants.
4. Name of Prime Contractor and major subcontractors. '
C. Graphic Design, Colors, Style of Lettering: Designated by Architect.
3.03 PROJECT INFORMATIONAL SIGNS
A. Painted informational signs of same colors and lettering as Project Identification sign, or standard
products; size lettering to provide legibility at 100 foot distance.
B. Provide at each field office, storage shed, and directional signs to direct traffic into and within site.
Relocate as Work progress requires.
3.04 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintain signs and supports clean, repair deterioration and damages. 1
3.05 REMOVAL
A. Remove signs, framing, supports, and foundations at completion of Project and restore the area.
END OF SECTION 1
Project Identification & Signs 01580 - 2
1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work included: Protect products scheduled for use in the Work by means including, but not
necessarily limited to, those described in this Section.
B. Related work:
1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications.
2. Additional procedures also may be prescribed in other Sections of these Specifications.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
SECTION 01640
PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Include within the Contractor's quality assurance program such procedures as are required to assure
full protection of work and materials.
1.3 MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS
A. Except as otherwise approved by the Architect, determine and comply with manufacturer's
recommendations on product handling, storage, and protection.
1.4 PACKAGING
A. Deliver products to the job site in their manufacturer's original container, with labels intact and legible.
1. Maintain packaged materials with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use.
2. Promptly remove damaged material and unsuitable items from the job site, and promptly
replace with material meeting the specked requirements, at no additional cost to the Owner.
B. The Architect may reject as non - complying such material and products that do not bear identification
satisfactory to the Architect as to manufacturer, grade, quality, and other pertinent information.
1.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect finished surfaces, including jambs and soffits of openings used as passageways, through
which equipment and materials are handled.
B. Provide protection for finished floor surfaces in traffic areas prior to allowing equipment or materials
to be moved over such surfaces.
C. Maintain finished surfaces clean, unmarred, and suitably protected until accepted by the Owner.
1.6 REPAIRS AND REPLACEMENTS
A. In event of damage, promptly make replacements and repairs to the approval of the Architect and
at no additional cost to the Owner.
B. Additional time required to secure replacements and to make repairs will not be considered by the
Architect to justify an extension in the Contract Time of Completion.
END OF SECTION
01640 - 1
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
SECTION 01650
STARTING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
A. Provide material and labor required to perform start-up of each respective item of equipment and
system prior to beginning of test, adjust and balance procedures. Provide information and assistance
required, cooperate with test, adjust and balance services.
B. Comply strictly with specified procedures in starting up mechanical systems.
1.2 START -UP PROCEDURES
A. Bearings:
1. Inspect for cleanliness, clean and remove foreign materials.
2. Verify alignment.
3. Replace defective bearings, and those which run rough or noisy.
4. Grease as necessary, and in accordance with manufacturer recommendations.
B. Drives:
1. Adjust tension in V -belt drives, and adjust varipitch sheaves and drives for proper equipment
speed.
2. Adjust drives for alignment of sheaves and V- belts.
3. Clean and remove foreign materials before starting operation.
C. Motors:
1. Check each motor for amperage comparison to nameplate value.
2. Correct conditions which produce excessive current flow, and which exist due to equipment
malfunction.
3. Check direction of rotation of equipment and reverse phase wires as necessary.
D. Valves:
1. Inspect hand valves and clean bonnets and stems.
2. Tighten packing glands to assure no leakage, but permit valve stems to operate without
galling.
3. Replace packing in valves to retain madmum adjustment after system is judged complete.
4. Replace packing on any valve which continues to leak.
5. Remove and repair bonnets which leak.
6. Coat packing gland threads and valve stems with a surface preparation of Moly -Cote,
Fe10Pro or equal, after cleaning.
E. Verify that control valve seats are free from foreign material, and are properly positioned for intended
service.
F. Inspect screwed joints for leakage. Promptly remake each joint which appears to be faulty, do not
wait for rust to form. Clean threads on both parts, apply compound and remake joints.
G. After system has been placed in operation, clean strainers, dirt pockets, orifices, valve seats, and
headers in fluid systems, to assure being free of foreign materials.
H. Remove rust, scale, and foreign material from equipment and renew defaced surfaces.
I. Set and calibrate draft gages of air filters and other equipment.
J. Inspect fan wheels for clearance and balance. Provide factory authorized personnel for adjustment
when needed.
1
1
1
K Check each electrical control circuit to assure that operation complies with specifications and
requirements to provide desired performance.
L. Inspect each pressure gage and thermometer for calibration. Replace items which are defaced, broken,'
or which read incorrectly.
M. Repair damaged insulation. 1
N. Vent gases trapped in any part of the systems. Verify that liquids are drained from all parts of gas or air
systems.
O. Check piping for leaks at every joint, and at every screwed, flanged, or welded connection, using "Leak -
Tek" or approved compound.
1.4 ADJUSTMENTS
A. Provide such periodic continuing adjustment services as necessary to insure proper functioning of
mechanical systems after occupancy of the project, and for a period of one year after Date of
Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Starting of Mechanical Systems 01650 -2
1
1
PART 1- GENERAL
1.2 DESCRIPTION
SECTION 01660
TESTING, ADJUSTING & BALANCING OF ENVIRONMENTAL SYSTEMS
1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Perform specified services with Contractor's qualified personnel or employ and pay for a qualified
organization to perform specified services.
A. Perform testing of equipment, balancing of distribution system, and adjustment of terminal devices for
HVAC systems of the project.
B. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. Make instruments
available to the Architect/Engineer to facilitate spot checks during testing.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The organization which performs the service shall be a current member in good standing, certified
to perform services for the project of either Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) or National
Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB).
B. Within 30 days after award of contract, transmit to the Architect the name of the organization
proposed to perform the services.
C. Comply with the applicable procedures and standards of the certification sponsoring association.
1A SUBMITTALS
A. Preliminary: Submit three copies of documentation to confirm compliance with
Quality Assurance provisions - organization supervisor and personnel training and qualifications
including specimen copy of each of the report forms proposed for use.
B. Second: Submit within 15 days of actual testing, dates that testing is
to be performed, list of instruments to be used including Manufacturer, model number, description,
and calibration date.
C. Third: Submit three copies of the final report to the Architect within
15 days of completion of testing. Each report shall be signed by the person who recorded the data
and the certified supervisor.
1.5 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Prior to start of testing, adjusting and balancing, verify that required "Job Conditions" are met:
1. Systems installation is complete and in full operation.
2. Outside conditions are within a reasonable range relative to design conditions.
3. Lights and equipment included in the cooling load are turned on.
B. Verify that requirements for preparation for testing and balancing have been met for elements of
each of the systems which require testing.
1.6 PROCEDURES GENERAL
A. Comply fully with the procedural standards of the certifying
association under whose standards service will be performed. Execute each step of the prescribed TAB
procedures without omission. Accurately record the required data.
1.7 AIR BALANCING
A. Make measurements in accordance with recognized procedures and practices of the certifying
association.
B. Measure air volume discharged at each outlet and adjust air outlets to design air flows within 10%
over or under.
C. Adjust fan speeds and motor drives within drive limitations for required air volume. Set a speed to
provide air volume at farthest distance without excess static pressure.
D. Measure and adjust air supply and exhaust fan units to deliver design conditions at 100% cooling.
E. Adjust outside air dampers, outside air , return air, and exhaust dampers for design conditions.
F. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil drops, and total
pressure across fan.
G. Evaluate building and room pressure pressure conditions to determine adequate supply and return
air conditions.
H. Evaluate space and zone temperature conditions to determine adequate performance of the systems
to maintain temperatures without drafts.
I. Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to check
leakage.
J. Mark balancing dampers and cocks.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate services with the work of the various trades to ensure rapid completion of services.
B. Promptly report to the Architect/Engineer any deficiencies noted during performance of services to
allow immediate corrective action.
END OF SECTION
Testing, Adjusting & Balancing of Environmental Systems 01660 - 2
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.3 PROCEDURES
SECTION 01700
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work included: Provide an orderly and efficient transfer of the completed Work to the Owner.
B. Related work:
1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications.
A. Prior to requesting inspection by the Architect, use adequate means to assure that the Work is
completed in accordance with the specified requirements and is ready for the requested inspection.
A. Substantial Completion'
1. Prepare and submit the list required by the first sentence of Paragraph 9.7.1 of the General
Conditions.
2. Within a reasonable time after receipt of the list, the Architect will inspect to determine status
of completion.
3. Should the Architect determine that the Work is not substantially complete:
a. The Architect promptly will so notify the Contractor, in writing, gMng the reasons
therefore.
b. Remedy the deficiencies and notify the Architect when ready for reinspection.
c. The Architect will reinspect the Work. At such time that reinspection becomes
necessary the Contractor shall reimburse the Architect for time spent in
reinspections whether reinspections are acceptable at the time or not. The
Contractor shall promptly upon receipt of the Architect's billing for time and
eoenses by him and or his consultants, reimburse the Architect at the rate of two
and one -half times the direct cost of each reinspection. This procedure shall also
apply to final inspections.
4. When the Architect concurs that the Work is substantially complete:
a. The Architect will prepare a "Certificate of Substantial Completion" on AIA form
G704, accompanied by the Contractor's list of items to be completed or corrected,
as verified by the Architect.
b. The Architect will submit the Certificate to the Owner and to the Contractor for their
written acceptance of the responsibilities assigned to them in the Certificate.
B. Final Completion:
1. Prepare and submit the notice required by the first sentence of Paragraph 9.8.1 of the
General Conditions.
2. Verify that the Work is complete including, but not necessarily limited to, the items mentioned
in Paragraph 9.8.2 of the General Conditions.
3. Certify that:
a. Contract Documents have been reviewed;
b. Work has been inspected for compliance with the Contract Documents;
c. Work has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents;
d. Equipment and systems have been tested as required, and are operational;
1
e. Work is completed and ready for final inspection.
4. The Architect will make an inspection to verify status of completion.
5. Should the Architect determine that the Work is incomplete or defective:
a. The Architect promptly will so notify the Contractor, in writing, listing the incomplete
or defective work.
b. Remedy the deficiencies promptly, and notify the Architect when ready for
reinspection, See 1.3.a.3.c. above.
6. When the Architect determines that the Work is acceptable under the Contract Documents,
he will request the Contractor to make closeout submittals.
C. Closeout submittals include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Project Record Documents described in Section 01720;
2. Operation and maintenance data for items so listed in pertinent other Sections of these
Specifications, and for other items when so directed by the Architect;
3. Warranties and bonds;
4. Keys and keying schedule;
5. Spare parts and materials extra stock;
6. Evidence of compliance with requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction
including, but not necessarily limited to:
a. Certificates of Inspection;
b. Certificates of Occupancy;
7. Certificates of Insurance for products and completed operations;
8. Evidence of payment and release of liens;
9. List of subcontractors, service organizations, and principal vendors, including names,
addresses, and telephone numbers where they can be reached for emergency service at all
times including nights, weekends, and holidays.
D. Final adjustment of accounts:
1. Submit a final statement of accounting to the Architect, showing all adjustments to the Contract
Sum.
2. If so required, the Architect will prepare a final Change Order showing adjustments to the'
Contract Sum which were not made previously by Change Orders.
1.4 INSTRUCTION
A. Instruct the Owner's personnel in proper operation and maintenance of systems, equipment, and
similar items which were provided as part of the Work.
END OF SECTION
Contract Closeout 01700 - 2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work included: Throughout the construction period, maintain the buildings and site in a standard of
cleanliness as described in this Section.
B. Related work:
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
SECTION 01710
CLEANING
1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications.
2. In addition to standards described in this Section, comply with requirements for cleaning as
described in pertinent other Sections of these Specifications.
A. Conduct daily inspection, and more often if necessary, to verify that requirements for cleanliness are
being met.
B. In addition to the standards described in this Section, comply with pertinent requirements of
governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
PART2- PRODUCTS
2.1 CLEANING MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Provide required personnel, equipment, and materials needed to maintain the specified standard of
cleanliness.
2.2 COMPATIBILITY
A. Use only the cleaning materials and equipment which are compatible with the surface being cleaned,
as recommended by the manufacturer of the material.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PROGRESS CLEANING
A. General:
1. Retain stored items in an orderly arrangement allowing maximum access, not impeding
traffic or drainage, and providing required protection of materials.
2. Do not allow accumulation of scrap, debris, waste material, and other items not required for
construction of this Work.
3. At least twice each month, and more often if necessary,
completely remove all scrap, debris, and waste material from the job site.
4. Provide adequate storage for all items awaiting removal from the job site, observing
requirements for fire protection and protection of the ecology.
B. Site:
C. Structures:
3.2 FINAL CLEANING
A. "Clean," for the purpose of this Article, and except as may by specifically provided otherwise, shall
be interpreted as meaning the level of cleanliness generally provided by skilled cleaners using
commercial quality budding maintenance equipment and materials.
B. Prior to completion of the Work, remove from the job site all tools, surplus materials, equipment,
scrap, debris, and waste. Conduct final progress cleaning as described in Article 3.1 above.
C. Site:
5. Products considered flammable must be cleaned and removed from the site daily.
1. Daily, and more often if necessary, inspect the site and pick up all scrap, debris, and waste
material. Remove such items to the place designated for their storage.
2. Weekly, and more often if necessary, inspect all arrangements of materials stored on the site.
Restack, tidy, or otherwise service arrangements to meet the requirements of subparagraph 3.1-
A-1 above.
3. Maintain the site in a neat and orderly condition at all times.
4. Plumbing, Electrical and slab spoils shall be the responsibility of the Sitework Contractor. Site
Contractor shall also be responsible for removal of spoils and regrading areas adjacent to
building prior to landscape operation and final soil placement.
1. Weekly, and more often if necessary, inspect the structures and pick up all scrap, debris, and
waste material. Remove such items to the place designated for their storage.
2. Weekly, and more often if necessary, sweep interior spaces clean.
a. "Clean,' for the purpose of this subparagraph, shall be interpreted as meaning free
from dust and other material capable of being removed by use of reasonable effort and
a hand -held broom.
3. As required preparatory to installation of succeeding materials, clean the structures or pertinent
portions thereof to the degree of cleanliness recommended by the manufacturer of the
succeeding material, using the equipment and materials required to achieve the necessary
cleanliness.
4. Following the installation of finish floor materials, clean the finish floor daily (and more often if
necessary) at all times while work is being performed in the space in which finish materials are
installed.
a. "Clean," for the purpose of this subparagraph, shall be interpreted as meaning free
from foreign material which, in the opinion of the Architect, may be injurious to the finish
floor material.
1. Unless otherwise specifically directed by the Architect, broom clean paved areas on the site
and public paved areas adjacent to the site.
2. Completely remove resultant debris.
D. Structures:
1. Exterior:
a. Visually inspect exterior surfaces and remove all traces of soil, waste materials,
smudges, and other foreign matter.
b. Remove all traces of splashed materials from adjacent surfaces.
CLEANING 01710 -2
c. If necessary to achieve a uniform degree of cleanliness, hose down the exterior of
the structure.
d. In the event of stubborn stains not removable with water, the Architect may require
light sandblasting or other cleaning at no additional cost to the Owner.
2. Interior:
a. Visually inspect interior surfaces and remove all traces of soil, waste materials,
smudges and other foreign matter.
b. Remove all traces of splashed material from adjacent surfaces.
Remove paint droppings, spots, stains, and dirt from finished surfaces.
3. Glass: Clean inside and outside.
4. Polished surfaces: To surfaces requiring routine application of buffed polish, apply the polish
recommended by the manufacturer of the material being polished.
E. Schedule final cleaning as approved by the Architect to enable the Owner to accept a completely
clean Work.
3.3 CLEANING DURING OWNER'S OCCUPANCY
A. Should the Owner occupy the Work or any portion thereof prior to its completion by the Contractor
and acceptance by the Owner, responsibilities for interim and final cleaning shall be as determined
by the Architect in accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract.
END OF SECTION
Cleaning 01710 - 3
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work included:
1. Throughout progress of the Work, maintain an accurate record of changes in the Contract
Documents, as described in Article 3.1 below.
2. Upon completion of the Work, transfer the recorded changes to a set of Record Documents,
as described in Article 3.2 below and Clause 15 of the General Provisions.
3. Prior to installation of Asphalt provide the Civil Engineer with as built elevations of all areas
shown on the construction drawings including control points and existing bench marks. The
Asphalt operation shall not commence until the contractor has secured approval from the Civil
Engineer in writing.
B. Related work:
1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Provisions, Supplementary General Provisions, and Sections in Division 1 of these
Specifications.
2. Other requirements affecting Project Record Documents may appear in pertinent other
Sections of these Specifications.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
SECTION 01720
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Delegate the responsibility for maintenance of Record Documents to one person on the Contractor's
staff as approved by the Architect.
B. Accuracy of records:
1. Thoroughly coordinate changes within the Record Documents, making adequate and proper
entries on each page of Specifications and each sheet of Drawings and other Documents
where such entry is required to show the change properly.
2. Accuracy of records shall be such that future search for items shown in the Contract
Documents may rely reasonably on information obtained from the approved Project Record
Documents.
C. Make entries within 24 hours after receipt of information that the change has occurred.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340.
B. The Architect's approval of the current status of Project Record Documents may be a prerequisite
to the Architects approval of requests of progress payment and request for final payment under the
Contract.
C. Prior to submitting each request for progress payment, secure the Architect's approval of the current
status of the Project Record Documents.
D. Prior to submitting request for final payment, submit the final Project Record Documents to the
Architect and secure his approval.
1
1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Maintain the job set of Record Documents completely protected from deterioration and from loss and
damage until completion of the Work and transfer of all recorded data to the final Project Record
Documents.
B. In the event of loss of recorded data, use means necessary to again secure the data to the Architect's
approval.
1. Such means shall include, if necessary in the opinion of the Architect, removal and ,
replacement of concealing materials.
2. In such case, provide replacements to the standards originally required by the Contract
Documents.
PART2- PRODUCTS
2.1 RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Job set Promptly following receipt of the Owner's Notice to Proceed, secure from the owner at no
charge to the Contractor one complete set of all Documents comprising the Contract.
B. As builts: Promptly following substantial completion of the project, submit to Architect one set of
marked up bluelines with all as built conditions. Upon Architect's approval and return of the bluelines
to the Contractor, the Contractor shall have made one set of "Vellum or Mylar Transpariencies" for
Owner's record from an unmarked set of the contract drawings or from the Architect's originals with '
his permission. After receipt of the transpanences the Contractor shall record all changes made to
the project directly onto the transpariences. Record changes shall be made by a skilled
draftsperson. Upon completion the Contractor shall deliver both the bluelines and the transpariescies
to the Architect for delivery to owner.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 MAINTENANCE OF JOB SET ,
A. Immediately upon receipt of the job set described in Paragraph 2.1 -A above, identify each of the
Documents with the title, "RECORD DOCUMENTS - JOB SET."
B. Preservation:
1. Considering the Contract completion time, the probable number of occasions upon which
the job set must be taken out for new entries and for examination, and the conditions under
which these activities will be performed, devise a suitable method for protecting the job set
to the approval of the Architect
2. Do not use the job set for any purpose except entry of new data and for review by the '
Architect, until start of transfer of data to final Project Record Documents.
3. Maintain the job set at the site of Work as that site is designated by the Architect.
C. Making entries on Drawings:
1. Using an erasable colored pencil (not ink or indelible pencil), clearly describe the change by
graphic line and note as required.
2. Date all entries.
3. Call attention to the entry by a "cloud" drawn around the areas or areas affected.
4. In the event of overlapping changes, use different colors for the overlapping changes.
D. Make entries in the pertinent other Documents as approved by the Architect.
1
E. Conversion of schematic layouts:
1. In some cases on the Drawings, arrangements of conduits, circuits, piping, ducts, and similar'
Project Record Documents 01720 -2
1
1
items, is shown schematically and is not intended to portray precise physical layout.
a. Final physical arrangement is determined by the Contractor, subject to the Architects
approval.
b. However, design of future modifications of the facility may require accurate information
as to the final physical layout of items which are shown only schematically on the
Drawings.
2. Show on the job set of Record Drawings, by dimension accurate to within one inch, the
centerline of each run of items such as are described in subparagraph 3.1 -E -1 above.
a. Clearly identify the Rem by accurate note such as "cast iron drain, "gal. water,' and the
like.
b. Show, by symbol or note, the vertical location of the item ( "under slab," "in ceiling
plenum," "exposed,' and the like).
c. Make all identification sufficiently descriptive that it may be related reliably to the
Specifications.
3. The Architect may waive the requirements for conversion of schematic layouts where, in the
Architects judgment, conversion serves no useful purpose. However, do not rely upon waivers
being issued except as specifically issued in writing by the Architect.
3.2 FINAL PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. The purpose of the final Project Record Documents is to provide factual information regarding all
aspects of the Work, both concealed and visible, to enable future modification of the Work to proceed
without lengthy and expensive site measurement, investigation, and examination.
B. Approval of recorded data prior to transfer:
1. Following receipt of the transparencies described in Paragraph 2.1 -B above, and prior to
start of transfer of recorded data thereto, secure the Architects approval of all recorded
data.
2. Make required revisions with such expertise as may be required of a professional draftsman.
C. Review and submittal:
1. Submit the completed set of Project Record Documents to the Architect as described in
Paragraph 1.3 -D above.
2. Participate in review meetings as required.
3. Make required changes and promptly deliver the final Project Record Documents to the
Architect.
END OF SECTION
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Format and content of manuals.
B. Instruction of Owner's personnel.
C. Schedule of submittals.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
1.04 FORMAT
SECTION 01730
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Section 01340 - Submittals and Substitutions: Submittals procedures.
B. Section 01340 - Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples.
C. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Manufacturer's instructions.
D. Section 01660 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems: Test and
balance reports.
E. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout Closeout procedures.
F. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout Project record documents. 01720 - Project Record
Documents.
G. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Warranties and bonds. 01740 - Warranties and Bonds.
H. Individual Specifications Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Prepare instructions and data by personnel experienced in maintenance and operation of
described products.
A. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual.
B. Binders: Commercial quality, 8 -1/2 x 11 inch three -ring binders with hardback, cleanable,
plastic covers; one inch mabmum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate data
into related consistent groupings.
C. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
INSTRUCTIONS; list title of Project and separate building; identify subject matter of contents.
D. Arrange content by systems, process flow, under section numbers and sequence of Table of
Contents of this Project Manual.
E. Provide tabbed fly leaf for each separate product and system, with typed description of product
and major component parts of equipment.
F. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on 20 pound paper.
G. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to
size of text pages.
1.05 CONTENTS, EACH VOLUME
A. Table of Contents: Provide title of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of
Architect and Contractor with name of responsible parties; schedule of products and systems,
indexed to content of the volume.
B. For Each Product or System: List names, addresses and telephone numbers of subcontractors
and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts.
C. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and
data applicable to installation; delete inapplicable information.
D. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and
systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as
maintenance drawings.
E. Typed Text As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for
each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions specified in Section 01400.
F. Warranties and Bonds: Bind in copy of each.
1.06 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES
A. Building Products, Applied Materials, and Finishes: Include product data, with catalog number,
size, composition, and color and texture designations. Provide information for re- ordering custom
manufactured products.
B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Include manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning
agents and methods, precautions against detrimental agents and methods, and recommended
schedule for cleaning and maintenance.
C. Moisture - protection and Weather - exposed Products: Include product data listing applicable
reference standards, chemical composition, and details of installation. Provide recommendations
for inspections, maintenance, and repair.
D. Additional Requirements: As Specked in individual Specifications sections.
E. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet and space for insertion of
data.
Operation & Maintenance Data 01730 - 4
1.07 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
A. Each Item of Equipment and Each System: Include description of unit or system, and component
parts. Give function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. Include performance
curves, with engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial number of
replaceable parts.
B. Panelboard Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteristics, controls, and
communications.
C. Include as installed color coded wiring diagrams.
D. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break -in, and routine normal operating instructions
and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut -down, and emergency instructions.
Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions.
E. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for trouble- shooting;
disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and
checking instructions.
F. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required.
G. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions.
H. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer.
I. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams
required for maintenance.
J. Provide as- installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer.
K Provide Contractor's coordination drawings, with as- installed color coded piping diagrams.
L. Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow and
control diagrams.
M. Provide list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended quantities to
be maintained in storage.
N. Include test and balancing reports as specified in Section 01660.
O. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual Specifications sections.
P. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet and space for insertion of
data.
1.08 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER PERSONNEL
A. Before final inspection, instruct Owner's designated personnel in operation, adjustment, and
maintenance of products, equipment, and systems, at agreed upon times. For equipment requiring
seasonal operation, perform instructions for other seasons within six months of Data of Final
Completion.
B. Use operation and maintenance manuals as basis of instruction. Review contents of manual with
Operation & Maintenance Data 01730 - 3
personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.
C. Prepare and insert additional data in Operation and Maintenance Manual when need for such data
becomes apparent during instruction.
1.09 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before start of
Work. Architect will review draft and return one copy with comments.
B. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and operated
by Owner, submit documents within ten days after acceptance.
C. Submit one copy of completed volumes in final form 15 days prior to final inspection. Copy will be
returned after final inspection, with Architect's comments. Revise content of documents as required
prior to final submittal.
D. Submit five copies of revised volumes of data in final form within ten days after final inspection.
1.10 SCHEDULE OF SUBMITTALS
A. Not Used:
B. Not Used:
C. Division 15 - Mechanical
D. Division 16 - Electrical
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
Operation & Maintenance Data 01730 - 4
SECTION 01740
WARRANTIES AND BONDS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Preparation and submittal of warranties and bonds.
B. Schedule of submittals.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Document 00100 - Instruction to Bidders: Bid Bonds.
B. Document 00700 - General Conditions: Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment
Bonds, Warranty, and Correction of Work.
C. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout Contract closeout procedures.
D. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Operation and Maintenance Data. 01730 - Operation and
Maintenance Data.
E. Individual Specifications Sections: Warranties and bonds required for specific Products or work.
1.03 FORM OF SUBMITTALS
A. Bind in commercial quality 8 -1/2 x 11 inch three -ring side binders, with hardback, cleanable, plastic
covers.
B. Label cover of each binderwith typed or printed title WARRANTIES AND BONDS, with titre of Project;
name, address and telephone number of Contractor; and name of responsible principal.
C. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in the sequence of the Table of Contents of the Project Manual, with
each item identified with the number and title of the specification section in which specified, and the
name of Product or work item.
D. Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed to the Table of Contents listing. Provide
full information, using separate typed sheets as necessary. List subcontractor, supplier, and
manufacturer, with name, address, and telephone number of responsible principal.
1.04 PREPARATION OF SUBMITTALS
A. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by esponsible subcontractors, suppliers, and
manufacturers, within ten days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put into
use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the Date of Substantial
completion is determined.
B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notar¢ed.
C. Co- execute submittals when required.
D. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal.
1.05 TIME OF SUBMITTALS
A. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with Owner's
permission, submit documents within ten days after acceptance.
B. Make other submittals within ten days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final
Application for Payment.
C. For items of Work when acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion, submit
within ten days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty
period.
1.06 SCHEDULE OF SUBMITTALS
A. Not Used:
B. Section 02490 - Site Planting
C. Not Used:
D. Section 06400 - Architectural Woodwork
E. Section 07210 - Building Insulation
F. Section 07920 - Sealants and Caulking
G. Section 07253 - Fireproofing
H. Section 08100 - Metal Doors and Frames
I. Section 08200 - Wood and Plastic Doors
J. Section 08410 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts
K. Section 08710 - Finish Hardware
L. Section 08800 - Glazing
M. Section 09200 - Lath and Plaster
N. Section 09300 - Ceramic Tile
O. Section 09530 - Acoustical Treatment
P. Section 09659 - Resilient Flooring
Q. Section 09680 - Carpeting
R. Section 09900 - Painting
Warranties & Bonds 01740 - 2
S. Section 10655 - Folding Partition
T. Section 10800 - Toilet and Bath Accessories
U. Not Used:
`:::: V. Division 15 - Mechanical
W. Division 16 - Electrical
PART2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
Warranties & Bonds 01740 - 3
WARRANTY BOND
BOND NUMBER AMOUNT
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS,
That we,
(hereinafter called the "Principal ") as Principal,
and the a Corporation duly organized under the laws
of the State of and duly licensed to transact business in
the State of (hereinafter called the "Surety"), as Surety, are
held and firmly bound unto THE CITY OF ROUND ROCK, TEXAS (hereinafter called
the "Obligee "), in the sum of
dollars ($ ) for the
payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we, the said Principal and the said Surety,
bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and
severally, firmly, by these presents.
Sealed with our seals and dated this
and
day of , A.D. nineteen hundred
WHEREAS, the said Principal has heretofore entered into a contract with
Dated , 19_, for construction of:
WHEREAS, the said Principal is required to guarantee the construction of all improvements
installed under said contract, against defects in materials or workmanship, which may
develop during the period of year(s) from the date of acceptance of the
project above described, by Owner:
The City of Round Rock, Texas
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITIONS OF THE OBLIGATIONS IS SUCH, that if said
Principal shall faithfully carry out and perform the said guarantee, and shall, on due notice,
repair and make good at its own expense any and all defects in materials or workmanship in
the said work which may develop during the period of year(s) from the date of
acceptance of the project above described, by Owner:
The City of Round Rock, Texas
postbid tttsospec master
PBD -8
WARRANTY BOND (continued)
OR shall pay over, make good and reimburse to the said Obligee all loss and damage which
said Obligee may sustain by reason of failure or default of said Principal so to do, then this
obligation shall be null and void; otherwise shall remain in full force and effect.
Principal Surety
By: By:
Title Title
Address Address
Resident Agent of Surety:
Printed Name
Address
City, State & Zip Code
Signature
postbid mstlspec muter
PBD -9
SECTION 02992
EXCAVATION
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Building excavation.
B. Site excavation.
C. Shoring excavation.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 01000 - Basic Requirements: Inspection of bearing surfaces.
B. Section 02223 - Backfilling.
1.03 PROTECTION
A. Protect trees, shrubs, lawns, rock outcropping and other features remaining as a portion of
final landscaping.
B. Protect bench marks, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from
equipment and vehicular traffic.
C. Protect above and below grade utilities which are to remain.
D. Protect excavations by shoring, bracing, sheet piling, underpinning, or other methods
required to prevent cave -in or loose soil from falling into excavation.
E. Excavations greater than 5'0" deep shall be designed by an Engineer registered in the State
of Texas and meet all requirement of state and federal statutes for trench safety.
F. Underpin adjacent structures which may be damaged by excavation work, including service
utilities and pipe chases
G. Notify Architect/Engineer of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected
work in area until notified to resume work.
H. Protect bottom of excavations and soil adjacent to and beneath foundations from frost.
I. Grade excavation top perimeter to prevent surface water run -off into excavation.
1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings for retention systems under provisions of
Section 01300 and prepared under the direction of an Engineer registered in the State of
Texas. No excavations deeper than 5'-0" will be permitted prior to approval of the retention
system drawings.
02222 -1
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Subsoil: Excavated material, graded free of lumps larger than 6 inches, rocks larger than 3
inches, and debris.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Identify required lines, levels, contours and datum.
B. Identify known underground utilities. Stake and flag locations.
C. Identify and flag surface and aerial utilities.
D. Notify utility company to remove and relocate utilities.
E. Maintain and protect existing utilities remaining which pass through work area.
3.02 EXCAVATION
A. Excavate subsoil required to completely remove the 1 to 3 feet of surficial material from
beneath the building and for a distance of 5' -0" outside the building lines to expose the
limestone layer.
B. Excavation shall not interfere with normal 45 degree bearing splay of any foundation.
C. Hand trim excavation and leave free of loose matter.
D. Remove lumped subsoil,'boulders, and rock.
E. Correct unauthorized excavation at no cost to Owner.
F. Fill over - excavated areas under structure bearing surfaces by filling with concrete in
accordance with direction by Architect/Engineer.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Provide for visual inspection of bearing surfaces.
3.04 PROTECTION
A. Protect excavations by methods required to prevent cave -in or loose soil from falling into
excavation.
B. Protect bottom of excavations and soil adjacent to and beneath foundation, from freezing.
END OF SECTION
02222 - 2
1.04 TESTS
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SELECT FILL MATERIALS
Sieve Size
3 inch
1 3/4 inch
No. 4
No. 40
SECTION 02223
BACKFILLING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A Building perimeter backfilling to subgrade elevations.
B. Fill under slabs -on- grade.
C. Compaction requirements.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 01410 - Testing Laboratory Services: Compaction testing requirements of backfill.
B. Section 02222 - Excavation.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASTM C136 - Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.
B. • TSDHPT TEX -113 -E Compaction Test.
C. ASTM D698E - Test for Moisture - Density relations of soils and soil aggregate mixture using
5.5 Ib. rammer and 12 inch drop.
A. Tests and analysis of fill materials will be performed in accordance with ASTM D-698 and
under provisions of Section 01410.
1.05 SAMPLES
A. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01410. Fill to testing laboratory, in air -tight
containers.
A. Type A - Structural Fill: Crushed natural stone; with a maximum particle size of 2 inches in
nominal diameter.
Percent Retained
0
0 - 10%
45 - 75%
60 - 85%
02223 -1
Maximum Liquid Limit of 40 and Maximum Plasticity Index of 15.
2.02 COMMON FILL MATERIALS
A. Subsoil: Imported or reused from site; free of rocks larger than 3 inch size, and debris, P.I. <
15.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Verify stockpiled fill to be reused is approved.
B. Verify foundation or basement walls are braced to support surcharge forces imposed by
backfilling operations.
C. Verify areas to be backfilled are free of debris, snow, ice, or water, and ground surfaces are
not frozen.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. When necessary, compact subgrade surfaces to density requirements for backfill material.
B. Proof roll the exposed subgrade to identify any soft area.
C. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not readily capable of in -situ compaction. Backfill with
subsoil and compact to density equal to requirements for subsequent backfill material.
3.03 BACKFILLING
A Backfill areas to contours and elevations. Use unfrozen materials.
B. Backfill systematically, as early as possible, to allow maximum time for natural settlement.
Do not backfill over porous, wet, or spongy subgrade surfaces.
C. Place and compact select fill materials in continuous layers not exceeding 6 inches loose
depth.
D. Place and compact common fill material in continuous layers not exceeding 8 inches loose
depth.
E. Employ a placement method so not to disturb or damage foundation dampproofing.
F. Maintain optimum moisture content of backfill materials, within 2% to attain required
compaction density.
G. Backfill against supported foundation walls. Backfill simultaneously on each side of
unsupported foundation walls until supports are in place.
H. Slope grade away from building minimum 2 inches in 10 feet unless noted otherwise.
I. Make changes in grade gradual. Blend slopes into level areas.
02223 - 2
J. Remove surplus backfill materials from site.
K. Leave stockpile areas completely free of excess fill materials.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A. Top Surface of Backfilling: Plus or minus one inch.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Compaction testing will be performed in accordance with ASTM D698 and under provisions
of Section 01410.
B. If tests indicate work does not meet specified requirements, remove work, replace and retest
at no cost to Owner.
3.06 SCHEDULE OF LOCATIONS
A. The paragraphs below identify location, fill material to be used (identified from lower to upper
fill type), compacted thickness of each level, and compaction expressed as a percentage of
maximum density and optimum moisture in comparison with ANSI /ASTM D698.
B. Interior Slab -On- Grade:
1) Type A - Structural fill a minimum of 12" thick compacted to 95 percent at ±2% of
optimum moisture.
C. Exterior Side of Foundation Walls and Retaining Walls: common fill, to subgrade elevation,
each lift compacted to 90 percent
D. Base Material under Paving — See Section 02513.
E. Site backfili to subgrade of landscaped areas: Common fill material compacted to 90% of
ASTM D698 at 3% of optimum moisture.
END OF SECTION
02223 - 3
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Materials, labor, and equipment necessary to provide compaction of existing or
imported soils.
B. Areas included: building foundations and slabs.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Texas State Department of Highways and Public Transportation ( TSDHPT) Test
Method TEX -113 -E
B. TSDHPT Test Method TEX -114 -E
C. ANSI /ASTM 0698
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Testing Laboratory shall submit 3 copies of Moisture /Density Curves for each soil type.
B. Testing Laboratory shall submit 3 copies of Field Density Reports for each test
performed.
1.04 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Laboratory shall be allowed to secure necessary samples of proposed soil
types for testing to insure conformance to specification requirements.
PART2 PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
SECTION 02250
COMPACTION CONTROL AND TESTING
3.01 Control soil and fill compaction, providing minimum percentage of density specified for each area
classification indicated below. Correct improperly compacted areas or lifts as directed by
Architect if soil density tests indicate inadequate compaction.
3.02 Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: Compact soil to not Tess than the following
percentages of maximum density, in accordance with applicable procedures.
A. Building pad subgrade; compact upper 6 inches to 95% maximum dry density at ±2%
optimum moisture as defined by ASTM D698.
02250 -1
B. Select fill under building slab and foundation: compact to 95% maximum density at +2%
optimum moisture as defined by ASTM D698.
3.03 Moisture Control: Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned before
compaction, uniformly apply water to surface of subgrade or layer of soil material. Apply water
in minimum quantity as necessary to prevent free water from appearing on surface during or
subsequent to compaction operations.
3.04 Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil material that is too wet to permit compaction to
specified density.
3.05 Stockpile or spread soil material that has been removed because it is too wet to permit
compaction. Assist drying by discing, harrowing, or pulverizing until moisture content is reduced
to a satisfactory value.
3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Quality Control Testing During Construction: Allow testing service to inspect and
approve each subgrade and fill layer before further backfill or construction work is
performed.
B. Perform field density tests in accordance with ASTM D698 and TDH TEX- 113 -E, as
applicable.
C. If field tests are performed using nuclear methods, make calibration checks of both
density and moisture gages at beginning of work, on each different type of material en-
countered, and at intervals as directed by the Architect.
D. Paved Areas and Building Slab Fill: Perform at least one field density test of subgrade
for every 2,000 sq. ft. of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than three
tests. In each compacted fill layer, perform one field density test for every 2,000 sq. ft.
of overlaying building slab or paved area, but in no case fewer than three tests.
E. Foundation Wall Backfill: Perform at least two field density tests at locations and
elevations as directed.
3.07 If in opinion of Architect, based on testing service reports and inspection, subgrade or fills that
have been placed are below specified density, perform additional compaction and testing until
specified density is obtained.
END OF SECTION
02250 - 2
SECTION 02514
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Concrete sidewalks, curbs, gutters, and streets.
B. Surface finish.
C. Curing.
1.02 WORK INSTALLED BUT FURNISHED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
A. Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcing.
1.03 RELATED WORK
A. Section 02200 - Earthwork: Preparation of site for paving.
B. Section 07920 - Joint Sealers: Sealant for joints.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings.
B. ANSI /ASTM A497 - Welded Deformed Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement.
C. ANSI /ASTM D1751 - Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and
Structural Construction.
D. ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel for Concrete Reinforcement.
E. ASTM C33 - Concrete Aggregates.
F. ASTM C94 - Ready Mixed Concrete.
G. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement.
H. ASTM C260 - Air - Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
I. ASTM C309 - Liquid Membrane - Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete.
J. ASTM C494 - Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
K. FS TT -C -800 - Curing Compound, Concrete, for New and Existing Surfaces.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with ACI 301.
02514 - 1
B. Obtain materials from same source throughout.
1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to Standard Building Code for paving work on private property.
1.07 TESTS
A. Testing and analysis will be performed under provisions of Section 01410.
B. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to appointed firm for review
prior to commencement of work.
C. Three concrete test cylinders will be taken for every 75 or less cu yds of each class of
concrete placed each day.
D. One additional test cylinder will be taken during cold weather and be cured on site
under same conditions as concrete it represents.
E. One slump test will be taken for each set of test cylinders taken.
1.08 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Include data on joint filler, admixtures. curing compounds.
C. Submit manufacturer's instructions under provisions of Section 01300.
PART 2 PRODUCTS ,
2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cement: ASTM C150 Air Entraining -Type IA Portland type, gray color.
B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C33.
C. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete.
2.02 FORM MATERIALS
A. Wood form material, profiled to suit conditions.
2.03 REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615; 60 ksi yield grade; deformed billet steel bars,
uncoated finish.
B. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: Plain type, ANSI /ASTM A185; in coiled rolls; uncoated
finish.
02514 - 2
C. Tie Wire: Annealed steel, minimum 16 gage size.
D. Dowels: ASTM A615; 40 ksi yield grade, plain steel, uncoated finish.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Curing Compound: Ashford Formula - by Curecrete Chemical Co., Oregon, Utah or
equal.
B. Joint Sealer: Conform to requirements of ASTM C920 -79, Specification for Concrete
Joint Sealer, self - leveling, To Compound Urethane."
C. Preformed Joint: Provide and Install "Shepload" load transfer units by Shepler
Equipment Co.
2.05 ADMIXTURES
A. Air Entrainment: ASTM C260; Specification for Air Entraining
Concrete" no chlorides.
2.06 CONCRETE MIX
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Mix concrete in accordance with ASTM C94.
Provide concrete for paving of the following characteristics:
- Compressive Strength at 7 days: 2000 psi
- Compressive Strength at 28 days: 3000 psi
Use accelerating
Architect /Engineer.
requirements.
Use set - retarding
Architect /Engineer.
admixtures during hot weather only when approved by
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Verify compacted granular base is ready to support paving and imposed loads.
B. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct.
C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Moisten base to minimize absorption of water from fresh concrete.
admixtures in cold weather only when approved by
Use of admixtures will not relax cold weather placement
Admixtures for
Add air entraining agent to concrete mix for concrete work exposed to exterior.
02514 - 3
B. Notify Architect /Engineer minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of concreting
operations.
3.03 FORMING
A. Place and secure forms to correct location, dimension, and profile.
B. Assemble formwork to permit easy stripping and dismantling without damaging
concrete.
C. Place joint fillers vertical in position, in straight lines. Secure to formwork during
concrete placement.
3.04 REINFORCEMENT
A. Place reinforcement at 1/3 of concrete thickness from top of slabs - on - grade.
B. Interrupt reinforcement at expansion joints.
C. Place reinforcement to achieve slab and curb alignment as detailed.
D. Provide dowelled joints at interruptions of concrete with one end of dowel set in
capped sleeve to allow longitudinal movement.
3.05 FORMED JOINTS
A. Place control joints at maximum 20 foot intervals to correct elevation and profile.
Align curb, gutter, and sidewalk joints.
B. Place joint filler between paving components and building or other appurtenances.
Recess top of filler 3/4 inches for joint sealant placement by Section 07900.
C. Provide expansion joints at mazimum 100 foot intervals of paving.
3.06 PLACING CONCRETE
A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301.
B. Hot Weather Placement: ACI 301.
C. Cold Weather Placement: ACI 301.
D. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, formed joints are not disturbed during
concrete placement.
E. Place concrete continuously between predetermined construction joints. Do not break
or interrupt successive pours such that cold joints occur.
3.07 FINISHING
A. Paving: Light broom.
02514 - 4
B. Sidewalk Paving: Light broom, radiused and trowel joint edges.
C. Place curing compound on exposed concrete surfaces immediately after finishing.
Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01410.
B. Maintain records of placed concrete items. Record date, location of pour, quantity, air
temperature, and test samples taken.
3.09 PROTECTION
A. Immediately after placement, protect concrete under provisions of Section 01500
from premature drying, excessive hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury.
END OF SECTION
02514 - 5
SECTION 02528
CONCRETE CURBS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide all concrete curb and gutter required for the project complete and in place.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 02200 - Excavation and Grading.
B. Section 02514 - Portland Cement Concrete Paving.
1.03 STANDARDS
A. All concrete work shall be performed in accordance with 'Building Code Requirements for
Reinforced Concrete" published by American Concrete Institute unless otherwise shown,
noted or specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Concrete: See Section 02514.
B. Reinforcement: ASTM A615 Grade 60 as shown on drawings.
C. Expansion Joints: 1/2 inch thick premolded bituminous material.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 CONCRETE
A. No concrete work shall be started until subgrade has been compacted and tested.
3.02 FORMWORK
A. General Requirements: Extend forms for curbs and gutter the full depth of the concrete.
Stake forms sufficiently to resist the pressure of the concrete without springing, settling or
losing their shape.
B. Setting and Removing Forms: Joint forms neatly and tightly, stake securely to line and
grade and brace firmly throughout. Clean and oil forms thoroughly before concrete is placed
against them. Remove forms in a manner to prevent damage to the concrete and exposed
surfaces.
02528 -1
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Form curb and gutter according to detail. Curb surfaces shall be thoroughly worked with a
wood float and exposed edges rounded with an edging tool. The inside forms shall be
removed after the concrete has sufficiently set and surface : irregularities rubbed out or
patched.
B. Place bituminous expansion joints every 40 feet Joints shall extend fully through the curb
and gutter sections. Tool the joints on each side to form a smooth, finished appearance.
C. Curb and gutter after form removal must be true to line and grade. Curves must be true
radius arcs without bows or broken segments. Any deformations which cannot be corrected
by tooling will be replaced as directed by the Architect
D. FINISHING
1. Light Broom.
END OF SECTION
02528 - 2
SECTION 03100
CONCRETE FORMS AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Formwork for cast -in place concrete, with shoring, bracing and anchorage. .
B. Openings for other work.
C. Form accessories.
D. Form stripping. '
E. Refer to Structural Engineering drawings for additional notes and requirements. These
requirements supercede requirements in this section.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement.
B. Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ACI 301- Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute
International; 1996.
B. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete and Commentary; American
Concrete Institute International; 1999.
C. ACI 347R - Guide to Formwork for Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 1994.
1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Design, engineer and construct formwork, shoring and bracing to conform to design and code
requirements; resultant concrete to conform to required shape, line and dimension.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 WOOD FORM MATERIALS •
A. Plywood: Southern Yellow Pine species; solid one side grade; sound undamaged sheets with
clean, true edges.
B. Lumber: Southern Yellow Pine species; Construction grade; with grade stamp clearly visible.
2.02 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES
A. Form Release Agent Colorless mineral oil that will not stain concrete.
B. Corners: Filleted, rigid plastic type; 3/4 x 3/4 inch (mm) size; maximum possible lengths.
03100 -1
C. Flashing Reglets: Galvanized steel, 22 gage (0.8 mm) thick, longest possible lengths, with
alignment splines for joints, non - filled, release tape sealed slots, anchors for securing to
concrete formwork.
D. Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts, Anchorages: Sized as required, of sufficient strength
and character to maintain formwork in place while placing concrete.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify lines, levels and centers before proceeding with formwork. Ensure that dimensions agree
with drawings.
3.02 EARTH FORMS
A. Hand trim sides and bottom of earth forms. Remove loose soil prior to placing concrete.
3.03 ERECTION - FORMWORK
A. Erect formwork, shoring and bracing to achieve design requirements, in accordance with
requirements of ACI 301.
B. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Shore or strengthen formwork subject to
overstressing by construction loads.
C. Align joints and make watertight. Keep form joints to a minimum.
D. Obtain approval before framing openings in structural members that are not indicated on
drawings.
E. Provide fillet strips on external corners of beams, joists, and columns.
F. Coordinate this section with other sections of work that require attachment of components to
formwork.
3.04 APPLICATION - FORM RELEASE AGENT
A. Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
3.05 INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS
A. Provide formed openings where required for items to be embedded in passing through concrete
work. -
B. Locate and set in place items that will be cast directly into concrete.
C. Coordinate with work of other sections in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets, recesses,
sleeves, bolts, anchors, other inserts, and components of other work.
D. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, so they are straight, level, and
plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement.
03100 - 2
3.06 FORMWORK TOLERANCES
A. Construct formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 301.
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section
01400.
3.08 FORM REMOVAL
A. Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its own
weight and imposed loads.
END OF SECTION
03100 - 3
PART 1 GENERAL
SECTION 03200
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Reinforcing steel for cast -in -place concrete.
B. Supports and accessories for steel reinforcement.
C. Refer to Structural Engineering drawings for additional notes and requirements. These
requirements supercede requirements in this section.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03100 - Concrete Forms and Accessories.
B. Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete.
C. Section 03470 - Tilt -up Precast Concrete
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute
International; 1996.
B. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements For Reinforced Concrete and Commentary; American
Concrete Institute International; 1999.
C. ACI SP -66 - ACI Detailing Manual; American Concrete Institute International; 1994.
D. ASTM A 615/A 615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement; 1996a.
E. AWS D1.4 - Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel; American Welding Society; 1998.
F. CRSI (DA4) - Manual of Standard Practice; Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; 1997, 26th
Edition.
G. CRSI (P1) - Placing Reinforcing Bars; Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; 1999.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01340 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that reinforcing steel and accessories supplied for this project
meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301.
03200 -1
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 615 /A 615M Grade 60 (420).
1. Deformed billet -steel bars.
2. Welded wire fabric is not permitted for reinforcement of horzintal concrete slabs on grade.
B. Reinforcement Accessories:
1. Tie Wire: Annealed, minimum 16 gage (1.5 mm). •
2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of
reinforcement during concrete placement.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate concrete reinforcing in accordance with CRSI (DA4) - Manual of Standard Practice.
B. Locate reinforcing splices riot indicated on drawings at point of minimum stress.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PLACEMENT
A. Place, support and secure reinforcement against displacement. Do not deviate from required
position.
B. Do not displace or damage vapor barrier.
C. Conform to applicable code for concrete cover over reinforcement
END OF SECTION
03200 - 2
E. Concrete curing.
SECTION 03300
CAST - IN - PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Elevated concrete slabs.
B. Floors and slabs on grade.
C. Joint devices associated with concrete work.
D. Miscellaneous concrete elements, including equipment pads, light pole bases, flagpole bases,
thrust blocks, and manholes.
F. Refer to Structural Engineering drawings for additional notes and requirements. These
requirements supercede requirements in this section.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03100 - Concrete Forms and Accessories: Forms and accessories for formwork.
B. Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement.
C. Section 03470 - Tilt -up Precast Concrete
D. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass
Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 1991 (Reapproved 1997).
B. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute
International; 1996.
C. ACI 302.1R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; American Concrete Institute
International; 1996.
D. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American
Concrete Institute International; 1989 (Reapproved 1997).
E. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 1991.
F. ACI 308 - Standard Practice for Curing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International;
1992 (Reapproved 1997).
G. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete and Commentary American
Concrete Institute International; 1999.
03300 7 1
H. ASTM C 33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 1999a.
I. ASTM C 39/C 39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens; 1999.
J. ASTM C 94/C 94M - Standard Specification for Ready -Mixed Concrete; 2000.
K. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 1999a.
L. ASTM C 171 - Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete; 1997a.
M. ASTM C 309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane - Forming Compounds for Curing
Concrete; 1998a.
N. ASTM C 494/C 494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 1999a.
O. ASTM C 1107 - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic- Cement Grout (Nonshrink);
1999.
P. COE CRD -C 513 - COE Specifications for Rubber Waterstops; Corps of Engineers; 1974.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318.
B. Acquire cement from same source and aggregate from same source for entire project.
C. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FORMWORK
A. Comply with requirements of Section 03100.
2.02 REINFORCEMENT
A. Comply with requirements of Section 03200.
2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cement ASTM C 150, Type I - Normal Portland type.
B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C 33.
C. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete.
2.04 ADMIXTURES
A. Chemical Admixtures: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A - Water Reducing, Type C - Accelerating,
and Type G - Water Reducing, High Range and Retarding.
2.05 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES
03300 - 2
A. Reglets: Formed steel sheet, galvanized, with temporary filler to prevent concrete Intrusion
during placement.
B. Vapor Retarder: 6 mil (0.5 mm) thick clear polyethylene film, type recommended for below
grade application.
C. Not Used.
D. Non - Shrink Grout: ASTM C 1107; premixed compound consisting of non - metallic aggregate,
cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents.
E. Moisture- Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171; regular curing paper, white curing paper, clear
polyethylene, white polyethylene, or white burlap - polyethylene sheet
F. Liquid Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, clear or translucent.
2.06 JOINT DEVICES AND MATERIALS
A. Waterstops: Rubber type, COE CRD -C 513 as manufactured by Sonneborn or equal.
B. Joint Filler: Nonextruding, resilient asphalt impregnated fiberboard or felt, 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick
and 4 inches (200 mm) deep; tongue and groove profile.
C. Construction Joint Devices: Integral extruded plastic; 3/4 inch (20 mm) thick, formed to tongue
and groove profile, with removable top strip exposing sealant trough, knockout holes spaced at 6
inches (150 mm), ribbed steel spikes with tongue to fit top screed edge.
D. Sealant and Primer. As specified in Section 07900.
2.07 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN
A. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations.
B. Concrete Strength: Establish required average strength for each type of concrete on the basis of
field experience or trial mixtures, as specified in ACI 301. Refer to Structural Drawings for
required compressive strengths.
1. For trial mixtures method, employ independent testing agency acceptable to Architect for
preparing and reporting proposed mix designs.
C. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates
recommended by manufacturer.
2.08 MIXING
A. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C 94/C 94M.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section.
3.02 PREPARATION
03300 - 3
A. Verify that forms are clean and free of rust before applying release agent.
B. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Install vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade. Lap joints minimum 6 inches (150 mm) and
seal watertight by taping edges and ends. Cover with sand to depth shown on drawings.
3.03 PLACING CONCRETE
A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R.
B. Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI 302.1 R.
C. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, waterstops, embedded parts, and formed construction joint
devices will not be disturbed during concrete placement.
D. Repair vapor retarder damaged during placement of concrete reinforcing. Repair with vapor
retarder material; lap over damaged areas minimum 6 inches (150 mm) and seal watertight.
E. Install joint devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
F. Install construction joint devices in coordination with floor slab pattem placement sequence. Set
top to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete.
G. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and
test samples taken.
H. Place concrete continuously between predetermined expansion, control, and construction joints.
I. Do not interrupt successive placement; do not permit cold joints to occur.
J. Place floor slabs in saw cut pattern indicated.
K Saw cut joints within 24 hours after placing. Use 3/16 inch (5 mm) thick blade, cut into 1/4 depth
of slab thickness.
L. Screed floors level, maintaining surface flatness of maximum 1/4 inch in 10 ft (6 mm /3 m).
3.04 CONCRETE FINISHING
A. Repair surface defects, immediately afterremoving formwork.
B. Unexposed Fomi Finish: Rub down or chip off fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch (6 mm) or
more in height.
C. Concrete Slabs: Finish to requirements of ACI 302.1 R, and as follows:
1. Wood float surfaces that will receive quarry tile, ceramic tile, and terrazzo with full bed
setting system.
2. Steel trowel surfaces that will receive carpeting, resilient flooring, seamless flooring, thin set
quarry tile, and thin set ceramic tile.
3. Steel trowel surfaces that will be left exposed.
a. Chemical Sealer: 5 days after slab has cured, apply single coat per manufacturer's
instructions. Apply second coat of chemical sealer to hallways only at completion of
the project.
03300 - 4
1
3.05 CURING AND PROTECTION
I A. Comply with requirements of ACI 308. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from
premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury.
B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period
1 necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete.
C. Formed Surfaces: Cure by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period.
1 D. Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms: •
1. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared and before surface is dry. Keep
continuously moist for not less than three days by water ponding, water - saturated sand,
I
water -fog spray, or saturated burlap.
2. Water cure all building floor slabs to reduce surface cracking.
3. Begin final curing after initial curing but before surface is dry.
I a. Moisture - retaining cover: Seal in place with waterproof tape or adhesive.
b. Curing compound: Apply in two coats at right angles, using application rate
recommended by manufacturer.
1) Do not apply curing compound until water curing is completed.
I 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
I A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section
01400.
B. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm.
1 3.07 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE
I A. Test Results: The testing agency shall report test results in writing to Architect and General
Contractor within 24 hours of test.
B. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances
1 or specified requirements.
' END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
03300 - 5
PART GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
1.02 RELATED WORK
SECTION 03346
CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING
A. Finish separate floor toppings slabs on fill Under provisions of Section monolithic floor
slab.
A. Section 03300 - Cast - In - Place Concrete: Prepared concrete surfaces ready for
finishing.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings.
B. ASTM C309 - Liquid Membrane - Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator: Company specializing in concrete floor surface finishing with 3 years
experience and approved by compound hardener coating manufacturer.
B. Furnish concrete hardener sealer slip resistant coating and curing compound in
manufacturer's packaging with application instructions.
1.05 FIELD SAMPLES
A. Provide field sample under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Prepare trial finish in area designated by Architect /Engineer.
1.06 PRODUCT DATA
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Provide product data for specified products.
C. Submit manufacturers' instructions under provisions of Section 01300.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Master Builders.
B. Gifford -Hill.
03346-1
C. Substitutions: As approved in writting by Architect.
2.02 MATERIALS :
A. Curing Compound: ASTM C309; clear.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Verify floor surfaces are acceptable for application of this work.
B. Ensure floor surfaces are depressed to accommodate finish materials.
C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of surfaces.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Apply bonding agent prior to application of finish in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
3.03 FLOOR FINISHING
A. Finish concrete floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 301.
B. Uniformly spread, screed, and float concrete. Do not use grate tampers or mesh
rollers. Do not spread concrete by vibration.
C. Steel trowel surfaces to receive carpeting resilient flooring.
D. Steel trowel surfaces which will be left exposed.
3.04 TOLERANCES.
A. Maintain surface flatness with maximum variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet.
B. In areas of floor drains, maintain floor level at walls and slope surface uniformly to
drains at 1/8 inch per foot or as indicated.
3.05 CURING
A. Cure finish floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 301.
B. Apply curing compound on finished floor surfaces. Apply in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION
03346-2
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Mortar for unit masonry.
1.02 RELATED WORK
SECTION 04100
MORTAR
A. Section 04050 — Masonry Procedures.
B. Section 04150 — Masonry Accessories.
C. Section 04200 — Unit Masonry.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C5 — Quicklime for Structural Purposes.
B. ASTM C91 — Masonry Cement.
C. ASTM C94 — Ready -Mixed Concrete.
D. ASTM C144 — Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.
E. ASTM C150 — Portland Cement.
F. ASTM C207 — Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.
G. ASTM C270 — Mortar for Unit Masonry.
H. ASTM C387 — Packaged, Dry, Combined Materials for Mortar and Concrete.
I. ASTM C476 — Grout for Reinforced and Non - reinforced Masonry.
J. ASTM C780 — Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced
Unit Masonry.
K. International Masonry Industry All- Weather Council (IMIAC) — Recommended Practices and Guide
Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction.
1.04 MIX TESTS
A. Test mortar mix cubes under provisions of Section 01400.
B. Test grout mix cylinders under provisions of Section 01400.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Include design mix, environmental conditions, and admixture limitations.
04100 -1
C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01500.
B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01500.
C. Maintain packaged materials clean, dry, and protected against dampness, freezing, and foreighn
matter.
1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) prior
to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.
B. Cold Weather Requirements: IMIAC — Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Cold
Weather Masonry Construction.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement ASTM C150, normal -Type 1; gray color.
B. Masonry Cement: ASTM C98, for general use.
C. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144, standard masonry type; clean, dry, protected against dampness,
freezing, and foreign matter.
D. Grout Course Aggregate: Maximum 3/8 inch size.
E. Grout Fine Aggregate: sand.
F. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S.
G. Quicklime: ASTM C5, non - hydraulic type.
H. Premix Mortar: ASTM C387, using gray cement
I. Water: Clean and potable.
2.02 MORTAR COLOR
A. Mortar Color. Natural.
2.03 MIXES
A. Mortar for Load Bearing Wails and Partitions: ASTM C270, Type M.
B. Mortar for Non -load Bearing Wills and Partitions: ASTM C270, Type N.
C. Mortar for Reinforced Masonry ASTM C476, Type PM.
04100 -2
D. Pointing Mortar: ASTM C270, Type N with maximum 2 percent ammonium stearate or calcium
stearate per cement weight
E. Type M and PM mortar shall have a compressive strength of 2500 psi under field conditions and as
installed in the Work.
2.04 GROUT FILL
A. Bond Beams: Lintels: Type and strength specified in Section 03300 with a slump of 6 inches.
B. Engineered Masonry: 3000 psi strength at 28 days; 6 inches slump; premixed type in accordance
with ASTM C94.
2.05 MORTAR MIXING
A. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in accordance with
ASTM C270.
B. Do not use anti - freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar or grout.
C. If water is lost by evaporation, retemper within two hours of mbdng. Do not retemper mortar after
two hours of mbdng.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. After inspection of concrete grout spaces by Architect/Engineer, plug cleanout holes with masonry
units. Brace against wet grout pressure.
B. Install mortar and grout in accordance with 04340.
C. Work grout into cores and cavities to eliminate voids.
D. Do not displace reinforcing steel when placing grout.
E. Clean concrete grout spaces of excess mortar and debris.
END OF SECTION
04100 -3
1
1 SECTION 04340
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
PART 1 GENERAL
REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Concrete Masonry units.
B. Reinforcement, anchorages, and accessories.
C. Parged masonry surfaces.
1.02 WORK INSTALLED BUT FURNISHED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
A. Section 05500 — Metal Fabrications: Loose steel lintels.
B. Section 05500 —Metal Fabrications: Fabricated steel items.
C. Section 05210 — Steel Joists.
1.03 RELATED WORK
A. Section 01400 — Quality Control: Testing laboratory services.
- B. Section 04100 — Mortar. Mortar and grout.
C. Section 07900 — Caulking: Rod and sealant at control joints.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ACI 315 — Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement.
B. ASTM A615 — Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
C. ASTM C55 — Concrete Building Brick.
D. ASTM C90 — Hollow Load - Bearing Concrete Masonry Units.
E. ASTM C145 — Solid Load - Bearing Concrete Masonry Units.
F. ASTM C652 — Hollow Brick.
G. AWS D12.1 — Reinforcing Steel Welding Code.
H. International Masonry Industry All- Weather Council (IMIAC) — Recommended Practices and Guide
Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01340.
B. Indicate bar sizes, spacings, locations, and quantities of reinforcing steel bending and cutting
schedules, and supporting and spacing devices.
04340 -1
C. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01340.
1.06 CERTIFICATES
A. Submit manufacturer's certificates under provisions of Section 01340.
B. Submit manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed specked requirements.
1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Cold Weather Requirements: IMIAC — Recommended Practices and Specifications for Cold
Weather Masonry Construction.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT MANUFACTURERS
A. Featherlite to provide all CMU.
2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. Hollow Load Bearing Units: ASTM C90, Grade N, Type I normal weight.
B. Masonry Units: Modular sized to 8 x 8 x 16 inch; provide special units for 90 degree corners, bond
beams, lintels.
C. Masonry Units shall be:
1. Texas Quarries Lueders Cut Limestone Units as indicated on plans.
2.02 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES
A. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Ladder type, plain steel construction; 3/16 inch side rods as
manufactured by Dur -O -Wall, provided by Featherlite.
B. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, 60 ksi yield grade; deformed billet steel bars; plain finish.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Control Joints: Dur - - Wall D/A 2002 Extruded Rubber Control Joint, provided by Featherlite.
B. Joint Filler: Closed cell polyurethane oversized 50 percent; self expanding.
C. Building Paper: Asphalt saturated felt.
D. Nailing Strips: Westem softwood, preservative treated, sized to masonry joints.
2.04 LINTELS
A. As Indicated on Plans.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
04340 -2
A. Supply metal anchors to Section 05500 for placement. Direct correct placement.
B. Verify items providedby other Sections of work are properly sized and located.
C. Establish lines, levels, and coursing. Protect from disturbance.
D. Provide temporary bracing during erection of masonry work. Maintain in place until building
structure provides permanent bracing.
3.02 COURSING
A. Place masonry to lines and levels indicated.
B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform width. Make vertical and horizontal joints equal and of
uniform thickness.
C. Lay concrete masonry units as indicated on plans. Course one block unit and one mortar joint to
equal 8 inches. Form raked mortar joints.
3.03 PLACING AND BONDING
A. Lay masonry in full bed of mortar, properly jointed with other work. Buttering corners of joints, and
deep or excessive furrowing of mortar joints are not permitted.
B. Fully bond intersections, and external and internal corners.
C. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has taken initial set. Where adjustment must be
made, remove mortar and replace.
D. Remove excess mortar.
E. Perform jobsite cutting with proper tools to provide straight unchipped edges. Take care to prevent
breaking masonry unit comers or edges.
3.04 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES
A. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches oc.
B. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings.
Extend 24 inches minimum each side of opening.
C. Place joint reinforcement continuous in first and second joint below top of walls.
D. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches. Extend 24 inches minimum each side of opening.
3.05 REINFORCING STEEL
A. Place reinforcement in accordance with ACI 315.
B. Locate reinforcing splices at points of minimum stress. Review location of splices with
Architect/Engineer.
C. Weld reinforcement in accordance with AWS D12.1.
04340 -3
D. Place reinforcing bars supported and secured against displacement. Maintain position within %
inch (13 mm) of true dimension.
E. Verify reinforcement is clean, free of scale, dirt, or other foreign coatings which would reduce bond
to grout.
F. All 8" CMU Walls to be reinforced with (1) #4 Vertical at 48" olc.
G. All CMU Walls to be reinforced with (3) vertical bars at corners, (4) vertical bars at intersections, (2)
vertical bars at wall ends and (2) vertical bars at each side of each opening, control joint or
expansion joint.
H. Construct Bond beams in all CMU Walls at top of walls, roof and floor levels and at 8' -0" o.c.
maximum.
3.06 TOLERANCES
A. Variation from Unit to Adjacent Unit 1/32 inch (1.5 mm) maximum.
B. Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/8 inch in 10 feet and % inch in 20 feet or more.
C. Variation from Plumb: 1/8 inch per story non - cumulative; ''% inch two stories or more.
D. Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 feet % inch in 10 feet; '% inch maximum.
E. Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 feet.
F. Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: Plus or minus'' /. inch.
3.07 CONTROL JOINTS
A. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcing across control joints.
B. Install resilient control joint in continuous lengths. Heat weld butt and corner joints in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Size joint in accordance with Section 07920 for sealant performance.
3.08 BUILT -IN WORK
A. As work progresses, build -in metal door frames, fabricated metal frames, window frames, anchor
bolts, plates, and other items to be built in the work supplied by other Sections.
B. Build -in items plumb and level.
C. Bed anchors of metal door and glazed frames in mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with mortar.
Fill masonry cores with grout minimum 12 inches from framed openings.
D. Do not build -in organic materials subject to deterioration.
3.09 CUTTING AND FITTING
A. Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit, sleeves and grounds. Cooperate with other Sections of work
to provide correct size, shape, and location.
04340 -4
B. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting any area not indicated or where appearance or strength of
masonry work may be impaired.
3.10 CLEANING
A. Remove excess mortar and smears.
B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.
C. Clean soiled surfaces with a non - acidic solution which will not harm masonry or adjacent materials.
Consult masonry manufacturer for acceptable cleaners.
D. Use non - metallic tools in cleaning operations.
3.11 PROTECTION
A. Protect finished installation under provisions of Section 01010.
B. Maintain protective boards at exposed external corners which may be damaged by construction
activities.
C. Provide protection without damaging completed work.
D. At day's end, cover unfinished walls to prevent moisture infiltration.
END OF SECTION
04340 -5
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
SECTION 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY
A. The contractor shall furnish all material and labor necessary for all rough carpentry as shown on the
drawings or as herein specified or both.
1.02 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Grade -mark, trademark and mill identification shall appear on each piece of lumber and plywood
furnished for this project (interior - exterior).
B. All lumber shall be identified by the grade -mark or a recognized grading association or of an
independent lumber grading inspection agency authorized to grade the species. The association or
independent inspection agency and the grading rules under which they grade shall be certified by the
Board of Review, American Lumber Standards Committee.
C. Dressed dimensions shall comply with PS 20 -70.
PART2- PRODUCT
2.02 FRAMING LUMBER
A. Nail Materials shall conform to material standards set forth in F.S. FF -N -105.
B. Nails: Furnish all nails throughout the entire job that are of the size and kind necessary and consistent
with good workmanship.
C. Allowable joint values of nailed connections shall comply with "The National Design Specifications for
Stress -Grade Lumber and its Fastenings ", published by the National Lumber Manufacturers
Association.
D. Nails exposed to weather or used for the attachment of exterior finish materials shall be of aluminum
alloy, copper, stainless steel, or galvanized steel. Zinc coating of galvanized steel nails shall conform
with 3.2.1 of FF- N -105a.
E. Nails used for attaching or connection metallic materials shall be of same material. An exception may
be permitted for certain dissimilar metals having nearly the same electrolytic potential.
F. Aluminum nails shall not be used with treated woods.
2.04 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. Store lumber to insure proper ventilation and drainage.
B. Protect plywood and sheathing against dampness and store in well ventilated buildings where
not exposed to extreme changes of temperature or humidity.
06100 -1
C. Store plywood and sheathing in a flat position, one above another on solid level supports.
2.05 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT
A. Framing lumber: All framing lumber required to receive a preservative treatment shall be
treated in accordance with the specifications of SWPI Standard for softwood lumber. Lumber
shall be treated by a pressure method (full or empty cell process) in accordance with AWPI LP-
2, LP -3, or LP-4. Each piece of lumber shall be labeled with a permanent mark indicating
conformance with the applicable AWPI Standards.
PART 3 - INSTALLATION
3.01 WORKMANSHIP - GENERAL
A. Provide and install all rough hardware for proper installation of carpentry. Nails, spikes, screws,
power actuated fasteners, bolts and similar items shall be of types and sizes sufficient to draw
and rigidly secure members in place.
B. Vent pipes shall clear all framing a minimum of two inches.
C. Temporary enclosures of doors, windows, and other openings shall be provided when
necessary to meet weather conditions.
3.02 ROUGH FRAMING - GENERAL
A. Layout, cut, fit, and erect framing, blocking, grounds and all items of trim and other carpentry.
Do cutting work of carpentry for other trades. Brace, plumb and level all members and secure
with sufficient nails, spikes and bolts to provide rigidity.
B. When strength of structural members is impaired by improper cutting, drilling, or by excessive
defects, the member shall be replaced or reinforced.
END OF SECTION
06100 - 2
SECTION 06114
WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED (where applicable)
A. Roof curbs and cants.
B. Blocking in wall and roof openings.
C. Wood furring and grounds.
D. Concealed wood blocking for support of washroom accessories wall and cabinets.
E. Wood treatment.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 03100 — Concrete Formwork: Concrete openings to receive wood blocking.
B. Section 06112 — Framing and Sheathing: Roof decking to receive wood curbs and cants.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ALSC — American Lumber Standards Committee: Softwood Lumber Standard.
B. APA — American Plywood Association: Grades and Standards.
C. FS TT -W -571 — Wood Preservation: Treating Practices.
D. NFPA — National Forest Products Association.
E. NCGA — National Lumber Grades Authority.
F. SPID — Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
G. AITC — American Institute or Timber Construction.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by ALSC.
B. Plywood Grading Agency: Certified by APA.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01340.
B. Provide technical data on wood preservative materials and application instructions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
06114 -1
A. Lumber Grading Rules: SPIB, NLGA, NFPD.
B. Softwood Lumber. SYP species, #1 grade, 15 percent maximum moisture content.
C. Plywood: APA Grade C -D, Exterior Structural 1 with waterproof glue, sanded.
D. Fasteners: ElectroHot- dipped galvanized steel for exterior, high humidity, and treated wood
locations; plain finish elsewhere; size and type to suit condition.
E. Anchors: Expansion shield and lag bolt type for anchorage to concrete. Bolts or ballistic fasteners
for anchorages to steel and concrete.
2.02 WOOD TREATMENT
A. Wood Preservative (Surface Application): Clear, type.
B. Wood Preservative (Pressure Treatment): FS TT -W -571 AWPA Treatment C2 using water borne
preservative with 0.30 percent retainage.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT (where applicable)
A. Brush apply one coat two coats of preservative treatment on wood in contact with cementitious
materials roofing and related metal fleshings.
B. Apply preservative treatment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Treat site - sawn ends.
D. Allow preservative to cure prior to erecting members.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Erect wood framing members level and plumb.
B. Space framing and furring 16 inches oc,unless noted on plans.
C. Curb all roof openings except where prefabricated curbs are provided. Form comers by lapping
side members alternatively.
D. Coordinate work with installation of decking and support of decking at openings.
END OF SECTION
06114 -2
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Fumish labor, materials and equipment required to install architectural woodwork,
metal door frames, doors, grounds and furring, miscellaneous equipment, finish
hardware and all other items of finish carpentry.
B. Receive, check, store and properly install all items of architectural woodwork.
Scribe and fit to adjacent work. Provide necessary grounds and anchors.
C. Receive, check and store items of finish hardware at the jobsite. Tag, index and file
keys.
D. Items specked elsewhere which are to be installed under this Section:
1. Architectural Woodwork (06400)
2. Wood doors (08200)
3. Finish hardware (08700)
4. Metal doors and frames (08100)
5. Toilet Enclosure (10150)
6. Toilet and bath accessories (10800)
1.02 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Take measurements at the building before executing any of the work. Provide
proper fitting of woodwork in the building.
PART2- PRODUCT
2.01 MATERIALS
A. See 1.01 D., above.
PART 3 - INSTALLATION
3.01 WORKMANSHIP
SECTION 06200
FINISH CARPENTRY
A. Only mechanics who are competent and experienced in high grade finish carpentry
shall be used to install finish woodwork. If, in the opinion of the Architect, workmen
are not fully competent, such men shall not be permitted to do further work. Only
the highest character of workmanship will be acceptable.
3.02 INSTALLING WOOD DOORS
A. Inspection: Examine door frames and verify that frames are of the correct type and
have been installed as required for proper hanging of corresponding doors.
B. Installation
1. Conditions doors to average prevailing humidity in installation area prior to
hanging.
2. Fit doors properly to frame with uniform clearance at each edge and
machine for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining.
a) Bevel non -fire -rated doors 1/8" in 2" at lock and hinge edges.
3. Clearance: For non -fire doors provide clearance of 1/8" at jambs and
heads; 1/8 "at meeting stiles for pairs of doors; and 1/2" from bottom of door
to top of decorative floor finish or covering, except where threshold is shown
or scheduled provide 1/4" clearance from bottom of door to top of
threshold.
3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN WOOD DOORS
A. Rehang or replace doors which do not swing or operate freely as directed by the
Architect
B. Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation, as directed by the Architect.
C. Replace warped doors.
D. Protect doors from damage or deterioration until acceptance of the work.
E. Carefully clean doors and touch -up as required not more than four days prior to
Owner's acceptance of the work. '
3.04 INSTALLATION OF HARDWARE
A. General:
1. Hardware shall be fitted prior to the painting and then removed. After painting
is completed, final installation of the hardware shall be made.
2. Finish hardware must be neatly and properly installed in accordance with the
best practices. All hardware must be thoroughly clean when it is turned over
to the Owner.
B. Installation Location:
1. Locations of installation shall be as recommended by the manufacturer, and /or
as follows:
Locksets: C/L knob to finish floor - 38"
Door Pulls: C/L grip to finish floor - 45"
Pushplates: C/L of plate to finish floor - 48"
Deadlocks: C/L of cylinder to finish floor - 52"
Butt Hinges: To edge of top butt - 5" from top rabbet. Bottom edge of
bottom butt - 10" from finish floor. Intermediate butt-
equidistant between top and bottom butts.
Stops, Holders, Bumpers: Install in position to prevent hardware or door from
coming into contact with parts of the building or other conflicting doors.
All other hardware: Per template and /or installation instructions.
3.05 INSTALLATION METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Set before partitions lines, plumb and brace against displacement until enclosed.
Bolt each jamb to the floor through anchors furnished with the metal door frames.
B. Except for trimming, install, adjust and clean steel doors in a similar fashion to wood
doors as described in 3.02 and 3.03 above.
3.06 WOOD GROUNDS AND FURRING
A. Provide wood grounds and blocking of size and shape required for securing wood trim
and where required to secure other work or equipment in place. Set grounds true to
line, level or plumb and well secured in place. Wood blocking or nailers on steel
framing shall be bolted thereto. Wood nailers on masonry shall be secured to
galvanized all metal wall plugs set in masonry joints as wall is laid.
3.07 INSTALLATION MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT
A. Install all items of equipment furnished under the General Contract that are not
specifically noted to be installed by others.
END OF SECTION
06200 - 3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
B. Work specified elsewhere:
1. Wood Doors
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.03 SUBMITTALS
1.04 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
SECTION 06400
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
A. Fumish all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to provide all finish woodwork
shown on the drawings which is not specified elsewhere.
A. The Quality Standards of the American Woodwork Industry shall apply and by
reference are made a part of this specification.
B. Competence - The Architects approval of the woodwork manufacturer must be
received prior to any arrangement with him to furnish the woodwork. The
woodwork. manufacturer must have completed comparable work successfully and
must have established a record of doing satisfactory work on schedule.
C. Job Assembled Work - The Contractor when installing items not shop assembled
shall distribute to best overall advantage the defects allowed in the quality grade
specified.
D. Delivery and STORAGE - The budding and /or storage area shall be sufficiently dry
before items of woodwork are delivered to prevent the woodwork from being
damaged by excessive changes in moisture content.
E. All exposed edges of 3/4" plywood shall be "T" splined or otherwise edge banded
in a manner approved by the Architect.
A. Shop Drawings -Shall be furnished as described under Supplementary Conditions
for all woodwork and shall be drawn in related and /or dimensional position with
sections shown either full size or three inch scale. Fabrication shall not be started
until approval of shop drawings is received.
B. Samples -Send a sample of hinges and catches to the Architect for approval prior
to installation.
A. The woodwork manufacturer is responsible for details and dimensions not
controlled by job conditions, and shall show on his shop drawings all required field
measurements beyond his control. The General Contractor and the woodwork
manufacturer shall cooperate to establish and maintain these field dimensions.
06400 -1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Natural Birch: Solid stock custom grade shall be used for all trim and millwork to
receive transparent finish.
B. Materials for woodwork for painted finish:
1. Yellow Pine - Custom grade (B and better).
2. Fir - solid stock custom grade. Plywood - custom grade, INT- DGPA -AB-
exposed two sides INT - DFPA- AD- egosed one side.
C. Laminated Plastic - 1/16" thick Wilson Art, Formica or Nevamar.
2.02 WOODWORK FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A. Scope - The following items shall be made for transparent finish - Faces exposed
sides, trim and all other portions of Architectural Woodwork exposed to view when
the doors are closed and all other exposed finish woodwork not otherwise specified
or noted.
B. Workmanship - Shall conform to the Premium Grade Requirements of the AWI
Quality Standards unless more exacting requirements are specified herein.
2.03 WOODWORK FOR PAINTED FINISH
A. Scope -The following items shall be made for painted finish - All portions of casework
fully concealed when opaque case doors are closed, storage and closet shelving.
B. Workmanship - Shall conform to the Custom Grade Requirements of the AWI Quality
Standards. All egosed edges of plywood shall be "T" splined with hardwood or edge
banded per Architectural approval.
2.04 SHELVING
A. Shelving shown to be adjustable shall be provided with shelf standards and brackets
equal to those manufactured by the Knape and Vogt Manufacturing Company, Stanley
Hardware Company or approved equal with recessed mounting. Provide transparent
finish unless otherwise noted.
2.05 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK COUNTERS
A. Quality Grade and Species - Shall conform to the quality grade and species called
for under "WOODWORK FOR PAINTED FINISH". Quality grade is as designated
in AWI Quality Standards, Section 400.
B. Hardware - The woodwork manufacturer shall furnish and install the items of
hardware required by the drawings.
C. Laminated Counter Tops - Shall have a 40 pound density particle board cores with
waterproof glue not less than 3/4" thick. Top edges of plastic laminate splash shall
be left long enough to scribe to finish wall.
END OF SECTION
06400 - 2
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work included: Provide building insulation where shown on the Drawings, as
specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation.
B. Related work:
1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily
limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and SECTIONS
in Division 1 of these Specifications.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
SECTION 07210
BUILDING INSULATION
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and
experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the
specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the
work of this Section.
B. Upon completion of this portion of the Work, complete and post a certificate of
insulation compliance in accordance with pertinent requirements of govemmental
agencies having jurisdictions.
1.3 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01640.
PART2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Provide the following building insulation where shown on the Drawings or otherwise
needed to achieve the degree of insulation required under pertinent regulations of
govemmental agencies having jurisdiction. Manufacturers shall be equal to Owens -
Coming or CertainTeed
1. Type A: 2" to 2 -1/2" thick fsk- faced, fungi- resistant, glass fiber rigid board
insulation with an insulation -only value of R -7.
2. Type B: 6" thick foil -faced glass fiber batts with an insulation -only value of R-
19 (above ceilings).
3. Type C: 3 -1/2" thick unfaced glass fiber sound isolating batts. (Typ.Toilets,
Offices, etc. and as indicated on drawings).
2.2 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and
proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the
Architect.
07210 -1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be
performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the
Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
B. Remove, or protect against, projections in construction framing which may damage
or prevent proper insulation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design,
requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and the manufacturer's
recommended installation procedures as approved by the Architect, anchoring all
components firmly into position.
END OF SECTION
07210 - 2
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work included: Throughout the Work, seal and caulk joints where shown on the
Drawings and elsewhere as required to provided a positive barrier against passage
of moisture and passage of air.
B. Related work:
1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily
limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in
Division 1 of these Specifications.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
SECTION 07920
SEALANTS AND CAULKING
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and
experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the
specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the
work of this Section.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340.
B. Product data: Within 45 calendar days after the Contractor has received the
Owner's Notice to Proceed, submit:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section;
2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance
with the specified requirements;
3. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when
approved by the Architect, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting
actual installation procedures used on the Work.
C. Samples: Upon request of the Architect, submit Samples of each sealant, each
backing material, each primer, and each bond breaker proposed to be used.
1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01640.
B. Do not retain at the job site material which has exceeded the shelf life
recommended by its manufacturer.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 SEALANTS
A. Provide the following materials manufactured by Products Research & Chemical
Corporation, Sonneborn or equals approved in advance by the Architect, where
indicated and where otherwise required for a complete and proper installation.
07920 -1
B.
C.
2.2 PRIMER
2.4 MASKING TAPE
MATERIAL:
1. PRC Rubber Caulk 6000
2. PRC Rubber Caulk 7000
2.3 BACKUP MATERIALS
07920 - 2
LOCATION OF USE:
Throughout the Work, except where
other seal- ant is specified, where
anticipated joint movement will be
25% or less;
Throughout the Work, except where
other sealant is specified, where
anticipated joint movement will be
50% or less;
3. PRC Rubber Caulk 270 Horizontal joints exposed to
pedestrian and vehicular traffic, and
all joints subject to immersion;
4. PRC Rubber Caulk 210 Vertical and hortzontal joints subject
to extreme movement;
5. PR -851 Duct Seal Pipes and conduits penetrating
underground walls;
6. PR -855 Fire Stop Seal Pipes and conduits penetrating fire
separations;
7. Polyethylene backer rod Where required to prevent
3 -point adhesion.
For other services, provide products especially formulated for the proposed use and
approved in advance by the Architect.
Colors:
1. Colors for each sealant installation will be selected by the Architect from
standard colors normally available from the specified manufacturer.
2. Should such standard color not be available from the approved
manufacturer except at additional charge, provide such colors at no
additional cost to the Owner.
3. In concealed installations, and in partially or fully exposed installations
where so approved by the Architect, use standard gray or black sealant
A. Use only those primers which have been tested for durability on the surfaces to be
sealed and are specifically recommended for this installation by the manufacturer or
the sealant used.
A. Use only those backup materials which are specifically recommended for this
installation by the manufacturer of the sealant used, which are non - absorbent, and
which are non - staining.
A. For masking around joints, provide an appropriate masking tape which will
effectively prevent application of sealant on surfaces not scheduled to receive it, and
which is removable without damage to substrate.
2.5 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and
proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the
Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be
performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the
Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Concrete and ceramic tile surfaces:
1. Install only on surfaces which are dry, sound, and well brushed, wiping
free from dust.
2. At open joints, remove dust by mechanically blowh compressed air if
so required.
3. To remove oil and grease, use sandblasting or wire brushing.
4. Where surfaces have been treated, remove the surface treatment
by sandblasting or wire brushing.
5. Remove laitance and mortar from joint cavities.
B. Steel surfaces:
1. Steel surfaces in contact with sealant:
a. Sandblast as required to achieve acceptable surface for bond.
b. If sandblasting is not practical, or would damage adjacent finish,
scrape the metal or wire brush to remove mill scale and rust.
c. Use solvent to remove at and grease, wiping the surfaces with
clean white rags only.
2. Remove protective coatings on steel by sandblasting or by using a solvent
which leaves no residue.
C. Aluminum surfaces:
1. Aluminum surfaces in contact with sealant: temporary protective coatings,
dirt, oil, and grease. -
b. When masking tape is used for protective cover, remove the tape
just prior to applying the sealant.
2. Use only such solvents to remove protective coatings as
recommended for that purpose by the manufacturer of the aluminum
work, and which are non- staining.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF BACKUP MATERIAL
A. When using backup of tube or rod stock, avoid lengthwise stretching of the material.
Do not twist or braid hose or rod backup stock.
B. Installation tool:
1. For installation of backup material, provide a blunt- surfaced tool of wood
or plastic, having shoulders designed to ride on the adjacent finished
surface and a protrusion of the required dimensions to assure uniform
depth of backup material below the sealant.
2. Do not, under any circumstance, use a screwdriver or similar tool for this
purpose.
07920 - 3
3.4 PRIMING
3. Using the approved tool, smoothly and uniformly place the backup material
to the depth indicated on the Drawings or otherwise required, compressing
the backup material 25% to 50% and securing a positive fit.
A. Use only the primer approved by the Architect for the particular installation, applying
in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations as approved by the
Architect
3.5 BOND - BREAKER INSTALLATION
A. Provide an approved bond - breaker where recommended by the manufacturer of
the sealant, and where directed by the Architect, adhering strictly to the
manufacturers' installation recommendations:
3.6 INSTALLATION OF SEALANTS
A. Prior to start of installation in each joint, verify the joint type according to details on
the Drawings, or as otherwise directed by the Architect, and verify that the required
proportion of width of joint to depth of joint has been secured.
B. Equipment
1. Apply sealant under pressure with power- actuated hand gun or manually -
operated hand gun, or by other appropriate means.
2. Use guns with nozzle of proper size, and providing sufficient pressure to
completely fill the joints as designed.
C. Thoroughly and completely mask joints where the appearance of primer or sealant
on adjacent surfaces would be objectionable.
D. Install the sealant in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations,
thoroughly filling joints to the recommended depth.
E. Tool joints to the profile shown on the Drawings, or as otherwise required if such
profiles are not shown on the Drawings.
F. Cleaning up:
1. Remove masking tape immediately after joints have been tooled.
2. Clean adjacent surfaces free from sealant as the installation progresses,
using solvent or cleaning agent recommended by the manufacturer of the
sealant used.
3. Upon completion of the work of this Section, promptly remove from the job
site all debris, empty containers, and surplus material derived from this
portion of the Work.
END OF SECTION
07920 - 4
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
1.02 SUBMITTAL
1.03
1.04
A. Fumish and install hollow metalwork as and where shown on the drawings and as
specified, herein including the following:
1. Work specified herein:
a) Hollow metal door frames.
b) Hollow metal doors.
B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:
1. Glass and glazing.
2. Field painting of hollow metal work.
3. Hardware is specified under Section 08700.
A. Submit shop drawings and schedules in accordance with the Supplementary
Conditions and obtain the Architect's approval prior to beginning fabrication. Shop
drawings shall show gauges of metal, anchors, dimensions, weights and sizes of
members, details of construction and installation with particular regard to connection
and jointing to other materials, and locations of units in the building.
MEASUREMENTS
A.
MANUFACTURERS
PART2- PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
SECTION 08100
METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
Obtain necessary measurements of adjoining work at the building and layout and
construct to fit the conditions.
A. Work shall be first quality hollow metal construction by Aetna Steel products, Dean
Steel Company, Tex -Steel Corporation, Overly Manufacturing Company, Steelcraft
Manufacturing Company or approved equal.
A. Steel for exposed parts of hollow metal work shall be first quality, cold rolled,
pickled and patent leveled, bonder¢ed, open hearth, furniture steel. Gauges of
steel shall be such that the work will substantially constructed and that surfaces will
be smooth and level under normal use, but in no case shall the metal be lighter
than the gauge specified herein.
B. Expansion bolts shall be cinch -type galvanized.
C. Shop Finishes:
1. Surfaces not accessible after fabrication - Dupont, Sherwin- Williams of
PPG synthetic vehicle chromate rust - inhibitive primer or approved equal.
2. Exposed surfaces baked -on mineral filler plus baked -on rust-inhibitive
primer. -
3. Doors and frames exposed to weather shall be fabricated from galvanized
08100 -1
2.02 GENERAL WORKMANSHIP
A. Hollow metal work shall be strong and rigid, neat in appearance and free from
defects.
B. Exposed surfaces shall be free from warp, wave and buckle with all corners square.
Members shall be set in proper alignment with all surfaces straight and in true
plane. Mitered joints shall be well formed. Exposed welds shall be ground smooth
and flush on exposed surfaces Face of metal in contact shall have hairline joints.
C. Fastenings shall be concealed where practicable. Construction joints shall be
continuously welded their full length and ground flush on exposed surfaces. Doors
shall have proper bevel to operate without binding.
2.03 HOLLOW METAL DOORS
sheet, cut edges shall be gray galvanized after fabrication.
A. Full flush design, 3' x 7' exterior hollow metal doors shall be constructed of two outer
sheets of not less that No. 16 gauge, formed and rigidly connected and reinforced
inside with continuous interlocking members of not less than No. 22 gauge, spaced not
more than 6 inches on center. Doors shall be laterally stiffened at top and bottom by
continuous channels securely welded to both face sheets. Doors shall be double bored
to receive lockset/latchset and thumblatch /deadbolt.
2.04 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
A. Hollow metal frames shall be of continuous type, pressed steel, of the design and
section shown. Unless otherwise indicated or required, frames shall be No. 16
gauge for openings 3 feet 8 inches in width or less than No. 14 gauge for wider
openings and all exterior openings. Labeled frames shall be No. 14 gauge.
Temporary channel or angle spreaders shall be tackwelded to bottom of frames to
prevent distortion during shipment and storage and shall hold the frames in proper
position until adjacent construction has been completed. Bottoms of frames shall
have 12 gauge weld -on floor clips punched for two 1/4" expansion bolts or
shopping. Return bends of frame shall be flanged as detailed. Provision shall be
made for the installation of door silencers furnished under "FINISH HARDWARE".
B. Anchors shall be "Z" type or as required by the partition and structural conditions.
Frames 7-0" high shall have 3 anchors per jamb, frames in excess of 7' -0" high
shall have one additional anchor for each 2'-6" or fraction thereof excess height.
Provide head and still anchorage for frames as indicated.
2.05 HARDWARE REINFORCEMENT
A. Hardware reinforcement and sinkages shall be provided for doors and frames in
accordance with templates fumished by the approved hardware manufacturer.
Doors and Frames shall be mortised and reinforced with not less than 1/8" steel and
shall be drilled and tapped to received the specified mortised hardware.
Reinforcement for surface applied hardware such as closers, brackets, stops,
protective plates and similar items shall provide a tapping thickness of not less than
10. Closer reinforcement shall be provided on both sides of all doors and frames
including those not scheduled to receive surface applied closers. Metal covers
formed of not less than No. 26 gauge steel shall be provided for all mortises to
prevent mortar or plaster from filling openings and tapped holes. Plates for butt
reinforcement shall be at least eight inches longer than the butt and shall be not
less than 3/16" thickness for tapping.
08100 - 2
2.06 SHOP PAINTING
A. Bonderize after metal surfaces have been thoroughly cleaned of loose scale and
other objectionable material with a volatile cleaner.
B. Inaccessible surfaces such as insides of doors, panels and closed frames shall be
given a coat of rust inhibitive primer before being assembled.
C. Eq osed surfaces of metal shall receive a mineral filler baked -on and sanded
between coats followed by a coat of primer baked on.
D. Galvanized sheet metal frames shall have their cut edges gray galvanized after
fabrication.
E. Finish painting is specified in Section 09900.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Placing frames:
1. Where practicable, place frames prior to construction of enclosing walls
and ceiling.
2. Set frames accurately into position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely
until permanent anchors are set.
3. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces and
spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.
4. At in -place construction, set frames and secure to adjacent construction
with machine screws and suitable anchorage devices. Provide "Z" fillers at
each screw location.
3.02 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Final adjustments:
1. Check and readjust operating finish hardware items in hollow metal work
just prior to final inspection.
2. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition.
3. Remove defective work and replace with work complying with the specified
requirements.
B. Immediately after erection, sand smooth all rusted and damaged areas of prime
coat, and apply touchup of compatible air -drying primer.
END OF SECTION
06100 - 3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Fumish all materials, equipment, and transportation necessary to provided all wood
doors indicated on the drawings and/or specified herein. The installation of doors
is specified in Section 06200.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality Standards: The Quality Standards of the Architectural Woodwork Institute
shall apply and by reference are made a part of this specification.
B. Qualifications: The door manufacturer must have completed comparable work
successfully and must have established a record of doing satisfactory work on
schedule.
C. Inspection: Representatives from the Architect shall be permitted facilities for
inspecting the work at the shop at any time. Defective workmanship and /or
materials shall be rejected and replaced. Inspection at the shop will not relieve the
Contractor of his responsibilities to complete the work in accordance with this
specification.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
1.04 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
PART 2- PRODUCT
SECTION 08200
WOOD AND PLASTIC DOORS
A. Shop Drawings: Shall be furnished as described under SUPPLEMENTARY
CONDITIONS for all wood doors and shall be drawn in related and /or dimensional
position with sections shown either full size or three inch scale. Fabrication shall not
be started until approval or shop drawings is received.
A. The building and/or storage area shall be sufficiently dry before doors are delivered
to prevent the woodwork from being damaged by excessive changes in moisture
content. Store doors in a manner recommended by the manufacturer.
A. Workmanship: Doors furnished under this specification shall meet AWI 'Illustrated
Standards" - Requirements for Premium Grade.
2.01 MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION
A. Solid core doors shall meet the following minimum requirements. Doors shall be
prefinished, stained color to be selected by owner and equal to Mohawk "A Premdor
Company" manufacturer. Doors shall be prebored and mortised to fit prefinished
08200 -1
Timely frames as detailed. See hardware schedule for selection per door.
1. Doors shall be Weldwood Stave Lumber Core door as manufactured by U.S.
Plywood, or approved equal.
2. Cores shall be edge glued, made of low density wood strips no wider than 2"
of varying lengths with the grain vertical, joints staggered.
3. Stile edge bands shall be made by MSLC 1 -3/8" wide hardwood to match face
veneer, and top and bottom rails shall be made of single pieces of 2 -1/2" wide
softwood. Edge bands shall be glued into the core and into each other. Stile
and rail edge bands shall be single, continuous pieces
4. Face veneers shall be standard 3-ply veneers. Veneers shall be rotary or plain
sliced depending on owner selection of "in -stock facings and prefinishes. The
whole assembly shall be bond under heat and pressure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION .
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Installation is specified under Section 06200.
3.02 ADJUST & CLEAN
A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors which do not swing or operate freely as directed
by the Architect.
B. Finished Doors: Replace doors damaged during installation, or as directed by the
Architect.
C. Protection of Completed Work: Protect doors from damage or deterioration until
acceptance of the work.
END OF SECTION
08200 - 2
SECTION 08410
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PART 1 GENERAL -
1.1 DESCRIPTION
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Work included: Provide aluminum entrances and storefronts, and fixed windows
where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete
and proper installation.
B. Related work:
1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily
limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in
Division 1 of these Specifications.
2. Section 08710: Furnishing finish hardware.
3. Section 08800: Glazing.
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and
experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the
specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the
work of this Section.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340.
B. Product data: Within 35 calendar days after the Contractor has received the
Owner's Notice to Proceed, submit:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section;
2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance
with the specified requirements;
3. Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage,
and interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent trades;
4. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when approved
by the Architect, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual
installation procedures used on the Work.
C. Samples: Accompanying the Shop Drawings, submit:
1. Samples of each exposed member.
2. Samples of finish, showing complete range of color from
darkest to lightest proposed for use on this Work.
3. Samples, when approved by the Architect, will be used to verify that finish
actually furnished is within the approved range.
1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01640.
08410 -1 '
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Upon completion of this portion of the Work, and as a condition of its acceptance,
deliver to the Architect two copies of a written Warrancy agreeing to replace work
of this section which fails due to defective materials or workmanship within two years
after date of substantial completion as that date is determined in accordance with
the General Conditions.
B. Failure due to defective materials or workmanship is deemed in include, but not to
be limited to:
1. Failures in operation, operating component or components;
2. Leakage or air infiltration in excess of the specified standard;
3. Deterioration of finish to an extent visible to the unaided eye;
4. Defects which contribute to unsightly appearance, potential safety hazard,
or potential untimely fail of work of this Section or the work as a whole.
1.6 MEASUREMENTS
A. Obtain necessary measurements of adjoining work at the building and layout and
construct to fit the conditions.
1.7 MANUFACTURERS
A. Work shall be first quality aluminum storefront construction by Vistawall Architectural
Products, Terrell, Texas.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Aluminum frames and glazing devices shall be Vistawall Series 3000, Flush Glazing
System, 2 "x41/2 ".
B. Finish: All exposed aluminum surfaces to include hardware shall be given an
anodic coating of not less than .0007" thick hardcoat (Color to match Adjacent
Public Works Building). All exposed surfaces shall be free of scratches, die marks,
and blemishes.
2.2 GENERAL WORKMANSHIP
A. Aluminum storefront work shall be strong and rigid, neat in appearance and free
from defects.
B. Frames, fixed windows, and side lights shall be accurately joined at corners with
unexposed screws in extruded splines, which are an integral part of all horizontal
members. All glazing shall be flush, including the horizontal mullions and sills.
Glass shall be held in place by a glazing vinyl bead on both sides of the glass for
puttyless glazing. No exposed screws are permitted.
C. All openings shall be prepared plumb and square by general contractor and shall
be of sufficient size to provide 1/4" clearance at jambs and heads (and sills as
required) of frames. installation shall be performed by experienced technicians,
according to the manufacturer's recommended procedures. All units shall be
securely anchored and ready for operation.
D. Within five days of building's acceptance, all aluminum storefronts are to be cleaned
with plain water containing mild detergent, white gasoline, kerosene, or distillate.
No abrasive agent shall be used.
END OF SECTION
08410 - 2
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
SECTION 08710
FINISH HARDWARE
A. Work included: Provide finish hardware throughout the Work as specified herein
and as needed for a complete and proper installation.
B. Related work:
1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily
limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary conditions, Sections in
Division 1 of these Specifications.
2. Installation of finish hardware is described in other Sections of these
Specification.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide the services of an AHC or DAHC member of the American Society of
Architectural Hardware Consultants to:
1. Be available for consultation with the Architect at no additional cost to the
Owner during progress of construction;
2. Be present at completion of construction, and:
a. inspect installation of all finish hardware items;
b. Make minor adjustments as required; and
c. Report to the Architect on completeness of the installation.
B. The hardware consultant may be an employee of the supplier.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340.
B. product data: Within 45 calendar days after the Contractor has received the
Owner's Notice to Proceed, submit
1. A "Door Schedule" listing all doors in the Work, and all other locations
requiring finish hardware (a copy of the Door Schedule included in the
Drawings may be used for this purpose), and assigning a "Hardware
Group" to each such door and other location.
2. A "Finish Hardware Schedule" listing each of the proposed "Hardware
Groups," and defining in detail the proposed contents of each Hardware
Group.
a. Show the quantity of each type of item proposed to be supplied
• within each Hardware Group;
b. Show the dimensions, when pertinent, and the manufacturer's
catalog number,
c. Show the finish of each item;
d. Show the manufacturer's name by a suitable legend.
C. Samples:
1. Within 15 calendar days after being seen requested by the Architect, deliver
to the Architect Samples of each finish hardware item.
2. All Samples will be returned to the Contractor, provided those Sample
which are approved by the Architect are positively identified and are installed
in the Work at locations agreed to by the Architect.
D. In a timely manner to assure orderly progress of the Work, deliver templates or
physical samples of the approved finish hardware items to pertinent manufacturers
08710 -1
of interfacing items such as doors and frames.
1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01640.
B. Individually package each unit of finish hardware, complete with proper
fastenings and appurtenances, clearly marked on the outside to indicate
contents and specific locations in the Work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Fasteners:
1. Furnish necessary screws, bolts, and other fasteners of suitable size and
type to anchor the hardware in position for long life under hard use.
2. Where necessary, furnish fasteners with expansion shields, toggle bolts, hex
bolts, and other anchors approved by the Architect, according to the
material to which the hardware is to be applied and according to the
recommendations of the hardware manufacturer.
B. Where butts are required to swing 180 degrees, furnish butts of sufficient throw to
clear the trim.
2.2 KEYING
A. Factory key, masterkey, and grand - masterkey locks and cylinders as directed by
the Architect.
B. Furnish three keys for each lock, twelve masterkeys for each set, and three grand -
masterkeys.
C. Construction keying:
1. Fumish a construction masterkey system with 15 keys for locks and
cylinders.
2. Use only the construction keys during construction.
3. At the time of final acceptance of the Work, void the construction key
system and in the presence of the Architect, demonstrate that the
specified keying system is operating properly.
D. Identification and delivery:
1. Factory stamp permanent keys, "DO NOT DUPLICATE."
2. Identify permanent keys with tags, and send direct to the Owner by
registered mail.
2.3 TOOLS AND MANUALS
A. With the delivery of permanent keys, deliver to the Owner one complete set of
adjustment tools and one set of maintenance manuals for locksets, latchsets,
closers, and panic devices.
2.4 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS
A. Single source for items:
1. Except as specifically otherwise approved by the Architect, furnish for
each item (such as "door butt type 1") only the product of a single
manufacturer (such as "Hager BB- 800 ").
2. To the maximum extent practicable, furnish similar items (such as
"Hager").
08710 - 2
B. For each of the required items of finish hardware, provide from the following list
of acceptable products, or equals approved in advance by the Architect.
1. • Door butts:
a. Hager,
b. Lawrence;
c. McKinney.
2. Locksets: (heavy duty - grade 1) Lever, interchangeable core, Quantum
design with dust boxes for "Timely" frames.
a. Falcon
b. Best
3. Latchsets: (medium duty - grade 2) Lever, Quantum design, turn button
privacy with dust boxes for "Timely frames.
a. Falcon
b. Best
4. Door closer: (medium duty)
a. Dorma;
b. Norton:
C. Yale.
5. Door stops:
a. Quality;
b. Builders Brass Works.
6. Thresholds, drips, sweeps, etc, equal to National Guard Products.
2.5 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but require for a complete and
proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the
Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DELIVERIES
A. Stockpile items sufficiently in advance to assure their availability, and make
necessary deliveries to the job site in a timely manner to assure orderly progress
of the total Work.
3.2 COORDINATION
08710 - 3
A. Coordinate as necessary with other trades to assure proper and adequate
provision in the work of those trades for interface with the work of this Section.
B. Upon completion of the Work, and as a condition of its acceptance, provide the
inspection, adjustment, and report described In Article 1.2 above.
END OF SECTION
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary to provide all glass and
glazing in accordance with the drawings and as specified herein.
1. The required applications of glass and glazing include (but are not
necessarily limited to) the following:
a. Glazing exterior fixed windows
b. Glazing exterior doors, sidelights, transoms, and clerestories.
c. Glazing interior partitions, view panels and miscellaneous interior
glazing.
B. Work Specified Elsewhere
1. Caulking and Sealant;
2. Aluminum Storefronts
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer of Basic Glazing Materials. One of the following:
Libbey- Owens -Ford Co.
PPG Industries, Inc.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Data, Glass: For information only, submit two (2) copies of
manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of glazing
sealant and compound, gasket and associated miscellaneous material required.
1.04 JOB CONDITIONS
A. The Glazier must examine the framing and glazing channel surfaces, backing,
removable stop design, and the conditions under which the glazing is to be
performed, and notify the Contractor in writing of any conditions detrimental to the
proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the glazing until
satisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Glazier.
B. Weather Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of liquid sealants under
adverse weather conditions, or when temperatures are below or above
manufacturer's recommended limitations for installation.
PART2- PRODUCT
SECTION 08800
GLAZING
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Glazing Materials:
1. 1/4" Solar gray tinted, light gray 37% transmittanced 0.55 shading
coefficient, as manufactured by PPG. (insulated glass)
B. Setting blocks, gaskets, and miscellaneous items - shall be required by store front
manufacturer as approved by Architect on store front shop drawings.
08800 -1
PART 3 - INSTALLATION
3.01 STANDARDS AND PERFORMANCE
A. Watertight and airtight installation of each piece of glass is required, except as
otherwise shown. Each installation must withstand normal temperature changes,
wind loading, impact loading (for operating sash and doors) without failure of any
kind including loss or breakage of glass, failure of sealants or gaskets to remain
watertight and airtight, deterioration of glazing materials and other defects in the
work.
B. Protect glass from edge damage at all times during handling, installation and operation
of the building.
C. Comply with combined recommendations of glass manufacturer and manufacturer of
sealants and other materials used in glazing, except where more stringent
requirements are shown or specified, and except where manufacturer's technical rep-
resentatives direct otherwise.
D. Comply with "Glazing Manual" by Flat Glass Marketing Association except as shown
and specified otherwise, and except as specifically recommended otherwise by the
manufacturers of the glass and glazing materials.
E. Inspect each piece of glass immediately before installation, and eliminate any which
have observable edge damage or face imperfections.
F. Unify appearance of each series of lights by setting each piece to match others as
nearly as possible. Inspect each piece and set with pattern, draw and bow oriented in
the same direction as other pieces.
G. Install polysulfide sealants as recommended by Thiokol Chemical Corp., except as
otherwise recommended by the sealant manufacturer.
3.02 PREPARATION FOR GLAZING
A. Clean the glazing channel, or other framing members to receive glass, immediately
before glazing. Remove coatings which are not firmly bonded to the substrate.
Remove lacquer from metal surfaces wherever elastomeric sealants are used.
B. Apply primer or sealer to joint surfaces wherever recommended by sealant
manufacturer.
3.03 CURE, PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately upon installation, by attachment
of crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers of any
type to surfaces of glass.
B. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or
damaged in other ways during the construction period, including natural causes,
accidents and vandalism.
C. The General Contractor shall maintain glass in a reasonably clean condition during
construction, so that it will not be damaged by corrosive action and will not
contribute (by wash -off) to the deterioration of glazing materials and other work.
D. The General contractor shall wash and polish glass on both faces not more than 4
days prior to Owner's acceptance of the work in each area. Comply with glass
manufacturer's recommendations.
END OF SECTION
08800 - 2
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. All areas not receiving carpet or otherwise noted will receive vinyl composition tile
flooring.
B. The Flooring Contractor shall inspect the surfaces to receive resilient flooring and
insure that they are in acceptable condition prior to flooring installation.
PART2- PRODUCT
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Floor Tile - shall be vinyl composition, 12 x 12 inches square, through chip, factory
waxed, made in compliance with FS SS -T -312 Type LV. Tile thickness shall be 1/8
gage.
B. Adhesive - as recommended by tile manufacturer.
2.02 TILE MANUFACTURERS
A. Armstrong
B. GAF
C. Azrock
D. Mannington
E. Flintkote
PART 3 - INSTALLATION
3.01 APPLICATION
SECTION 09659
RESILIENT FLOORING
A. Remove grease, dirt, and other foreign substances of subfloors; treat by priming or
by other means, cement surfaces showing depressions or other conditions that will
prevent bonding.
B. Inspect floors for holes, cracks, and smoothness. Inspect edging strips for proper
height and installation. Do not proceed with laying until subfloors are smooth, holes
and cracks are filled and strips are a proper height and location.
C. Stack tile in spaces to receive tile and maintain a minimum temperature of 70
degrees Farinheit in spaces 24 hours prior to and during tile installation.
D. Do not lay tile until work of other trades is completed.
E. Lay tile in accordance with recommendations of tile manufacturer. Lay tile with tight
09659 -1
joints and in true alignment Heat tile on underside if necessary to obtain bond. Lay
tile pattems selected with grain reversed in altemate tile.
F. Cut tile to fit accurately at joining with other material. Seal joints around pipes and
other vertical surfaces with adhesive. •
G. Lay tile symmetrically about center lines of rooms or spaces so that cut tile against
walls is appropmately the same width. All make up and off -set work should be beneath
doors in hallways.
H. Where resilient flooring abuts an area to receive another finish, the raw edge of the
resilient flooring shall be finished with a vinyl transition strip.
I. Do not permit construction traffic on finished floors or stairs unless they are protected.
Upon completion, leave floors clean, smooth and free of buckles, cracks, scuffs, scars
and projecting edges.
J. Upon completion of this work, remove all rubbish and equipment required or caused
by this operation.
K. Tile shall be waxed after cleaning as recommended by the manufacturer. Consult with
owner prior to application of wax Should owner decide to use their own forces to apply
wax, contractor shall provide manufacturer recommended materials and instructions.
END OF SECTION
09659 - 2
1. GENERAL
1.1 Work Included:
SECTION 09697 •
CARPETING GLUE DOWN
A. Prepare surfaces to receive carpeting.
B. Apply glue down carpeting on floor surfaces where indicated, complete
with required accessories.
1.2 Related Work
A. Section 03345: Finish troweling of concrete floor slabs.
1.3 Reference Standards:
A. FS: Federal Specifications, Specification Sales, (3FRDS), Building 197,
Washington Navy Yard, General Services Administration, Washington,
D.C. 20407, U.S.A.
1. DDD- C -95A- Carpet and Rugs, Wool, Nylon, Acrylic, Modacrylic,
Polyester, Polypropylene.
1.4 Submittals
A. Submit samples and shop drawings in accordance with Section 01340
B. Samples.
1. Submit 1 sample of each type of carpet to be used, sufficiently
large to clearly indicate construction. In addition, submit 1
duplicate sample of each color selected.
C. Shop Drawings •
1. Clearly indicate the location of all seams, method of jointing
seams, direction of carpet, type of adhesive to be used, method
integrating edge strips with carpet and installation procedures.
1.5 Job Environment
A. Do not begin carpet installation until painting and finishing work is
complete and ceilings and overhead work, tested, and approved and
completed.
B. Maintain room temperature at minimum 60 degrees F for at least 24 hours
before installation and relative humidity at approximately that at which the
area is to be maintained.
C. Provide sufficient lighting.
1.6 Testing
A. All flooring materials, base and mastics shall be submitted to the Architect
one week prior to installation. These samples will be tested by an
independent testing lab for the presence of asbestos. The Contractor
shall NOT install any materials in the facility that contain asbestors.
09697 -1
2. PRODUCTS
2.1 Manufacturers acceptable contingent upon product's compliance with the
specifications:
A. Bigelow Sanford Inc., P. O. Box 3039, Greenvile, South Carolina 29602,
U.S.A.
B. Mohawk Commercial Carpet, 1755 The Exchange, Atlanta, Georgia
30339, U.SA.
2.2 Materials
A. Carpet: University by Bigelow: FS DD -C -95A and in accordance with the
following:
1. Weave Velvet Woven thru back
2. Pitch 212
3. Rows Per Inch 8.5
4. Surface yarn Zeftron Nylong with Static Control
5. Yarn Weight 26.0 oz. /sq.yd.
6. Total Weight 60.0 oz. /sq.rd.
7. Color As selected by the Architect
8. Non - Zippering
B. Carpet Top Notch by Mohawk, FS DD -C -95A and in accordance with the
following:
1. Weave Woven interlock P.O.B.
2. Pitch 165
3. Rows Per Inch • 8.00
4. Surface Yarn Antron III CEN with Static Control
5. Yam Weight 26.0 oz. /sq.yd.
6. Total Weight 63.35 oz. /sq.yd.
7. Color As selected by the Architect
8. Adhesive Type recommended by carpet manufacturer to
suit application and expected service. Adhesive
shall NOT contain asbestos in any quantity.
9. Non - Zippering
3. EXECUTION
3.1 Preparatrion of Surfaces
A. Clean floors of dust, dirt, solvetns, oil, crease, paint, plaster and other
substances detrimental to proper performance of adhesive and carpet.
Allow floows to dry thoroughly.
B. Ensure floors ARE LEVEL, with maximum surface variation of 114 inch in
10 feet, noncumulative.
C. Ensure concrete floors are free from scaling and irregulariites and exhibt
neutrality relative to acidity and alkalinity.
D. Use an approved cementitous filler to patch cracks, small holes and for
leveling.
09697 - 2
3.2 Installation
A. Lay out rolls of carpet full for Architect/Engineer's approval.
B. Check matching of carpet before cuttin and ensure there is no visible
variation between dye lots.
C. Cut carpet, where quried, in manner to allow proper seam and pattern
match. Ensure cuts are stright and true and unfrayed.
D. Where possible and practical, locate seams in areas of least amount of
traffic.
E. Join seams in recommended amnner so as not to detract from the
appearance of the carpet installtion and decrase its life expectancy.
Ensure seams are straight, not overlapped of peaked and are free of
gaps.
F. Vacuum clean substrate. Spread adhesive in quanity recommended by
manufacturer after primer applicaton to ensure poepr adhesion over full
area of installation. Apply one enough adhesive to permit proper adhesion
to carpet before initial set.
G. Lay carpet on floors with the run of the pile in same direction by
anticipated traffic. Lay carpet on stairs with run of the pile in opposite
direction of anticipated traffic to avoid peaking of backing at nosing.
H. Do not change run of pile in any one room or from one room to net where
continuous through a wall opening.
I. Cut and fit carpet neatly around projections through floor and to walls and
other vertical surfaces.
J. Fit carpet snugly to walls or other vertical surfaces where no base is
scheduled, leaving no gaps.
K. Do not place heavy objects such as furniture on carpeted surfaces for
minimum of 24 hours or until adhesive is set.
L. Entire carpet installation is to be laid tight and flat to subfloor, well
fastened at edges and present a uniform, pleasing appearance. Ensure
monolithic color, pattern and texture match wihtin any one area.
M. Unless detailed otherwise, install vinyl edging strips where carpet
terminates at other floor coverings. Use full length pieced only. Butt
tightly to vertical surfaces. Where splicing cannot be avoided, butt ends
tight and flush.
N. Adhere carpet tightly to treads and riser of stairs.
3.3 Clean Up
A. Upon completion of installation, remove all waste and excess materials,
all tools and equipment and vacuum clean the entire floor surface
carefully and thoroughly with vacuum cleaner.
B. Remove all soil wuth proper remover.
C. Remove all loose pieces of face yarn with sharp scissors
D. Leave all usable pieces of trimmer carpet not necessary to complete work
on the jobsite. Such additional carpet shall be for the owner's use. Place
in an orderly manner in an area designated by the Architect/Engineer.
END OF SECTION
09697,- 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work included: paint and finish the exterior and interior exposed surfaces listed on
the Painting Schedule in Part 3 of this Section, as specified herein, and as needed
for a complete and proper installation.
B. Related work:
1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily
limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in
Division 1 of these Specifications.
2. Priming or priming and finishing of certain surfaces may be specified to be
factory- performed or installer performed under pertinent other Sections.
C. Work not included:
1. Unless otherwise indicated, painting is not required on
surfaces in concealed areas and inaccessible areas such as furred spaces,
foundation spaces, utility tunnels, pipe spaces, and duct shafts.
2. Metal surfaces of anodized aluminum, stainless steel, chromium plate, copper,
bronze, and similar finished materials will not require painting under this
Section except as may be so specified.
3. Do not paint moving parts of operating units; mechanical or electrical parts
such as valve operators; linkages; sensing devices; and motor shafts, unless
otherwise indicated.
4. Do not paint over required labels or equipment identification, performance
rating, name, or nomenclature plates.
5. Do not paint concrete which has been sandblasted.
D. Definitions:
1. "Paint," as used herein, means coating systems materials including
primers, emulsions, epoxy, enamels, sealers, fillers, and other applied
materials whether used as prime, intermediate, or finish coats.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
SECTION 09900
PAINTING
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and
experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the
specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the
work of this Section.
B. Paint coordination:
1. Provide finish coats which are compatible with the prime coats actually used.
2. Review other Sections of these Specifications as required, verifying the
prime coats to be used and assuring compatibility of the total coating
system for the various substrata.
3. Upon request, fumish information on the characteristics of the specific finish
materials to assure that compatible prime coats are used.
4. Provide barrier coats over noncompatible primers, or remove the primer
and reprime as required.
5. Notify the Architect in writing of anticipated problems in using the specified
coating systems over prime coatings supplied under other Sections.
09900 -1
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340.
B. Product data: Within 35 calendar days after the Contractor has received the
Owner's Notice to Proceed, submit
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section;
2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance
with the specified requirements.
C. Samples:
1. Following the selection of colors and glosses by the Architect, as described
under "Color Schedules" in Part 2 of this Section, submit Samples for the
Architect's review. '
a. Provide three Samples of each color and each gloss for each
material on which the finish is specified to be applied.
b. Except as otherwise directed by the Architect, make Samples
approximately 12" x 12" in size.
c. If so directed by the Architect, submit Samples during progress of
the Work in the form of actual application of the approved
materials on actual surfaces to be painted.
2. Revise and resubmit each Sample as requested until the required gloss,
color, and texture is achieved. Such Samples, when approved, will become
standards of color and finish for accepting or rejecting the work of this
Section.
3. Do not commence finish painting until approved Samples are on file at the
job site.
1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01640.
1.5 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Do not apply solvent- thinned paints when the temperature of surfaces to be painted
and the surrounding air temperatures are below 45 degrees F, unless otherwise
permitted by the manufacturer's printed instructions as approved by the Architect.
B. Weather conditions:
1. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity
exceeds 85 %; or to damp or wet surfaces, unless otherwise permitted by
the manufacturers' printed instructions as approved by the Architect.
2. Applications may be continued during inclement weather only within the
temperature limits specified by the paint manufacturer as being suitable for
use during application and drying periods.
1.6 EXTRA STOCK
A. Upon completion of the work of this Section, deliver to the Owner an extra stock
equaling 10% of each color, type, and gloss of paint used in the Work, tightly sealing
each container, and clearly labeling with contents and location where used.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PAINT MATERIALS
A. Acceptable materials:
1. The Painting Schedule in Part 3 of this Section is based, in general, on
09900 - 2
f,
products of the Sherwin- Williams Paint Company.
2. Equal products of Pittsburg Paints, Devoe, Dunn - Edwards, or other
manufacturers approved in advance by the Architect, may be substituted
in accordance with provisions of the Contract.
3. Where products are proposed other than those specified by name and
number in the Painting Schedule, provide under the product data submittal
required by Article 1.3 of this Section a new painting schedule compiled in
the same format used for the Painting Schedule included in this Section.
B. Undercoats and thinners:
1. Provide undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as the finish
coat.
2. Use only the thinners recommended by the paint manufacturer, and use
only to the recommended limits.
3. Insofar as practicable, use undercoat, finish coat, and thinner material as
parts of a unified system of paint finish.
2.2 COLOR SCHEDULES
A. The Architect will prepare a color schedule with samples for guidance in painting.
B. The Architect may select, allocate, and vary colors on different surfaces throughout the
Work, subject to the following.
1. Exterior work: A maximum of three different colors maybe used, with variations
for trim, doors, miscellaneous work, and metal work.
2. Interior work: A maximum of three different pigmented colors may be used,
with variations for trim and wall surfaces and wainscots.
3. Dark tones: A maximum of three dark tones will be used as accent colors for
interior.
2.3 APPLICATION EQUIPMENT
A. For application of the approved paint, use only such equipment as is recommended
for application of the particular paint by the manufacturer of the particular paint, and
as approved by the Architect.
B. Prior to use of application equipment, verify that the proposed equipment is actually
compatble with the material to be applied, and that integrity of the finish will not be
jeopardized by use of the proposed equipment.
2.4 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and
proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the
Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be
performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the
Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.2 MATERIALS PREPARATION
A. General:
1. Mix and prepare paint materials in strict accordance with the manufacturers'
recommendations as approved by the Architect.
09900 - 3
2. When materials are not in use, store in tightly covered containers.
3. Maintain containers used in storage, mbdng, and application of paint in a
clean condition, free from foreign materials and residue.
B. Stirring:
1. Stir materials before application, producing a mixture of uniform density.
2. Do not stir into the material any film which may form on the surface, but
remove the film and, if necessary, strain the material before using.
3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. General:
1. Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in strict accordance with
paint manufacturers' recommendations as approved by the Architect.
2. Remove removable items which are in place and are not scheduled to
receive paint finish; or provide surface applied protection prior to surface
preparation and painting operations.
3. Following completion of painting in each space or area, reinstall the
removed items by using workmen who are skilled in the necessary trades.
4. Clean each surface to be painted prior to applying paint or surface
treatment.
5. Remove oil and grease with clean cloths and cleaning solvent of low toxicity
and flash point in excess of 200 degrees F, prior to start of mechanical
cleaning.
6. Schedule the cleaning and painting so that dust and other contaminants
from the cleaning process will not fall onto wet newly painted surfaces.
B. Preparation of wood surfaces:
1. Clean wood surfaces until free from dirt, oil, and other foreign substance.
2. Smooth finished wood surfaces exposed to view, using the proper
sandpaper. Where so required, use varying degrees of coarseness in
sandpaper to produce a uniformly smooth and unmarred wood surface.
3. Unless specifically approved by the Architect, do not proceed with painting
of wood surfaces until the moisture content of the wood is 12% or less as
measured by a moisture meter approved by the Architect.
C. Preparation of metal surfaces:
1. Thoroughly clean surfaces until free from dirt, oil, and grease.
2. On galvanized surfaces, use solvent for the initial cleaning, and then treat
the surface thoroughly with phosphoric acid etch. Remove etching solution
completely before proceeding.
3. Allow to dry thoroughly before application of paint
3.4 PAINT APPLICATION
A. General:
1. Touchup shop - applied prime coats which have been damaged, and
touchup bare areas prior to start of finish coats application.
2. Slightly vary the color of succeeding coats.
a. Do not apply additional coats until the completed coat has been
inspected and approved.
b. Only the inspected and approved coats of paint will be considered
in determining the number of coats applied.
3. Sand and dust between coats to remove defects visible to the unaided eye
from a distance of five feet.
4. On removable panels and hinged panels, paint the back sides to match the
exposed sides.
09900 - 4
B. Drying:
1. Allow sufficient drying time between coats, modifying the period as
recommended by the material manufacturer to suit adverse weather
conditions.
2. Consider oil -base and oleo-resinous solvent -type paint as dry for recoating
when the paint feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate
pressure of the thumb, and when the application of another coat of paint
does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat.
C. Brush applications:
1. Brush out and work the brush coats onto the surface in an even film.
2. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, and
other surface imperfections will not be acceptable.
D. Spray application:
1. Except as specifically otherwise approved by the Architect, confine spray
application to metal framework and similar surfaces where hand brush
work would be inferior.
2. Where spray application is used, apply each coat to provide the hiding
equivalent of brush coats.
3. Do not double back with spray equipment to build up film thickness of two
coats in one pass.
E. For completed work, match the approved Samples as to texture, color, and
coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not in compliance with the specified
requirements.
F. Miscellaneous surfaces and procedures:
1. Exposed mechanical items:
a. Finish electric panels, access doors, conduits, pipes, ducts, grilles,
registers, vents, and items of similar nature to match the adjacent
wall and ceiling surfaces, or as directed.
b. Paint visible duct surfaces behind vents, registers, and grilles flat
black.
c. Wash metal with solvent, prime, and apply two coats of alkyd
enamel.
2. Exposed pipe and duct insulation:
a. Apply one coat of latex paint on insulation which has been fixed or
primed under other Sections; apply two coats on such surfaces
when unprepared.
b. Match color of adjacent surfaces.
c. Remove band before painting, and replace after painting.
3. Hardware: paint prime coated hardware to match adjacent surfaces.
4. Wet areas:
a. In toilet rooms and contiguous areas, add an approved fungicide
to paints.
b. For oil base paints, use 1% phenolmercuric or 4 %
tetrachlorophenol.
c. For water emulsion and glue size surfaces, use 4% sodium
tetrachlorophenate.
5. Interior: Use smooth finish where enamel is specified.
6. Exposed vents: Apply two coats of heat - resistant paint approved by the
Architect.
3.5 PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. The various surfaces and areas receiving finished are indicated on the Schedule of
Room Finishes shown on the Drawings. The desired finishes are shown by code
numbers. Note: Complete coverage is mandatory regardless of number of coats
as specified.
09900 - 5
1. 100 - Exterior & Interior Metals (Ferrous)
a) 1st Coat Kem- Kromic Universal Metal Primer
b) 2nd Coat: Industrial Enamel (High Solids)
c) 3rd Coat: Industrial Enamel (High Solids)
2. 102 - Exterior & Interior Metals (Galvanized)
a) 1st Coat: Galvanite (High Solids)
b) 2nd Coat Industrial Enamel (High Solids)
c) 3rd Coat Industrial Enamel (High Solids)
3. 103 - Exterior Wood (Painted)
a) 1st Coat A100 exterior wood primer (oil or latex)
b) 2nd Coat A100 exterior latex (100% acrylic - flat, satin or gloss per
Architect)
c) 3rd Coat: A100 exterior latex acrylic
4. 104 - Exterior Masonry (Concrete Block)
a) lst Coat: Heavy Duty Block Filler
b) 2nd Coat: A100 Semi Gloss
c) 3rd Coat: A100 Semi Gloss
5. 105 - Interior Gypsum Board
a) 1st Coat: High hold - out Primer
b) 2nd Coat: Promar 200 semi -gloss latex
c) 3rd Coat Promar 200 semi-gloss latex
6. 106 - Interior Gypsum Board (Water Areas)
a) 1st Coat: Water Base catalyzed epoxy primer
b) 2nd Coat Catalyzed Epoxy
c) 3rd Coat: Catalyzed Epoxy
7. 107 - Interior Masonry (CMU exposed)
a) 1st Coat: Heavy Duty Block Filler
b) 2nd Coat: Promar200 Semi -Gloss Latex Acrylic
c) 3rd Coat: Promar 200 Semi -Gloss Latex Acrylic
8. 10 - Interior Wood (Oil Base Enamel)
a) lst Coat: Prep -rite wall and wood primer
b) 2nd Coat: Promar alkyd semi -gloss
c) 3rd Coat Promar alkyd semi -gloss
9. 109 - Interior Wood (Stain)
a) lst Coat: Wood Clasics Interior Stain
b) 2nd Coat: Lacquer Sanding Sealer
c) 3rd Coat: Lacquer top coat
10. l.Q - Interior Wood (Natural Finish)
a) Sealer: Lacquer Sanding Sealer
b) Finish: Two Lacquer top coats
END OF SECTION
09900 - 6
1. GENERAL
SECTION 10410
IDENTIFYING DEVICES
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification sections,
apply to work of this Section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Identifying devices include the following:
1. Room identification system (toilets only)
2. Exterior signage
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation
instructions for each type of sign required. '
B. Samples: Submit samples of each color and finish of exposed materials
and accessories required for speciality signs. Architect's review of
samples will be for color and texture only. When required, furnish full -size
samples of speciality sign materials.
C. Shop Drawings
1. Submit shop drawings for identifying devices fabricated for this
work.
2. Show locations, markings, quantities, materials, catalogue
number, sizes and shapes.
3. Indicate methods of anchoring
4. Also see Section 01340
2. PRODUCTS
2.1 ROOM IDENTIFICATION SIGNAGE
A. Provide one unit of signage for each function and each room or space. All
room signage shall be equal to that produced by South Texas Graphic
Specialities, Inc. Or an acceptable substitute. For substitution request,
refer to Section 01631.
B. Room sign plates shall have a two colored laminated plastic face, noted
as color Types I and II. A narrow dado line shall separate the two colors
of laminated plastics. The dado lines, the engraved characters and the
exposed edges shall be painted to match the Type I laminated plastic
color.
C. Sign plate backer board shall be 1/4' thick tempered both faces,
hardboard, equal to that manufactured by the Masonite Corporation or an
acceptable substitute. For substitution request, refer to Section 01631.
D. Sign plates to have a machine engraved Helvetical medium lower cast
style characters with square corners. Allow an average of 10 characters
per sign. Inscriptions to be furnished by Architect. Letters and numbers to
have a width - to-height ration between 3:5 and 1:1, and a stroke width -to-
height ration between 1:5 and 1:10.
E. Sign Plate Type
1. Mount on partition next to room door
2. Bullnose edges with rounded corners
10410 -1
3. Plate size shall be 9" x 9 ".
4. Type I color shall be a 3" wide strip at top and bottom of plate
5. Type II color shall be a 3" wide strip through center of plate in
which the character will be engraved.
2.2 EXECUTION
A. Building Identification
1. Provide Helvetica medium style letters, 8" high, 2" - 2- 9/15"
stroke, 3/8" - 3/4" depth. Provide characters as indicated on plan.
2. Provide flush type mounting against exterior masonry as directed
by Architect. -
3. Material: Cast aluminum anodized dark bronze.
4. Building signage to be by one of the following or an acceptable
substitute. For substitution request, refer to Section 01631
a) A.R.K. Ramos
b) Matthews Sign Systems
c) The Southwell Company
2.3 COMMEMORATIVE PLAQUE
A. Provide commemorative plaque, layout to be provided by Architect
1. Material: Cast aluminum
2. Finish and Color: Dark brown with pebble background; satin finish
on border and raised letters, with projected bevel on border
3. Letter Style: Helvetica
4. Provide a minimum of 350 characters
5. Size: 18" x 24"; overall
6. Manufacturer: Provide plaque by one of the following, or an
acceptable substitute. For substitution request, refer to Section
01631
a) Nelson- Harkins
b) A.R.K - Ramos
3. EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION
A. Install signage level, plumb and at proper heights. Repair or replace
damaged units.
B. Install interior signs with foam tape and silicone at glass, partitions and
doors.
3.2 ROOM IDENTIFICATION SIGNAGE
A. Mount on surfaces as indicated on Drawings, approximately 60" above
finish floor. When mounting on partition, mount within 8" from outside
edges of door.
3.3 BUILDING IDENTIFICATION SIGNAGE
A. Apply letters to building with masonry anchors
B. Locate where directed and indicated on plans.
END OF SECTION
10410 -2
SECTION 10420
PLAQUES
1. GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide and install plaque as directed by Architect.
1.2 SUBMITTAL
A. Submit plaque rubbing for Architect's approval prior to casting. Rubbing
should be actual size showing letter spacing layout type and arrangement.
2. PRODUCT
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Manufacturer - The Southwell Company, San Antonio, Texas, or equal.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Cast aluminum with sprayed medium gray acrylic lacquer background and
nature aluminum finish. See drawings for dimensions, lettering and
layout.
3. EXECUTION
3.1 CASTING
A. Tablet is to be cast of virgin ingots of F214 aluminum alloy free of pits and
gas holes. Borders and letter faces shall be hand tooled, sharp and of the
style specified. Background is to be stipple texture.
3.2 MOUNTING
A. Surface mount with concealed fasteners in the location specified by the
Owner. The Architect will coordinate location with the installer.
B. Mount level and square with the building.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Plaque shall be chemically cleaned, etched, treated with alodine and
sprayed with two coats of clear acrylic lacquer prior to mounting.
B. Wipe surface of plaque clean of any smudges, adhesive or finger prints
after mounting.
END OF SECTION
10420 -1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
C. Work specified elsewhere:
1. Unframed mirrors
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.03 SUBMITTALS
SECTION 10800
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
A. Provide toilet accessories shown on drawings and as specified herein.
B. The type of toilet accessories required include the following .
1. Paper towel dispensers
2. Soap Dispensers
3. Broom and mop holders
4. Handicapped grab bars
5. Sanitary Napkin Disposers
D. Furnish insets and anchoring devices which must be set in concrete, built into
masonry, built into partitions or secured to partitions for the installation of toilet
accessories. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.
A. Provide products of the same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit for units
exposed in the same areas, unless otherwise approved by the Architect.
B. Provide locks where indicated, with the same keying for each type of accessory units
in the project wherever possible. Furnish two keys for each lock.
C. Manufacturers offering products to comply with the requirements for toilet accessories
include the following:
Accessory Specialties, Inc.
American Dispenser Company, Inc.
Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
Bradley Corporation
G.M. Ketcham Company, Inc.
The Charles parker Company
Watrus Inc.
A. For information only, submit two copies of manufacturer's technical data and
installation instructions for each toilet accessory. Transmit copies of installation
instructions to the installer.
B. When requested, submit full -size samples of units to Architect for review of design
and operation. Acceptable samples will be returned and may be used in the work.
Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the
Contractor.
C. Provide setting drawings, templates, instructions and directions for installation of
anchorage devices in other work.
PART 2 - PRODUCT
A. Stainless Steel: AISI, Type 302/304, with polished No. 4 finish, unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Brass: Cast or forged quality alloy, FS WW-P-541.
C. Sheet Steel: Cold rolled, commercial quality, ASTM A.366. Surface preparation
and metal pretreatment as required for applied finish.
D. Galvanized steel sheet: ASTM A 527, G60.
E. Chromium Plating: Nickel and Chromium electro- deposited on metal, ASTM B 456,
Type SC 2.
F. Baked Enamel Finish: Factory- applied, gloss white, baked acrylic enamel coating.
G. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 386, hot -dip galvanized after
fabrication.
2.02 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
A. General: All accessories shall be equal in quality and similar in design to those
manufactured by Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. For identification purposes,
Bobrick model numbers are listed.
B. Paper Towel Dispenser: Recessed Model No. B -3944, one at each toilet room.
Coordinate location with owner's rep and Architect.
C. Soap Dispensers: Model B -822 liquid type(thru- top)with 8295 -11 Spacer. Provide
one soap dispenser at each lavatory.
D. Broom and Mop Holders: Provide in Janitor's Closet one broom and mop holder,
bobrick Model B223, to accommodate three brooms or mops each.
E. Handicapped Grab Bars: 13-6206 Series length in accordance with plans, 1 1/2"
diameter, 1 1/2" stand off. Provide 2 at each handicapped toilet stall.Provide 2x6
blocking minimum at each bar location..
F. Sanitary Napkin Disposer: Thru partition mounted: Model B -4354. Provide at
(thru)toilet partition for H.C. /additional toilet.
G. Tissue Dispenser. Model B -4288. One at each toilet, surface mounted, single paper
rolls with extra automatic drop down roll.
10800 - 2
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Installer must examine the areas and conditions under which toilet accessories are
to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the
proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the
installer.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Use concealed fastenings wherever possible.
B. Provide anchors, bolts and other necessary anchorages, and attach accessories
securely to walls and partitions in locations as shown or directed.
C. Install concealed mounting devices and fasteners fabricated of the same material
as the accessories, or of galvanized steel, as recommended by manufacturer.
D. Install exposed mounting devices and fasteners finished to match the accessories.
E. Provide theft resistant fasteners for all accessory mountings.
F. Secure toilet room accessories in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions
for each item and each type of substrate construction.
END OF SECTION
10800 - 3
PART 1 GENERAL
SECTION 15010
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
Basic Mechanical Requirements specifically applicable to Division 15 Sections, in addition to
Division 1 — General Requirements.
1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS
The General provisions of the Contract, including the General, Supplemental, and Special
Conditions and the General Requirements, apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.03 INTENT
A. Whenever used in this Division, the term "Contractor" shall be construed to mean the
Mechanical Subcontractor unless specifically called out otherwise.
B. Whenever used in this Section, the phrase `provide and install" or the word "provide"
shall be construed to mean that the referred to item shall be furnished and installed along
with all necessary appurtenances to deliver it in satisfactory working order. All nrrPCC,ry
adjusting or testing shall also be included.
C. These specifications are intended to provide for a complete installation, except as herein
specifically excepted. All accessory construction and apparatus necessary for or
advantageous to the operation and testing of the work shall be included. The omission of
specific references to any part of the work necessary for such complete installation shall
not be interpreted as relieving the Contractor from furnishing and installing such parts.
1.04 WORK SUMMARY
A. Work of the Contract is summarized by reference to the Contract; General Conditions of
the Contract and Special Conditions, and Specifications; Drawings listed in Table of
Contents; addenda and modifications to the Contract Documents issued after the printing
of this Project Manual; and references to the documents.
B. The work shall include but not be limited to:
1. Installation of new air moving, cooling system.
1.05 CODE REQUIREMENTS AND PERMITS
A. All materials. installation and testing shall conform to the Uniform Mechanical,
Plumbing, and Fire Codes unless a conflict occurs with the Local or State Codes. The
Local or State Codes shall have precedence over the Standard Code.
B. The Contractor shall resolve any code violation discovered in contract documents with
the engineer prior to award of the contract. After award of the contract, the Contractor
shall make any corrections or additions necessary for compliance with applicable codes at
no additional cost to Owner.
C. The contractor shall obtain and pay for all permits and inspections.
1.06 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to provide an installation complete in every
respect. In the event that additional details or special construction may be requ for
work indicated or specified in this Section or work specified in other sections, it shall be
the responsibility of the Contractor to provide same as well as to provide material and
equipment usually furnished with such systems or requ to complete the installation,
whether mentioned or not.
B. Contract documents are diagrammatic only and do not give fully dimensioned locations
of various elements of work. Determine exact locations from field measurements.
1.07 SUBMITTALS
Contractor shall submit specification brochures on all proposed equipment to the Owner for
approval. The list of submittal and shop drawings shall include but not necessarily be limited to:
1. Air Conditioning Equipment
2. Air Devices
3. Air Filters
4. Control and Instrumentation Components
5. Fire Dampers
6. Plumbing Fixtures
7. Water heater, piping, valves and ductwork
1.08 SUBSTITUTIONS
Any substitutions of materials scheduled on the drawings shall be submitted to the Owner with
complete manufacturer's printed technical supporting information for approval prior to
installation.
1.09 COORDINATION OF WORK
A. Mechanical Contractor shall cooperate with other trades and coordinate his work for the
proper installation of all components of the job.
B. Install work in order to accommodate Owner's occupancy requirements. During the
construction period coordinate mechanical schedule and operations with Owner.
1.10 WELDING
No welding will be permitted on the premises unless the proper welding permit has been executed
with owner.
1.11 COMPLETION
When all work is complete and ready for final inspection, the following items shall be
accomplished by the Contractor:
A. Thoroughly clean and service all equipment, touch -up any damaged paint finishes.
B. Instruct the Owner's representative in the function, proper operation, and regular
maintenance of all equipment.
C. Deliver to the Owner all equipment warranties and manufacturer's equipment brochures
on all equipment installed.
2
D. Deliver to the Owner one set of construction documents marked in red to indicate any
changes made during construction and to reflect the final "as- built" condition of the
work.
1.12 GUARANTEE
Unless otherwise noted, all equipment and materials shall be new and guaranteed free from defects
in materials and workmanship for a period of one (I) year from date of acceptance by Owner.
Any material or equipment shown to be defective within this period shall be repaired or replaced
at no cost to the Owner. All guarantees shall include parts and labor.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL:
All materials shall be new and free from defects, and suitable for the service intended.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with work of other trades.
END OF SECTION
3
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
SECTION 15140
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Pipe and equipment hangers and supports.
B. Equipment bases and supports.
C. Sleeves and seals.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 15260 — Piping Insulation.
B. Section 15510 — Hydronic Piping.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ASME B31.9 — Building Services Piping
B. ASTM F708 — Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers.
C. MSS SP58 — Pipe Hangers and Supports — Materials, Design and Manufacturer.
D. MSS SP69 — Pipe Hangers and Supports — Selection and Application.
E. MSS SP89 — Pipe Hangers and Supports — Fabrication and Installation Practices.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate system layout with location and detail of trapeze hangers.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog data including Load capacity.
C. Design Data: Indication load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple pipe, and riser support
hangers.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and assembly of
components.
A. Hydronic Piping:
1. Conform to ASME B31.9, ASTM F708, MSS SP58, MSS SP69, MSS SP89.
2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes'/ to 1 - 1/2 Inch (13 to 38 mm): Carbon steel, adjustable
swivel, split ring.
3. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 Inches (50 mm) and Over: Carbon steel,
adjustable. clevis.
4
4. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 inches (50 to 100 mm): Carbon steel,
adjustable, clevis.
5. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches (150 mm) and Over: Adjustable steel yoke,
cast iron roll, double hanger.
6. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger
rods.
7. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches (150 mm) and Over:
Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods, cast iron roll.
8. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches (76 mm): Cast iron hook.
9. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches (100 mm) and Over: Welded steel bracket
and wrought steel clamp.
10. Wall Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches (150 mm) and Over: Welded steel
bracket and wrought steel clamp with adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll.
11. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.
12. Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple,
floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.
13. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes to 4 inches (100 mm): Cast iron adjustable pipe
saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.
14. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches (150 mm) and Over: Adjustable cast
iron roll and stand, steel screws, and concrete pier or steel support.
15. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded.
2.03 INSERTS
A. Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded
connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, Tugs for attaching to
forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods.
2.04 SLEEVES
A. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non -fire Rated Floors: 18 gage (1.2 mm thick galvanized
steel.
B. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non -fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet
Floors: Steel pipe or 18 gage galvanized steel.
C. Sleeves for Pipes Through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Walls, and Fire
Proofing: Prefabricated fire rated sleeves including seals, UL listed.
D. Sleeves for Round Ductwork: Galvanized steel.
E. Sleeves for Rectangular Ductwork: Galvanized steel or wood.
F. Sleeves for duct hangers and supports.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.02 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
5
A. Support horizontal piping as scheduled.
B. Install hangers to provide minimum V: inch (13 mm) space between finished covering and
adjacent work.
C. Place hangers within 12 inches (300 mm) of each horizontal elbow.
D. Use hangers with 1 -1/2 inch (38 mm) minimum vertical adjustment.
E. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 5 feet (1.5 m) maximum
spacing between hangers.
F. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each floor at hub.
G. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or
trapeze hangers.
11. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.
1. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.
I. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe.
K. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl
spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.
3.03 SLEEVES
A. Set sleeves in position in formwork. Provide reinforcing around sleeves.
B. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction.
Provide for continuous insulation wrapping.
C. Extend sleeves though floors one inch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves.
D. Where piping or ductwork penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe
or duct and adjacent work with fire stopping caulk air tight. Provide close fitting metal
collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration.
END OF SECTION
6
SECTION 15190
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Nameplates.
B. Tags.
C. Stencils.
D. Pipe Markers.
1.02 REFERENCES'
A. ASME A13.1 — Scheme for the identification of Piping Systems.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
2.02 TAGS
A. Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical
identification.
B. Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and
valve manufacturer's name and model number.
C. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, and installation.
1.04 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Record actual locations of tagged valves.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 NAMEPLATES
A. Description: Laminated three -layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting
background color.
A. Plastic Tags: Laminated three -layer plastic with engraved black letters on Tight
contrasting background color. Tag size minimum 1 -1/2 inch high by 2" long.
B. Chart: Typewritten letter size list in anodized aluminum frame.
2.03 PIPE MARKERS
A. Color: Conform to ASME A13.1.
7
B. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi -rigid plastic, preformed to fit
around pipe or pipe covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and
identification of fluid being conveyed.
C. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive
backing and printed markings.
D. Underground Plastic Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon
tape, minimum 6 inches (150 nun) wide by 4 mil (0.10 mm) thick, manufactured for
direct burial service.
2.04 CEILING TACKS
A. Description: Steel with /., inch (20 mm) diameter color coded head.
B. Color code as follows:
1. Yellow — HVAC equipment
2. Red — Fire dampers/smoke dampers
3. Green — Plumbing valves
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive - resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive.
Apply with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.
B. Install tags with corrosion resistant chain.
C. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D. Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
E. Install underground plastic pipe markers 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished
grade, directly above buried pipe.
F. Identify air handling units, pumps, heat transfer equipment, tanks, and water treatment
devices with plastic nameplates. Small devices, such as in -line pumps, may be identified
with tags.
G. Identify thermostats relating to terminal boxes or valves with nameplates.
H. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags.
I. Tag automatic controls, instruments, and relays. Key to control schematic.
J. Identify piping, concealed or expose, with plastic pipe markers. Identify service, flow
direction, and pressure. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate
identification not to exceed 20 feet (6 m) on straight runs including risers and drops,
adjacent to each valve and Tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and
at each obstruction.
8
K. Provide ceiling tacks to locate valves or dampers above T -bar type panel ceilings. Locate
in comer of panel closest to equipment.
END OF SECTION
9
1.04 SUBMITTALS
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
SECTION 15260
PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Piping insulation.
B. Jackets and accessories.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 15190 — Mechanical Identification.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C 177 — Steady -State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission
Properties by Means of the Guarded- Hot -Plate Apparatus.
B. ASTM C335 — Steady -State Heat Transfer Properties of Horizontal Pipe Insulation.
C. ASTM C534 — Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and
Tubular Form.
D. ASTM D 1056 — Flexible Cellular Materials — Sponge or Expanded Rubber.
E. ASTM D 1667 — Flexible Cellular Materials — Vinyl Chloride Polymers and Copolymers
(Closed Cell Foam).
F. ASTM D2842 — Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics.
G. ASTM E84 — Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
H ASTM E96 — Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
1. NFPA 255 — Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
J. UL 723 — Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
A. Product Data: Provide product description, list of materials and thickness for each
service, and locations.
B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate procedures which ensure acceptable
workmanship and installation standards will be achieved.
A. Materials: Flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 or less in accordance with
NFPA 255.
10
1.06 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three
years experience.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site.
B. Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's
identification, including product density and thickness.
C. Store insulation in original wrapping and protect from weather and construction traffic.
D. Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage.
1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives,
mastics, and insulation cements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CELLULAR FOAM
A. Insulation: ASTM C534; flexible, cellular elastomeric, molded or sheet.
I. `K' (`ksi') Value: ASTM C177 or C518; 0.27 at 75 degrees F.
2. Minimum Service Temperature: -40 degrees F.
3. Maximum Service Temperature: 220 degrees F.
4. Maximum Moisture Absorption: ASTM D1056; 1.0 percent (pipe) by volume,
1.0 percent (sheet) by volume.
5. Moisture Vapor Transmission: ASTM E96; 0.20 perm inches.
6. Maximum Flame Spread: ASTM E84; 25.
7. Maximum Smoke Developed: ASTM E84; 50.
8. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive.
B. Elastomeric Foam Adhesive
1. Air dried, contact adhesive, compatible with insulation.
2.01 JACKETS
A. Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B209
1. Thickness: 0.016 inch sheet.
2. Finish: Smooth.
3. Joining: Longitudinal slip joins and 2 inch laps
4. Fittings: 0.01 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached
protective liner.
5. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.015 inch thick aluminum.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry.
11
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. On exposed piping, locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
C. Insulated dual temperature pipes or cold pipes conveying fluids below ambient
temperature:
I. Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory applied or field applied.
2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and
thickness as adjacent pipe.
3. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive.
4. PVC fitting covers may be used.
5. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe
penetrations.
6. Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers,
flexible connections, [pump bodies,] and expansion joints.
D. Inserts and Shields:
1. Application: Piping 1 -1/2 inches diameter or larger.
2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts.
3. Insert Location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket.
4. Insert Configuration: Minimum 6 inches (150 mm) long, of same thickness and
contour as adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated.
5. Insert Material: ASTM C640 cork or other heavy density insulating material
suitable for the planned temperature range.
E. Finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.
F. SCHEDULE
INSULATION
PIPING TYPE PIPE SIZE THICKNESS
Inch (mm) Inch (mm)
Domestic Hot Water A Y," to 2" 1"
Overt" 1' 1,"
Domestic Cold Water A All 1"
Condensate Drain All
Refrigerant Suction G All Per manufacturer's
recommendations
3.03 TOLERANCE
A. Substituted insulation materials shall provide thermal resistance within 10 percent at
normal conditions, as materials indicated.
END OF SECTION
12
1.03 SUBMITTALS
SECTION 15290
DUCTWORK INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Ductwork insulation.
B. Duct Liner.
C. Insulation jackets.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM B209 — Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate.
B. ASTM C518 — Steady -State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission
Properties by means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus.
C. ASTM C553 — Mineral Fiber Blanket and Felt insulation.
D. ASTM C612 — Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation.
E. ASTM E84 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building materials.
F. ASTM E96 — Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
G. NFPA 255 — Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
FL SMACNA — HVAC Duct Construction Standards — Metal and Flexible.
I. UL 723 — Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
A. Submit product data to owner.
B. Product Data: Provide product description, list of materials and thickness for each
service, and locations.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate procedures which ensure acceptable
workmanship and installation standards will be achieved.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Materials: Flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 or less in accordance with NFPA 255.
1.05 QUALIFICATIONS
Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three
years experience.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
13
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site.
B. Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's
density and thickness.
C. Store insulation in original wrapping and protect from weather and construction traffic.
D. Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage.
1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives, mastics,
and insulation cements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE
A. Insulation: ASTM C553; flexible, noncombustible blanket.
I. `K' (`Ksi') value: ASTM C518, 0.31 at 75 degrees F.
2. Maximum service temperature: 250 degrees F.
3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.50 percent by volume.
4. Density: 0.75 lb/cu ft.
B. Vapor Barrier Jacket
1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yam and bonded to aluminized film.
2. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.04 perm.
3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape.
C. Vapor Barrier Tape
Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with pressure
sensitive rubber based adhesive.
D. Tie Wire: Annealed steel, 16 gage (1.5 m).
2.02 GLASS FIBER, RIGID
A. Insulation: ASTM C612; rigid, noncombustible blanket.
1. `K' (`Ksi ") value: ASTM C518, 0.29 at 75 degrees F.
2. Maximum service temperature: 250.
3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.50 percent by volume.
4. Density: 1.5 lb/cu ft.
B. Vapor Barrier Jacket
1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yam and bonded to aluminized film.
2. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.04 perm.
3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape.
C. Vapor Barrier Tape
Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with pressure
sensitive rubber based adhesive.
2.03 JACKETS
14
Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B209
1. Thickness: 0.016 inch thick sheet.
2. Finish: Smooth or Embossed.
3. Joining: longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch (50 mm) Zaps.
4. Fittings: 0.016 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner.
5. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.015 inch thick aluminum or 01010 inch thick
stainless steel.
2.04 GLASS FIBER DUCT LINER, FLEXIBLE
A. Insulation: ASTM C553; flexible, noncumbustible blanket.
1. `K' (`Ksi')value: ASTM C518, 0.28 at 75 degrees F.
2. Maximum service temperature: 250 degrees F.
3. Density: 1.5 lb/cu ft.
4. Maximum Velocity on Coated Air Side: 4,000 11/min.
B. Adhesive
Waterproof fire - retardant type.
C. Liner Fasteners: Galvanized steel, welded with integral or press on head.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that ductwork has been tested before applying insulation materials.
B. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Insulated ductwork conveying air below ambient temperature:
1. Provide insulation with vapor barrier jackets.
2. Finish with tape and vapor barrier jacket.
3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations.
4. Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers, flexible
connections, and expansion joints.
C. Insulated ductwork conveying air above ambient temperature:
I. Provide with or without standard vapor barrier jacket
2. Insulate fittings and joints. Where service access is requ bevel and seal ends of
insulation.
D. External Duct Insulation Application:
1. Secure insulation with vapor barrier with wires and seal jacket joints with vapor
barrier adhesive or tape to match jacket.
2. Install without sag on underside of ductwork. Use adhesive or mechanical fasteners
where necessary to prevent sagging. Lift ductwork off trapeze hangers and insert
spacers.
3. Seal vapor barrier penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor barrier adhesive.
4. Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow
operation without disturbing wrapping.
15
E. Duct and Plenum Liner Application:
1. Adhere insulation with adhesive for 100 percent coverage.
2. Secure insulation with mechanical liner fasteners. Refer to SMACNA Standards for
spacing.
3. Seal and smooth joints.
4. Seal liner surface penetrations with adhesive.
5. Duct dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for air flow. Increase
duct size to allow for insulation thickness.
3.03 TOLERANCE
A. Substituted insulation materials shall provide thermal resistance within 10 percent at
normal conditions, as materials indicated.
END OF SECTION
16
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Pipe and pipe fittings.
B. Valves.
C. Condensate drainage piping system.
D. Domestic water piping system.
E. Soil, waste and vent piping.
SECTION 15410
PLUMBING PIPING
1.02 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION
A. Section 15140 - Supports and Anchors: Placement of pipe sleeves.
1.03 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 15140 - Supports and Anchors.
B. Section 15190 - Mechanical Identification.
C. Section 15260 - Piping Insulation.
D. Section 15440 - Plumbing Fixtures.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ANSI B31.I - Power Piping.
B. ANSI B31.9 - Building Service Piping.
C. ASME - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
D. ASME 1316.22 - Wrought Copper and Bronze Solder - Joint Pressure Fittings
E. ASTM B32 - Solder Metal.
F. ASTM B75 - Seamless Copper Tube.
G. ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube.
H. ASTM D1785 0 Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120.
I. ASTM D2466 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40.
J. ASTM D2564 - Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings.
17
K. ASTM D2729 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.
L. ASTM D2855 - Making Solvent- Cemented Joints with Poly (Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) Pipe and
Fittings.
M. AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Division I.
B. Project Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. Provide
manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings.
1.06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Submit under provisions of Division 1.
B. Record actual locations of valves and concealed pipes.
1.07 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01700.
B. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly
views.
1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.
1.09 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section
with minimum three years experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 3 years
documented experience.
1.10 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Perform work in accordance with state laws regarding plumbing and licensing of plumbers,
and in accordance with local plumbing code.
1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Division 1.
B. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.
C. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.
D. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until
installation.
18
E. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing
sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system.
1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen.
1.13 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish under provisions of Division 1.
B. Provide two repacking kits for each size repackable valve.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 WATER PIPING, BURIED OUTSIDE OF BUILDING
A. PVC Pipe: ASTM DI785, Schedule 40, or ASTM D2241, SDR - 26 for not less than 150 psig
pressure rating.
1. Fittings: ASTM D2466, PVC.
2. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld with ASTM D2564 Solvent cement.
B. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn, except annealed where sleeved or
flexibility is otherwise required.
1. Fittings: ASTM B16.22 wrought copper and bronze.
2. Joints: ASTM B32, solder, Grade 95TA or AWS A5.8, BCuP silver braze.
2.02 WATER PIPING, WITHIN BUILDING
A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn, except annealed where sleeved or
flexibility is otherwise required.
1. Fittings: ASTM B16.22 wrought copper and bronze.
2. Joints: ASTM B32, solder, Grade 95TA, except use AWS A5.8, BCuP silver braze
where buried under slab and where noted. Provide color stripe coding in accordance
with UPC 604.3.
2.03 WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn, except annealed where sleeved or
flexibility is otherwise required.
1. Fittings: ASTM B16.22 wrought copper and bronze.
2. Joints: ASTM B32. solder, Grade 95TA.
2.04 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS
A. Pipe Size 2 Inches and Under:
I. Ferrous pipe: 150 psig malleable iron threaded unions.
2. Copper tube and pipe: 150 psig bronze unions with soldered joints.
B. Pipe Size Over 2 Inches:
1. Ferrous pipe: 150 psig forged steel slip -on flanges: 1/16 inch thick preformed
neoprene gaskets.
2. Copper tube and pipe: 150 psig slip -on bronze flanges: 1/16 inch thick preformed
neoprene gaskets.
19
C. Grooved and Shouldered Pipe End Couplings:
1. Housing: Malleable iron clamps to engage and lock, designed to permit some angular
deflection, contraction, and expansion; steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized for
galvanized pipe.
2. Sealing gasket: "C" shape composition sealing gasket.
D. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder
end, water impervious isolation barrier.
2.05 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES AND LIKE COMPONENTS:
A. Except as otherwise noted, the following selection criteria apply to all valves strainers,
and similar piping system components on the project.
B. For purposes of this article, approved plastic liners can be used to make a part non-
wetted. However, the specific material, attachment method and thickness of the lining
must be approved by the engineer for the specific application. Bodies of lined valves
must be isolated (by the liner or flange gasket, etc.) from the adjacent piping system if of
dissimilar metals.
C. Refer to Part 3 — execution, for grounding continuity issues that may affect the selection
of non - metallic or lined components.
D. Material Requirements by Piping System Material:
I. Copper piping systems: All wetted parts bronze or stainless steel.
2. Plastic piping systems: All wetted parts plastic, bronze or stainless steel.
E. Material Requirements by Piping System Contents:
1. Potable water systems: All wetted parts bronze, stainless steel or approved
plastic; except ductile iron or cast or forged steel body may be used with carbon
steel piping systems.
F. Application Requirements by Service:
1. Temperature Rating: All components must be suited to the full range of
operating and non - operating temperatures to which they will likely be exposed.
Give special attention to non - metallic seats, seals, and the like.
2. Pressure Rating: Component and connector pressure ratings shall equal or
exceed the required pressure rating of the piping system in which installed.
3. Select gate, ball or butterfly valves for isolation and similar on-off duty.
4. Select ball, butterfly or globe valves for modulation duty.
G. Operator Requirements by Manually Operated Valve Size and Type:
1. Gate and Globe Valves up to 2 ": Handwheel, non - rising stem.
2. Outdoor Hose bibs and Wall Hydrants: Loose key, common type.
3. Ball Valves: Lever with position latching mechanism.
H. Connection Requirements by Valve Size: Selection shall also be consistent with piping
system joining method.
1. Up to 2": Threaded, union or soldered end.
2.05 SOIL, WASTE AND VENTS: PVC Schedule 40. ASTM D 2665 unless otherwise indicated on
construction documents.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
20
A. Verify excavations as adequate for pipe installation.
B. Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over - excavated.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe for welding.
B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.
C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide non - conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.
C. Electrical continuity of metal piping systems must be restored by grounding jumpers
where dielectric unions, non - metallic valves or Tined valves are used in a manner that
breaks electrical continuity. Flange bolts are generally acceptable for grounding
continuity of lined metal valves, and for attachment of grounding jumpers with crimped
lugs. Grounding clamps may be required otherwise. Piping installer shall notify
electrical installer of all electrical discontinuities and pay electrical installer for providing
jumpers.
D. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Install piping to conserve
building space and not interfere with use of space.
E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or
connected equipment.
G. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.
H. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed.
1. Set elevations of buried piping outside the building to ensure required depth below final
grade.
J. Install utility meters in accordance with requirements of utility companies.
K. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories not prefinished, ready for finish painting.
L. Provide cleanouts as required by applicable codes.
3.04 APPLICATION
A. Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners only in accessible locations.
B. Provide repeatedly separable and re- connectable connections such as threaded. union,
grooved or flanged on each side of each valve and wherever needed for ease of
maintenance or replacement of equipment. Threaded connections must be accompanied
by sufficient unions to insure ease of disassembly. Soldered connections are acceptable
21
in %" and smaller lines where separation is likely to be rare. Use re- connectable
connections at equipment (between equipment and isolation valve, if present) and on
each side of devices valves 2" and larger.
C. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Sweat solder
adapters to pipe.
3.05 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Lay out and slope drain, waste and vent piping as indicated, per local code, and within
constraints of discharge invert elevations. Slopes for drainage shall be' /" per foot (2 %),
except that 1/8" per foot (1 %) slope may be used for 4" and larger lines where necessary
to satisfy structural or discharge elevation requirements.
3.06 DISINFECTION OF DOMENTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM
A. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean.
B. Ensure pH of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or
soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric).
C. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form,througbout system
to obtain 50 to 80 mg/L residuaL
D. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at
minimum 15 percent of outlets.
E. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours.
F. If final disinfectant residual tests Tess than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment.
G. Flush disinfectant from system until residual is equal to that of incoming water or less
than 1.0 mg/L.
H. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from ten percent (10 %) of outlets
and from water entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651.
3.07 SERVICE CONNECTIONS
A. Connect to site sanitary sewer systems. Before connecting work check invert elevations
required for sewer connections, confirm inverts and ensure that these can be properly
connected with slope for drainage and cover to avoid freezing. Refer to Civil Plans.
3.08 TESTING
A. Water lines: Test in accordance with governing code. Repair leaking joints as required
and retest.
B. Soil and Waste: Unless otherwise directed, test in accordance with governing code.
Repair leaking joints as required and retest.
END OF SECTION
22
SECTION 15535
REFRIGERATION PIPING AND SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Piping.
B. Refrigerant
C. Moisture and liquid indicators.
D. Valves.
E. Strainers.
F. Check valves.
G. Pressure relief valves.
H. Filter- driers.
I. Solenoid valves.
J. Expansion Valves
K. Receivers.
L. Flexible connections.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 15260 — Piping Insulation.
B. Section 15671— Air Cooled Condensing Units.
C. Section 15855 — Air Handling Units.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/AR1 495 — Refrigerant Liquid Receivers
B. ANSUARI 710 — Liquid Line Dryers.
C. ANSUASHRAE 15 — Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.
D. ANSI /ASHRAE 34 —Number Designation of Refrigerants.
E. ANSI/ASME SEC 8D Boilers and Pressure Vessels Code, Rules for Construction of
Pressure Vessels.
F. ANSUASME SEC 9 — Boilers and Pressure Vessels Code, Welding and Brazing
Qualifications.
23
G. ANSUASME B16.22 — Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.
H. ANSUASME B16.26 — Cast Copper Alloy Fittings For Flared Copper Tubes.
I. ANSI/ASME B31.5 — Refrigeration Piping.
J. ANSI/ASME B31.9 — Building Services Piping.
K. ANSUASTM B32 — Solder Metal.
L. ANSI/ASTM B88 — Seamless Copper Water Tube.
M. ANSI/AWS A5.8 — Brazing Filler Metal.
N. ARI 750 — Thermostatic Refrigerant Expansion Valves.
0. ASTM B280 — Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field
Service.
P. MIL V - 23450C — Valves, Expansion, Thermostatic, Refrigerant 12 and Refrigerant 22.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Division 1.
B. Submit product data indicating general assembly of specialties, including manufacnaers
catalogue information.
C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Division 1.
D. Submit design data as a submittal under provisions of Division 1.
E. Submit data indicating pipe sizing.
1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Submit documents under provisions of Division 1.
B. Accurately record exact locations of equipment and refrigeration accessories on record
drawings.
1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to ANSI/ASME B3I.9.
1.07 DELIVER, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01600.
B. Deliver and store piping and specialties in shipping containers with labeling in place.
C. Store and protect products under provisions of Division 1.
D. Protect piping and specialties from entry of contaminating material by leaving end caps
and plugs in place until installation.
24
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPING
A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B280, Type L.
B. Copper Tubing to 7/8 inch OD: ANSUASTM B88, Type K, annealed.
2.02 REFRIGERANT
A. Refrigerant: ANSUASHRAE 34; R -22 : Monochlorodifluoromethane.
2.03 MANUFACTURERS
A. Dow Chemical.
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1.
2.04 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES
A. Straight Thru or Angle Type: Brass body and disc, neoprene seat, factory sealed and
stamped with ASME UV and National Board Certification NB; selected to
ANSUASHRAE 15.
2.05 FILTER- DRIERS
1. Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.22 wrought copper.
2. Joints: ANSUAWS A5.8 BcuP silver braze.
1. Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.26 cast copper.
2. Joints: Flared.
A. Replaceable Cartridge Angle Type: ANSUARI 710, UL listed, brass shell and bronze
cap, perforated brass shell and molded desiccant filter core.
B. Permanent Straight Thru Type: ANSUARI 710, UL listed, steel shell with molded
desiccant filter core.
2.06 EXPANSION VALVES
A. Angle or Straight Thru Type: ARI 750 or MIL- 1- 23450C design suitable for refrigerant,
brass body.
B. Selection: Evaluate refrigerant pressure drop through system to determine available
pressure drop across valve. Select valve for maximum load at design operating pressure
and minimum 10 degrees F (6 degrees C) superheat. Select to avoid being undersized at
full load and excessively oversized at part load.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
25
B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.
C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install refrigeration specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Route piping in orderly manner, with plumbing parallel to building structure, and
maintain gradient.
C. Install piping to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space.
D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations and locations. Slope piping one
percent in direction of oil return.
E. Provide non - conducting dielectric connections when joining dissimilar metals.
F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or
connected equipment.
G. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.
H. Provide access to concealed valves and fittings
I. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building frame, brush clean, and
apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.
J. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories not prefnished, ready for finish painting.
K. Insulate piping; refer to Section 15260.
L. Locate expansion valve sensing bulb immediately downstream or evaporator on suction
line.
M. Provide extemal equalizer piping on expansion valves with refrigerant distributor
connected to evaporator.
N. Fully charge completed system with refrigerant after testing.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. Provide line size liquid indicators in main liquid line leaving condenser, or if receiver is
provided, in liquid line leaving receiver.
B. Provide permanent filter - driers in systems utilizing hermetic compressors rated 5 tons
and less.
C. For compressors rated over 5 tons, provide replaceable cartridge filter - driers, with three -
valve bypass assembly. Provide filter- driers for each solenoid valve.
D. Provide refrigerant charging (packed angle) valve connections in liquid line between
receiver shut -off valve and expansion valve.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
26
A. Test refrigeration system in accordance with ANSI/ASME B31.5.
B. Pressure test system with dry nitrogen to 200 psig. Perform final tests at 27 inches
mercury vacuum and 200 psig using halide torch or electronic leak detector. Test to no
leakage.
END OF SECTION
27
SECTION 15671
AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS
PART I GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Condensing unit package.
B. Charge of refrigerant and oil.
C. Controls and control connections.
D. Refrigerant piping connections.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03300 — Cast - in - Place Concrete: Equipment bases.
B. Section 15260 — Piping Insulation.
C. Section 15535 — Refrigeration Piping and Specialties.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASHRAE 15 — Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.
B. ANSI/ASHRAE 90A — Energy Conservation in new Building Design.
C. ANSI/NEMA MG 1 — Motors and Generators.
D. ANSI/UL 207 — Refrigerant - Containing Components and Accessories, Non - Electrical.
E. ANSI/UL 303 — Refrigeration and Air- Conditioning Condensing, and Air -Source Heat
Pump Equipment.
F. ANSI/UL 465 — Central Cooling Air Conditioners.
G. ARI 210/240 — Unitary Air - Conditioning and Air -Source Heat Pump Equipment.
H. ARI 520 — Positive Displacement Refrigerant Compressors, Compressor Units ad
Condensing Units.
I. ASHRAE 14 — Methods of Testing for Rating Positive Displacement Condensing Units.
J. ARI 270 — Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Division 1.
B. Submit shop drawings indicting components, assembly, dimensions, weights and
loadings, required clearances, and location and size of field connections. Include
28
schematic layouts showing condensing units, cooling coils, refrigerant piping, and
accessories required for complete system.
C. Submit product data under provisions of Division 1.
D. Submit product data indicating rated capacities, weights specialties and accessories,
electrical nameplate data, and wiring diagrams.
E. Submit design data under provisions of Division 1.
F. Submit design data indicating pipe and equipment sizing.
G. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Division 1.
1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTANANCE DATA
A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Division 1.
B. Include start-up instructions, maintenance instructions, parts Lists, controls, and
accessories.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site under Division 1.
B. Store and protect products under provisions of Division 1.
C. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions for rigging, unloading, and
transporting units.
D. Protect units on site from physical damage. Protect coils.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Provide five (5) year warranty for refrigerant compressors.
1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Provide one (1) complete change of lubricating oil under provisions of Division 1.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES
A. Refer to schedule on drawings for performance data, features and approved
manufacturer(s) and model(s). Additional specifications herein are supplementary and
subordinate to the schedule.
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1.
2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Units: Self - contained. packaged, factory assembled and pre -wired units suitable for
outdoor use consisting of cabinet, compressors, condensing coil and fans, integral sub -
cooling coil, controls. liquid receiver, and screens.
29
B. Construction and Ratings: In accordance with ARI 210/240, and ANSI/UL 207 and
ANSI/UL 303. Testing shall be in accordance with ASHRAE 14.
C. Performance Ratings: Energy Efficiency Rating (EER) not less than prescribed by
ANSI/ASHRAE 90A.
2.03 CASING
A. House components in welded steel frame with galvanized steel panels with weather
resistant, baked enamel finish.
B. Mount starters, disconnects, and controls in weatherproof panel provided with full
opening access doors. Provide mechanical interlock to disconnect power when door is
opened.
C. Provide removable access doors or panels with [piano hinges and] quick fasteners.
2.04 CONDENSER COILS
A. Coils: Aluminum fins mechanically bonded to seamless copper tubing. Provide sub -
cooling circuits. Air test under water to 425 psig, and dehydrate. Seal with holding
charge of refrigerant or inert gas.
B. Coil Guard: Expanded metal, steel louver or PVC coated steel wire.
2.05 FANS AND MOTORS
A. Vertical discharge direct driven propeller type condenser fans with fan guard on
discharge.
B. Weatherproof motors suitable for outdoor use, single phase permanent split capacitor or 3
phase, with permanent Lubricated ball bearings and built in thermal overload protection.
2.06 COMPRESSORS
A. Construction: Reciprocating hermetic compressor with suction and discharge ports.
B. Mounting: Statically and dynamically balance rotating parts and mount on spring (over
100 lb) or rubber -in -shear vibration isolators. internally isolated hermetic or semi -
hermetic units are acceptable without external isolation.
C. Lubrication System: Reversible, positive displacement oil pump with oil charging valve,
oil level sight glass, oil filter, and magnetic plug or strainer.
D. Motor: Constant speed 1800 or 3600 rpm suction gas cooled with electronic sensor and
winding over - temperature protection, designed for across- the -line starting. Fumish with
starter.
E. Crankcase Heater: Evaporates refrigerant returning to crankcase during shut down.
Energize heater thermostatically.
2.07 REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT
A. Provide each unit with one refrigerant circuit per compressor, factory supplied and piped
to connectors at the unit perimeter.
30
B. Refer to Section 15535. Provide the following for each refrigerant circuit:
1. Filter dryer, replaceable core type.
2. Insulated suction line.
3. Suction and liquid line service valves and gage ports.
4. Charging valve.
2.08 CONTROLS
A. On unit, mount weatherproof steel control panel, NEMA 250, containing power and
control wiring, factory wired with single point power connection.
B. For each compressor, provide starter, and control power transformer or terminals for
controls power. For each condenser fan, provide across- the -line starter with overcurrent
relay.
C. Provide the following operating controls:
1. Thermostat located in room.
2. Five minute off timer prevents compressor from short cycling.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide for connection to electrical service.
C. Install units on concrete base as indicated. Refer to Division 3.
D. Provide connection to refrigeration piping system and evaporators. Refer to Section
15535. Comply with ANSUASHP.AE 15.
3.02 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. Prepare and start systems under provisions of Section 01600.
B. Provide start-up for each operating season shut -down during first year of operation,
including routine servicing and check out.
C. Supply initial charge of refrigerant and oil for each refrigerant circuit. Replace losses of
refrigerant and oil.
D. Inspect and test for refrigerant leaks every three (3) months during first year of operation.
END OF SECTION
31
SECTION 15855
AIR HANDLING UNITS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Packaged air handling units.
B. Cooling coils.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 15290 — Ductwork Insulation.
B. Section 15890— Ductwork.
C. Section 15910 — Ductwork Accessories: Flexible duct connections.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. AFBMA 9 — Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
B. AFBMA 11 — Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
C. AMCA 99 — Standards Handbook.
D. AMCA 210 — Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes.
E. AMCA 300 — Test Code for Sound Rating Air Moving Devices.
F. AMCA 301 — Method of Publishing Sound Ratings for Air Moving Devices.
G. ARI 410 — Forced - Circulation Air - Cooling and Air- Heating Coils.
H. ARI 430 — Central- Station Air - Handling Units.
I. ARI 435 — Application of Central Station Air - Handling Units.
J. NEMA MGI — Motors and Generators.
K. NFPA 70 — National Electrical Code.
L. SMACNA — HVAC Duct Construction Standards — Metal and Flexible.
M. UL 900 — Test Performance of Air Filter Units.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Division 1.
B. Shop Drawings: indicate assembly, unit dimensions, w eight loading, required clearances,
construction details, field connection details. and electrical characteristics and connection
requirements.
32
C. Product Data
1. Provide literature which indicates dimensions, weights, capacities, ratings, fan
performance, gages and finishes of materials, and electrical characteristics and
connection requirements.
2. Provide data of filter media, filter performance data, filter assembly, and filter
frames.
3. Provide fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted.
4. Submit sound power level data for both fan outlet and casing radiation at rated
capacity.
5. Submit electrical requirements for power supply wiring including wiring
diagrams for interlock and control wiring, clearly indicating factory- installed
and field - installed wiring.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions.
1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit under provisions of Division 1.
B. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for lubrication, filter replacement, motor and
drive replacement, spare parts lists, and wiring diagrams.
1.06 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this
section with minimum three (3) years experience, who issues complete catalog data on
total product.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Division 1.
B. Accept products on site in factory- fabricated protective containers, with factory- installed
shipping skids and lifting lugs. Inspect for damage.
C. Store in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle
carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish.
1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is clean,
filters are in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation.
1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Fumish under provisions of Division 1.
B. Provide one set of fan belts for each belt- driven fan.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES
33
A. Refer to equipment schedules on drawings for performance data, features and approved
manufacturer(s) and model(s). Additional specifications herein are supplementary and
subordinate to the schedules.
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section Division 1.
2.02 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
A. Configuration: Fabricate airhandlers from compatible modular component, arranged as
indicated on the drawings and/or as required to achieve the specified performance in the
designated space.
B. Performance Base: As scheduled or indicated, or if not otherwise indicated, as follows:
1. Elevation: Sea level.
2. Outdoor Summer Ambient: 100 F, 78 F wetbulb.
3. Outdoor Winter Ambient: 20 F, 15 F wetbulb.
4. Indoor Ambient: 75 F, 65 F wetbulb.
C. Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99.
2.03 CASING
A. Strength: Provide structure to brace casings for suction pressure of 2.5 inch wg, with
maximum deflection of 1 in 200.
B. Construction: Fabricate frame of welded steel. Provide removable (non - structural) 2"
thick double -wall side panels. Provide with solid (not perforated) inside casing. Coat
externally with manufacturers standard paint finish. Assemble sections with gaskets and
bolts.
I. Outside Casing: Galvanized Steel: 18 gage.
2. Inside Casing: Galvanized Steel: 20 gage.
C. Insulation: Insulate double wall panels with full- thickness, 1.5 lbs per cu ft density, glass
fiber insulation, "K" value at 75 degrees F maximum 0.26 Btu/inch/sq ft/degrees F/hr.
All connecting channels shall be insulated to prevent sweating.
D. Drain Pans: Construct from double thickness galvanized steel with insulation between.
layers with welded corners. Cross break and pitch to drain connection. Provide drain
pan under cooling coil section.
2.04 FANS
A. Type: Double width, double inlet centrifugal, with forward curved or airfoil blades.
B. Performance Ratings Conform to AMCA 210 and bear the AMCA Certified Rating Seal.
C. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301; tested to AMCA 300 and bear AMCA Certified Sound
Rating Seal.
D. Bearings: Self - aligning, grease lubricated, ball or roller bearings with lubrication fittings
extended to exterior of casing with plastic or aluminum or copper tube and grease fitting
rigidly attached to casing.
E. Mounting: Locate fan and motor internally on welded steel base coated with corrosion
resistant paint. Factory mount motor on slide rails. Provide access to motor, drive, and
34
bearings through removable casing panels or hinged access doors. Suspend motor, drive
and fan on vibration isolation mounts.
2.05 BEARINGS AND DRIVES
A. Bearings: AFBMA 9, L -50 life at 100,000 hours, heavy duty pillow block type, self -
aligning, grease lubricated ball bearings, or AFBMA 11, L-50 life at 400,000 hours,
pillow block type, self - aligning, grease - lubricated roller bearings.
B. Shafts: Solid, hot rolled steel, ground and polished, with key -way, and protectively
coated with lubricating oil.
2.06 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS
A. Electrical Characteristics:
I. 208/230 I phase, 60hz.
B. Motor Open drip proo£
C. Wiring Terminations: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities,
sizes, and materials indicated. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70.
2.07 COILS
A. Casing: Provide coil casing to allow coil service and replacement from either side.
B. Drain Pans: Provide intermediate drain pans with down spouts for cooling coil banks
more than one coil high.
C. Air Coils: Certify capacities, pressure drops, and selection procedures in accordance with
ARI 410.
D. Fabrication:
I. Tubes: 5/8 inch seamless copper expanded into fins, brazed joints.
2. Fins: Aluminum.
3. Casing: Die formed channel frame of galvanized steel.
E. Refrigerant Coils:
1. Headers: Seamless copper tubes with silver brazed joints.
2. Liquid Distributors: Brass or copper venturi type distributor with seamless
copper distributor tubes.
3. Configuration: Down feed with bottom suction.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install in conformance with ARI 435.
C. Assemble units per manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION
35
SECTION 15890
DUCTWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Low pressure ducts.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 15010- General Mechanical Requirements.
B. Section 15140- Supports and Anchors: Sleeves.
1.03 REFERENCES.
A. ASHRAE- Handbook 1993 Fundamentals; Chapter 32- Duct Design.
B. ASHRAE- Handbook 1988 Equipment; Chapter 1- Duct Construction.
C. ASTM A 90 Weight of Coating on Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Iron or Steel Articles.
D. ASTM A 527- Steel Sheet, Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) by Hot -Dip Process, Lock Forming
Quality.
E. NFPA 90A- Installation of Air Condition and Ventilating Systems.
F. SMACNA Duct Construction Standards.
G. UL 181- Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors.
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A. Duct Sizes: Inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes inside lining.
B. Low Pressure: Three pressure classifications: V. inch WG (125 Pa) positive or negative static
pressure and velocities less than 2,000 fpm (10 m/sec); I inch WG (250Pa) positive or
negative static pressure and velocities Tess than 2,500 fpm (12.7 m/sec) and 2 inch WG
(500Pa) positive or negative static pressure and velocities less than 2,500 fpm (12.7 m/sec).
1.05 REGULATORY REQUIRMENTS
A. Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A standards.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under Division 1.
B. Indicate duct fittings, particulars such as gages, sizes. welds. and configuration prior to start
of work for low and medium pressure systems.
C. Submit samplers under Division 1.
36
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site under division 1.
B. Store and protect products under Division 1.
PART2PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. All materials shall be new and free from defects, and suitable for the service intended
B. General: Non - combustible or conforming to requirements for class 1 air duct materials, or UL
181.
C. Fasteners: Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws.
D. Sealant: Non - hardening, water resistant, fire resistant, compatible with mating materials;
liquid used alone or with tape, or heavy mastic.
E. Hanger Rod: Steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuously
threaded.
2.02 LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK
A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction
Standards and ASHRAE handbooks, except as indicated. Provide duct material, gages,
reinforcing, and sealing for operating indicated.
B. Size round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE table of
equivalent rectangular and round ducts.
C. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1 -1/2 times width of duct on
centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide turning vanes.
D. Provide easements where low pressure ductwork conflicts with piping and structure. Where
easements exceed 10 percent duct area, split into two ducts maintaining original duct area.
E. Connect flexible into metal ducts with liquid adhesive plus draw bands.
F. Use crimp joints without bead for joining round duct sizes 8 inches and smaller with crimp in
direction of airflow.
G. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Contractor shall furnish and install ductwork and appurtenances shown on the drawings.
Where shown, transitions in supply ducts shall be held to 15 degrees maximum. unless
conditions prohibit.
B. Ducts shall be run as high as possible in the space. Any relocation of ducts required to avoid
fixtures or obstacles shall be provided by the Contractor at no extra cost.
37
C. All square elbows shall be provided with turning vanes.
D. Install air devices in ductwork in accordance with manufacturers recommendations,
SMACNA guidelines, and code requirements.
E. Obtain manufacturer's inspection and acceptance of fabrication at beginning of installation.
F. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and
maintenance activities.
G. Connect diffusers or troffer boots with flexible duct. Hold in place with strap or clamp.
H. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open
ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system.
L Testing and Balancing: After completing the installation, the Contractor shall make all
necessary adjustments to deliver scheduled air flow. Contractor shall provide test and balance
report for the first completed unit type. Engineer shall review and approve each unit report.
Engineer shall not be responsible for subsequent units constructed without approval of first
unit. Contractor shall make any required performance adjustments to design in accordance
with recommendations from engineer.
3.02 DUCTWORK APPLICATION SCHEDULE
AIR SYSTEM MATERIAL
Low Pressure Supply Ductboard
Return and Relief Flexible
3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Clean duct systems with high power vacuum machines. Protect equipment which may be
harmed by excessive dirt with filters, or bypass during clening. Provide adequate access
into ductwork for cleaning purposes.
END OF SECTION
38
SECTION 15910
DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Volume control dampers.
B. Fire dampers.
C. Backdraft dampers.
D. Air turning devices.
E. Flexible duct connections.
F. Duct access doors.
G. Duct test holes.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 15890 — Ductwork.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 90A — Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
B. SMACNA — Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards.
C. UL 33 — Heat Responsive Links for Fire - Protection Service.
D. UL 555 — Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data to Owner.
B. Product data: Provide product description, list of materials for each service, and location.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate procedures which ensure acceptable
workmanship and installation standards will be achieved.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards, and
as indicated.
B. Fabricate splitter dampers of material same gage as duct to 24 inches size in either
direction, and two gages heavier for sizes over 24 inches.
39
C. Fabricate splitter dampers of single thickness sheet metal to streamline shape. Secure
blade with continuous hinge or rod. Operate with minimum ''A inch diameter rod in self
aligning, universal joint action flanged bushing with set screw.
D. Fabricate single blade dampers for duct sizes to 9 - 1/2 x 30 inch.
E. Fabricate multi -blade damper of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 12 x
72 inch. Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized
channel frame with suitable hardware.
F. Except in round ductwork 12 inches and smaller, provide end bearings. On multiple
blade dampers, provide oil - impregnated nylon or sintered bronze bearings.
G. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi -blade dampers.
Where rod lengths exceed 30 inches provide regulator at both ends.
H. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on stand -off mounting brackets, bases, or
adapters.
2.02 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS
A. Gravity backdraft dampers, size 18x18 inches or smaller, furnished with air moving
equipment, may be air moving equipment manufacturers standard construction.
Contractor shall coordinate size with equipment.
B. Fabricate mult blade, parallel action gravity balanced backdraft dampers of 16 gage
galvanized steel, or extruded aluminum, with blades of maximum 6 inch width, with felt
or flexible vinyl sealed edges, linked together in rattle -free manner with 90 degree stop,
steel ball bearings, and plated steel pivot pin; adjustment device to permit setting for
varying differential static pressure.
2.03 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards, and
as indicated.
B. UL listed fire- retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A,
minimum density 20 oz per sq yd, approximately 6 inches wide, crimped into metal
edging strip.
2.05 DUCT ACCESS DOORS
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards and
as indicated.
B. Review locations prior to fabrication.
C. Fabricate rigid and close -fitting doors of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and quick
fastening locking devices. For insulated ductwork. install minimum one inch thick
insulation with sheet metal cover.
D. Access doors smaller than 12 inches square may be secured with sash locks.
E. Provide two hinges and two sash locks for sizes up to 18 inches square, three hinges and
two compression latches with outside and inside handles for sizes up to 24 x 48 inches.
Provide an additional hinge for larger sizes.
40
F. Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable.
2.06 DUCT TEST HOLES
A. Cut or drill temporary test holes in ducts as required. Cap with neat patches, neoprene
plugs, threaded plugs, or threaded or twist -on metal caps.
B. Permanent test holes shall be factory fabricated, air tight flanged fittings with screw cap.
Provide extended neck fittings to clear insulation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers and smoke dampers at
locations indicated, where ducts and outlets pass through fire rated components, and
where required by authorities having jurisdiction. Install with required perimeter
mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway duct connections, corrosion resistant springs,
bearings, bushings and hinges.
C. Demonstrate re- setting of fire dampers to authorities have jurisdiction and Owner's
representative.
D. Provide backdraft dampers on paralleled fans between fan discharge and header, where
indicated.
E. Provide flexible connections immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with
fans and motorized equipment.
F. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans,
automatic dampers, at fire dampers, and elsewhere as indicated. Provide minimum 8 x 8
inch size for hand access, 18 x 18 inch size for shoulder access, and as indicated.
G. Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes.
END OF SECTION
41
PART l GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Basic Electrical Requ specifically applicable to Division 16 Sections, in addition
to Division 1— General Requirements.
B. Basic and Miscellaneous Electrical Materials and Methods.
1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The general provisions of the Contract, including the General, Supplemental, and Special
Conditions, and the General Requirements apply to the work specified in this section.
1.03 INTENT
A. Whenever used in this division, the term "Contractor" shall be construed to mean the
Electrical Contractor unless specifically called out otherwise. The Electrical Contractor
shall employ an Early Warning Fire Detection System Subcontractor who shall be a
certified fire alarm system specialist and shall be subject to Owners approval.
B. Whenever used in this section, the phrase "provide and install: ", or the word `provide ",
shall be construed to mean that the referred to item shall be furnished and installed along
with all necessary appurtenances to deliver it in satisfactory working order. All necessary
adjusting, cleaning, or testing shall also be included.
C. These specifications are intended to provide for a complete installation, except as herein
specifically excepted. All accessory construction and apparatus necessary for or
advantageous to the operation and testing of the work shall be included. The omission of
specific references to any part of the work necessary for such complete installation shall
not be interpreted as relieving the Contractor from furnishing and installing such parts.
1.04 SCOPE OF WORK
SECTION 16010
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Electrical work shall be furnished by the Contractor, unless noted otherwise in these
specifications, and shall include all labor, materials, tools, equipment, transportation,
fees, etc., for the complete installation and perfect working order of the electrical system.
B. All materials required for the complete installation shall be new and conform to the
manufacturer's published installation recommendations. All materials not fully described
shall be of a high standard of current practice.
C. All wiring, transformers, power sources, board, terminals, modules, other devices, and
testing required to deliver a completely functioning system shall be included. All
materials required for the complete installation shall be new and conform to the
manufacturer's published installation recommendations. All materials not fully described
shall be of a high standard of current practice.
D. Any materials damaged in transit from the factory during delivery to the premises, while
in storage on the premises, while being erected and/or installed. or while being tested.
and until the time for final acceptance, shall be replaced by the contractor without any
additional cost to the Owner.
E. The work shall include. but is not limited to. the following:
I. Extension of existing ground loop around new building addition.
2. Construction of new 277 /480 volt electric service and distribution system.
3. Installation of new lighting in new and renovated building spaces.
42
4. Staged, near total demolition of existing 120/208 volt electric service and
distribution system.
5. Expansion of Early Warning Fire Detection system.
6. Addition and commissioning of a new Building Automation System (BAS).
7. Miscellaneous electrical construction, demolition and renovation in support of
building renovation and expansion.
F. The Electrical Contractor shall refer to other sections of these specifications and •
determine the full extent of his work. He shall provide all wiring for interface to the
mechanical and miscellaneous equipment as shown on the drawings, and shall furnish
and install all conduits, control wiring, relays, control transformers, and other control
devices as required to accomplish the sequence of controls set out in the specifications or
on plans. He shall install all items indicated as being furnished by the Mechanical
Contractor and installed by the Electrical Contractor.
G. Maintain the continuity of the electrical system ground from the service entrance
grounding electrodes throughout the entire system. Conform to Article 250 of the latest
revision of the National Electrical Code. Provide the greater number of higher quality
where the drawings and Code do not coincide. Provide "green wire" copper grounding
conductors in addition to any metallic raceway ground for raceways containing any
conductors operating at 50 volts or more to ground.
H. The Electrical Contractor shall provide conduits, conductors, and fittings necessary for
electric service as shown on the drawings. All electrical equipment required shall be
furnished and installed by the Electrical Contractor unless provided as an integral part of
other equipment (in which case Electrical Contractor shall provide all necessary field
wiring).
It is the intent of the Contract Documents to provide an installation complete in every
respect. In the event that additional details or special construction may be requ for
work indicated or specified in this section or work specified in other sections, it shall be
the responsibility of the Contractor to provide same as well as to provide materials and
equipment usually finished with such systems or required to complete the installation,
whether mentioned or not.
1.05 CODE REQUIREMENTS
A. All material, installation, and testing shall be in accordance with the latest revision of the
National Electric Code and with all Local Codes and ordinances which may be
applicable.
B. All Early Warning Fire Detection System material, installation, and testing shall be in
accordance with the latest revision of the NFPA code and with all Local Codes and
ordinances which may be applicable.
C. The Contractor shall resolve any code violation discovered in contrct documents with the
engineer prior to award of contract. After award of the contract, the Contractor shall
make any corrections or additions necessary for compliance with applicable codes at no
additional cost to Owner.
D. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all utility service fees, permits and inspections.
The owner will reimburse these expenses at 100% of the documented utility or
municipality charge.
1.06 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
43
A. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to provide an installation complete in every
respect. In the event that additional details or special construction may be required for
work indicated or specified in this section or work specified in other sections, it shall be
the responsibility of the Contractor to provide same as well as to provide materials and
equipment usually furnished with such systems or required to complete the installation,
whether mentioned or not.
B. Electrical plans are schematic and do not reflect the true routing and quantities of conduit
and conductors required. Positions of items not located by dimensions are closely
approximated and may be changed where conditions direct. Actual quantities of
conductors and conduit shall be determined by on -site measurements. All components
shall be famished and installed for a complete installation, even though every item may
not be specifically enumerated herein or specifically indicated on the drawings.
1.07 SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor shall submit a complete set of equipment specification sheets and wiring
diagrams for proposed work prior to proceeding on any work. This information shall
include but not be limited to sequence of operation, equipment ratings, layout,
dimensions, and finishes. Work shall proceed only after approval by Owner. After
completion of the work, and prior to final payment, Contractor shall submit complete sets
of "as- built" wiring diagrams.
B. Submittals shall include but not necessarily be limited to:
1. Panelboards
2. Motor Starters
3. Disconnect Switches
4. Luminaires
5. Early Waming Fire Detection Equipment.
1.08 COORDINATION OF WORK
A. Contractor shall cooperate with other trades and coordinate his work for the proper
installation of all components of the job.
1.09 COMPLETION
When all work is complete and ready for final inspection, the following items shall be
accomplished by the Contractor:
A. Thoroughly clean and service all equipment; touch - up any damaged paint finishes.
B. Instruct the Owner's representative in the function and proper operation of all equipment.
C. Deliver to the Owner all equipment warranties and manufacturer's equipment manuals.
D. Make all reasonable tests as required by the Owner or his representative to prove the
integrity of the work, and leave the complete installation in first class condition and ready
for operation.
E. Deliver to the Owner 3 sets of "as- built" wiring diagrams as Indicated in submittals
above. Also provide 3 sets of operating instructions and maintenance and repair data.
1.10 GUARANTEE
44
A. Unless otherwise noted, all equipment and materials shall benew. The contractor shall
guarantee for a period of one (1) year the work installed by him or his subcontractors to
be free from defects of workmanship and materials, and Shag furnish at his own expense
all labor and materials required to fulfill this guarantee. The guarantee shall begin with
the date of final acceptance by the Owner. Any extended or additional warranty required
in other Division 16 sections shall also be required. All guarantees shall include
materials and labor.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide miscellaneous materials of types and ratings consistent with the duties
indicated, and with all explicit requirements. Any materials other than the approved
examples must be explicitly approved by the engineer. Flag any alternate device
selections on shop drawings and product data sheets.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with work of other trades to insure that all electrical interlocks and
connections are properly wired and tested.
B. Supply electrical parts that must be installed by other trades to those trades in due time to
insure unhindered work progress.
END OF SECTION
45
SECTION 16110
CONDUITS & RACEWAYS
PART I GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Rigid metal conduit and fittings
B. Electrical metallic tubing and fittings.
C. Flexible metal conduit and fittings.
D. Surface metal raceways.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated.
B. ANSI C80.3 - Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated.
C. ANSUNEMA FB ! - Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies.
D. FS WW -C -563 - Electrical Metallic Tubing.
E. FS WW - C - 566 - Specification for Flexable Metal Conduit.
F. FS WW - C - 581 - Specification for Galvanized Rigid Conduit.
G. FS W - C - 582 - Conduit, Raceway, Metal , and
Fitting; Surface.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data for surface metal raceways to Owner.
1.04 CODE COMPLIANCE
A. Select raceways which conform to the National Electrical code (NEC) and local codes.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.0I RIGID METAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
A. Rigid steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.; FS WW - C - 581.
B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSUNEMA FB l; threaded type material to match
conduit
2.02 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) AND FITTINGS
A. EMT: ANSI C80.3.; FS WW - C - 563. galvanized tubing.
B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: select from the following:
46
1. ANSI/NEMA FB 1; galvanized steel or cast zinc compression type.
2. For systems with potentials below 50 volts to ground: galvanized steel or
cast zinc compression type, zinc or cadmium plated set screw type.
2.03 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
A. Conduit: FS WW - C - 566; galvanized steel
B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1.
2.04 SURFACE METAL RACEWAY
A. Surface Metal Raceway: FS W - C - 582: Sheet metal channel with fitted cover, suitable
for use as surface metal raceway; comparable to existing.
B. Finish: Buff enamel
B. Fittings: Couplings, elbows, and connectors designed for use with raceway system.
D. Boxes and Extension Rings: Designed for use with raceway systems.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 CONDUIT SIZING, ARRANGEMENT, AND SUPPORT
A. All wiring of all description shall be run in conduit or raceway unless specifically noted
or specified otherwise.
B. Conduits shall be concealed in all finished parts of the building unless otherwise noted.
Where conduits cannot be concealed in finished parts of the building, decorative surface
metal raceways shall be used.
C. Size conduit for conductor type installed; 1/2 inch minimum size. Provide 25% excess
capacity for future additional wire. Spare wire not required unless specifically noted.
D. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present a neat appearance. Route overhead
conduit as high as possible. No conduit shall rest on suspended acoustical ceiling nor
prevent easy removal of ceiling tiles.
E. Route exposed conduit and conduit above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular
to walls and adjacent piping.
F. Maintain minimum 6 inch clearance between conduit and piping. Maintain 12 inch
clearance between conduit and heat sources such as flues, steam pipes, and heating
appliances.
G. Arrange conduit supports to prevent distortion of alignment by wire pulling operations.
Fasten conduit using galvanized straps, lay - in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, or
bolted split stamped galvanized hangers.
H. Group conduit in parallel runs where practical and use conduit rack constructed of steel
channel with conduit straps or clamps. Provide space for 25 percent additional conduit.
L Do not fasten conduit wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove all wire used for temporary
conduit support during construction, before conductors are pulled.
47
J. Support conduit at a maximum of 10 feet on center and not more than 3 feet from each
junction box, cabinet, or fitting.
K. Conduit shall be independently supported to structure. Conduit may be run on existing
trapezes hangers where adequate room is available on trapeze and trapeze is supported to
structure unless otherwise noted. Where existing trapeze hanger is used contractor shall
verify ability of trapeze to support weight of conduit and wire added and verify that space
on trapeze is not allocated for other conduit runs. Attachment of conduit to hangers of
other equipment systems and devices such as sprinkler pipe hangers is not acceptable.
Conduit attached to ceiling grid and hangers is acceptable only where conduit system is
used for power feed to lights in ceiling.
3.02 CONDUIT INSTALLATION
A. Cut conduit square using a saw (not with pipe cutter); de -burr cut ends.
B. Bring conduit to the shoulder of fittings and couplings and fasten securely.
C. Use conduit hubs or sealing lock nuts for fastening conduit to cast boxes, and for
fastening conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp or wet locations.
D. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90 degree bends between boxes.
E. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around bends.
F. Use hydraulic one -shot conduit bender or factory elbows for bends in conduit larger than
2 inch (50mm) size.
G. Avoid moisture traps where possible; where unavoidable, provide junction box with drain
fitting at conduit low point.
H. Use suitable conduit caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and
moisture.
L Provide suitable fish wire in empty conduit, except sleeves and nipples.
J. Install expansion - deflection joints where conduit crosses building expansion joints.
K. Where conduit penetrates fire -rated wall (all walls that rise to under side of slab above)
and floors, over drill hole size by 1/2 inch and seal void around conduit with fire seal
with UL listed fire rating equal to wall or floor rating.
3.03 INSTALLATION - SURFACE METAL RACEWAY
A. Use flathead screws to fasten channel to surfaces. Mount plumb and level.
B. Use suitable insulating bushings and inserts at connections to outlets and corner fittings.
C. Maintain grounding continuity between raceway components to provide a continuous
grounding path.
D. Fastener option: Use clips and straps suitable for the purpose.
3.04 RACEWAY INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Electrical metallic tubing.
48
B. Exposed Dry interior Unfinished Locations: Electrical metallic tubing.
C. Exposed Outdoor Locat ions: Rigid galvanized steel conduit
D. Exposed Dry Interior Finished Locations: Decorative surface metal raceway.
49
SECTION 16120
WIRE AND CABLE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Building wire.
B. Early Waming Fire Detection System Wire.
C. Cable
D. Wiring connections and terminations.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. NEMA WC 5 - Thermoplastic- insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and
Distribution of Electrical Energy.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data to Owner.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 BUILDING WIRE
A. Thermoplastic insulated Building Wire: NEMA WC 5.
B. Select wiring suitable for the application involved and with applicable provisions of the
NEC. Unless otherwise indicated, or specifically noted by engineer as an approved
deviation on shop drawings, provide copper conductors with type THHNNITWEIN
insulation, not less than #12 AWG, and with ampacity after derating at least equal to their
overcurrent protection.
C. All wire and cable shall be copper. Absolutely no aluminum will be accepted.
2.02 EARLY WARNING FIRE DETECTION WIRE
A. Fire alarm power branch circuits: Building wire as specified above.
B. Initiating and Signal Circuits: Copper conductor, 300 volt insulation, rated 60 degree C,
individual conductors twisted together, and covered with an overall PVC jacket; UL
listed. Not less than #8 AWG nor less than Manufacturer's recommended size for the
application.
C. Select wires and cables to comply with the fire alarm system manufacturer's
recommendations for the application involved, and with applicable provisions of NEC
Article 760, especially paragraphs 760 - 16 and 760 - 17.
D. All wire and cable shall be copper. Absolutely no aluminum will be accepted.
PART 3 EXECUTION
50
3.01 GENERAL WIRING METHODS
A. Use no wire smaller than 12 AWG for power and Lighting circuits.
B. Use 10 AWG conductor for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuit home runs longer than 75
feet, and for 20 ampere, 277 volt branch circuit home runs longer than 200 feet.
C. Splice only in junction or outlet boxes.
D. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panel boards.
3.02 WIRING INSTALLATION IN RACEWAYS
A. Pull all conductors into a raceway at the same time. Use UL listed wire pulling lubricate
for puling 4 AWG and larger wires.
B. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway system before installing conductors.
3.03 CABLE INSTALLATION
A. No exposed cables will be accepted. All cables shall be installed inside conduit or
raceway.
B. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors. Splice only in accessible junction boxes.
3.04 WIRING CONNECTIONS AND TERMINATIONS
A. Splice only in accessible junction boxes.
B. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper wire splices and
taps, 8 AWG and larger. For 10 AWG and smaller, use insulated spring wire connectors
with plastic caps.
C. Thoroughly clean wires before installing lugs and connectors.
D. Make splices, taps and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors without
perceptible temperature rise.
E. Terminate spare conductors with electrical tape.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection and testing shall be performed.
B. Inspect wire and cable for physical damage and proper connection.
B. Torque test conductor connections and terminations to manufacturer's recommended
values.
C. Perform continuity test on all power and equipment branch circuit conductors. Verify
proper phasing connections.
3.06 WIRE AND CABLE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. See section 16110 for conduit and raceway requirements.
END OF SECTION
51
SECTION 16130
BOXES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Wall and ceiling outlet boxes.
B. Pull and junction boxes.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 16110 - Conduit and Raceways.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/NEMA FB I - Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies.
C. ANSUNEMA OS 1- Sheet -steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box
supports.
D. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
E. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment 1000 Volts Maximum.
1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements for ANSI/NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code).
B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for
purpose specified above.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Verify field measurements are as shown on Drawings.
C. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned.
Install at location required for box to serve intended purpose.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 OUTLET BOXES
A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: ANS1/NEMA OS I, galvanized steel.
B. Cast boxes: NEMA FB I, Type FD aluminum or cast ferroalloy.
C. Finish: Finish and color of surface mounted boxes in finished areas to match finsih of
device attached to box.
2.02 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
52
A. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.
B. Surface - Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, flat flanged, surface - mounted
junction box.
1. Material: Galvanized cast iron or Cast aluminum.
2. Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover
screws.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install electrical boxes as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire
pulling, equipment connections and compliance with regulatory requirements.
B. Install electrical boxes to maintain headroom and to present neat mechanical appearance.
C. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas
only.
D. Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches from
ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaries.
E. Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements.
F. Use flush mounting outlet boxes in finished areas. (Surface Metal Raceway Systems may
be used where indicated in Section 16110.)
G. Do not install flush mounting boxes back to back in walls: provide minimum 6 inch
separation. Provide minimum 24 inches separation in fire rated or accoutic rated walls.
H. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to
allow for surface finish thickness.
I. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness.
J. Support Boxes independently of conduit.
K. Use cast outlet box in exterior locations exposed to the weather and wet locations.
Provide with gasketted cover plate.
L. Large Pull Boxes: Boxes larger than 100 cubic inches in volume or 12 inches in any
dimension.
1. Interior Dry Locations: Use hinged enclosure under provisions of Section
16160.
2. Other Locations: Use surface- mounted cast metal box.
3.02 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Coordinate installation of outlet boxes for products furnished under Section 16721.
3.03 A. Adjust flush - mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material.
B. Install knock out closures in unused box openings.
53
1.0 GENERAL
2.0 PRODUCTS
End of Section
SECTION 16140
WIRING DEVICES
A. Switches, Generally: Lighting for corridors, student toilets, and public spaces shall be
switched by means of key - operated switches located in Custodian's closets, or storage
rooms designated by AISD representative. All lighting switches shall be specification
grade rated at 20 amps.
B. Receptacles, Generally: Receptacles shall be 20 amp specification grade three wire
grounding type.
C. G.F.C.1 Receptacles: Receptacles located in rest - roams, crawl spaces, within 6' of sinks,
on the eterior of the building, or where subject to moisture shall be G.F.C.I. protected.
All G.F.C.I. resets and the outlets they serve shall be in the same room or location.
G.F.C.I. breakers shall not be used.
D. Mounting Heights: Mounting heights of switches shall comply with all state and local
requirements regarding handicapped access. Mounting height of receptacles shall be 15"
above finished floor or 6" above countertops.
E. Prohibited Installation:
No receptacles or switches shall be mounted in exterior locations, except within
equipment yards or at roof - mounted HVAC equipment locations.
2.1 WALL SWITCHES
A. Type. Quiet type, back and side wired switches as shown.
B. Rating. 20 amperes, 120/208 volts.
C. Listing. UL 20 and Federal Specification W - S - 896.
2.2 RECEPTACLES
A. Type. Back and side wired receptables, as shown.
B. Rating. Scheduled on drawings.
C. Listing. UL 498 and Federal Specification W-C -596
2.3 DEVICE COLOR
A. Supply regular service items in color approved by the Architect.
END OF SECTION
54
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 16190
SUPPORTING DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Conduit and equipment supports.
B. Anchors and fasteners.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. NECA - National Contractors Assoc.
B. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements ofANSI/NFPA 70.
C. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for
purpose specified and shown.
A. Materials and Finishes: Provide adequate corrosion resistance. Materials subject to
weather shall be coated to resist corrosion. Zinc galvanized coatings are acceptable.
B. Provide materials, sizes, and types of anchors, fasteners and supports to carry loads of
equipment and conduit. Consider weight of wire in conduit when selecting products.
C. Anchors and Fasteners:
1. Concrete Structural Elements: Use expansion anchors.
2. Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps.
3. Concrete Surfaces: Use expansion anchors.
4. Hollow Masonary, and Plaster: Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners.
5. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors.
6. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws.
7. Wood Elements: Use wood screws.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
55
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide anchors, fasteners, and supports in accordance with NECA "Standard of
Installation".
D. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, or conduit, unless other
wise noted.
D. Do not use spring steel clips and clamps.
E. Do not use powder - actuated anchors.
F. Obtain permission from Owner before drilling or cutting structural members.
G. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel. Rigidly weld members or use
hexagon head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use
spring washers under all nuts.
H. Install surface- mounted cabinets and panel boards with minimum of four anchors.
I. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panel boards
one inch (25mm) off wall.
J. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panel boards
recessed in hollow partitions.
END OF SECTION
56
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Signs and nameplates.
B. Wire and cable markers.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
SECTION 16195
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Signs and nameplates: Engraved three layer laminated plastic.
1. General Electrical: Black letters on a white back ground.
2. Early Warning Fire Detection: White letters on a red back ground.
B. Wire and Cable Markers: Cloth markers, split sleeve or tubing type.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates.
B. Install nameplates parallel to equipment lines.
C. Secure nameplates to equipment fronts or mounting surface using screws, rivets, or
adhesive.
D. Embossed tape will not be permitted for any application.
3.02 SIGN & NAMEPLATE ENGRAVING SCHEDULE
A. Provide nameplates to identify all electrical distribution an control equipment, and loads.
Letter height: 1/8 inch for individual switches and loads served, 1/4 inch for distribution
and control equipment identification.
B. Provide signs or nameplates to explain purpose or function of devices or systems not
mounted in self - explanatory context or as required by Code.
For example:
1. Relays and solenoids operated remotely by EWFD System.
C. Provide warning and operational instruction signs where necessary to insure safety for
57
personnel and equipment. Warn against concealed hazards, and disclose any special
precautions not normally required.
D. Provide signs and nameplates ofminimum letter height as scheduled below.
1. Cabinet, panel, and control center nameplates: 1/4"
2. Individual device nameplates and explanatory signs: 1/8"
3. Warning signs: Heading appropriate to hazard and context, but not less than
1/4 "; sub -text, 1/4"
4. Early Warning Fire Detection: 1/2"
END OF SECTION
58
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
SECTION 16441
ENCLOSED SWITCHES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fusible switches.
B. Fuses.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. NEMA KS I - Enclosed Switches.
B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
C. UL 198C - High- Interrupting Capacity Fuses; Current Limiting Type/
D. UL 198E - Class R fuses.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under Division 1.
B. Product Data: Provide switch ratings and enclosure dimensions.
59
D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use
stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include
instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and
starting of Product.
A. Perform work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation.
B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.05 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section
with minimum three years experience.
1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Furnish products listed and classified by UL as suitable for purpose specified and shown.
1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish under Division I.
B. Provide three of each size and type flue installed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ENCLOSED SWITCHES.
A. Fusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1, Type HD load interrupter enclosed knife
switch with externally operable handle defeatably interlocked to prevent thoughtlessly
opening front cover with switch in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position.
Provide fuse clips designed to accommodate Class R (up to 600 A) or L (over 600 A)
fuses.
B. Enclosures: NEMA KS I.
I. Interior Dry Locations: Type I.
2. Exterior Locations: Type 3R.
2.02 FUSES
A. Description: Current limiting, dual - element fuse, 150 volt, UI 198E Class R (up to 600
A) or L (over 600 A).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install disconnect switches where indicated.
B. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches.
B. Provide adhesive label on inside door of each switch indicating UL class and size for
replacement.
END OF SECTION
60
SECTION 16470
PANELBOARDS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Distribution Panelboards - Circuit Breaker Type.
B. Lighting and Appliance Panelboards.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 16190 — Supporting Devices.
B. Section 1619 — Electrical Identification: Engraved nameplates.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. NECA (National Electrical Contractors Assoc.) "Standard of Installation ".
B. NEMA A13 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers.
C. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards.
D. NEMA PB 1.1 - Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of
Panelboards Rated 600 volts or less.
E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Division 1.
A. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations
of use stipulated by Product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling,
protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation.
1.06 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Product specified in this
section with minimum three years experience.
1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirement of NFPA 70.
B. Fumish products listed and classified by UL as suitable for purpose specified and
indicated.
61
1.08 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify that field measurements are in agreement with approved electrical room layout
drawings.
1.09 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Provide two of each panelboard key.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PANELBOARDS
A. NEMA PB 1, circuit breaker type.
B. Panelboard Bus: Copper, ratings as indicated. Provide copper ground bus in each
panelboard.
C. Minimum integrated short circuit rating: 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 240 volt
panelboards; unless otherwise indicated.
D. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB I, bolt -on type thermal magnetic trip circuit
breakers, with common trip handle for all poles. Do not use tandem circuit breakers.
Exception: Square D I -line type panelboards may use standard I -line plug on Breaker
attachment.
E. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, Type 1 unless otherwise indicated, or obviously required for
the location.
F. Cabinet Front: Surface or flush type as scheduled, fastened with concealed trim clamps
(or hinged on one side, if so scheduled), concealed outer door hinge, flush lock all keyed
alike. Finish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install panel boards in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1.
B. Install panel boards plumb. Install recessed panelboards flush with wall finishes.
Provide supports in accordance with Section 16190.
C. Height: 6 ft to top of panel board; install panelboards taller than 6 ft (2m) with bottom
no more than 6 inches above floor.
D. Provide filter plates for unused spaces in panel boards.
E. Provide typed circuit directory for each branch circuit panel board. Revise directory to
reflect circuiting changes made during the project.
F. Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 16195. Label panel
with name as scheduled, voltage. phase, wire configuration information and feeder
source.
62
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Where contract documents indicate phase assignments for branch circuits, do not deviate
without approval of the engineer. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard
feeder, report and overloaded conductors or severely imbalanced phase loadings (over 20
A and over 20% difference) to engineer.
B. Where phase assignments are not indicated, plan phase assignments of circuits to insure
that feeder phase lnada balance as well as practical. Do not violate conductor phase color
coding if phase assignments are changed to balance phases. Measure steady state load
currents at each panel board feeded, and revise phase assignments as necessary to correct
and overloaded conductors or severely imbalanced phase loadings (over 20 A and over
20% difference). Report and uncorrected problems to engineer.
C. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: Inspect for physical damage, proper alignment,
anchorage, and grounding. Check proper installation and tightness of connections for
circuit breakers, fusible switches, and fuses.
END OF SECTION
63
SECTION 16481
ENCLOSED MOTOR CONTROLLERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Magnetic motor starters.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 16190 - Supporting Devices.
B. Section 16195 - Electrical Identification: Engraved nameplates.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
B. UL 198C - High- Interrupting Capacity Fuses; Current Limiting Type.
C. UL 198E - Class R Fuses.
D. NECA " Standard of Installation ", published by National Electrical Contractors Assoc.
E. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers.
F. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies.
G. NEMA ICS 6 - Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems.
H. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide catalog sheets showing voltage, controller size, ratings and size of
switching and over current protective devices, short circuit ratings, dimensions and
enclosure details.
B. Test Reports: Indicate field test and inspection procedures and test results.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations
of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements.
Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation,
installation, and starting of Product.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with NECA Standard of installation.
B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.06 QUALIFICATIONS
64
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this
section with minimum three years experience.
1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements ofNFPA 70.
B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 AUTOMATIC CONTROLLERS
A. Magnetic Motor Controllers: NEMA ICS 2, AC general - purpose Class A magnetic
controller for induction motors rated in horsepower.
B. Coil operating voltage: As indicated, or if not indicated, 120 volts, 60 hertz.
C. Overload Relay: NEMA ICS; bimetal.
D. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6 Type 1 or 3R as required by application.
2.02 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND FEATURES
A. Auxiliary Contracts: NEMA ICS 2, 1 normally open, normally closed field convertible
contract in addition to seal -in contact.
B. Cover Mounted Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 2, standard duty type.
C. Pilot Device Contracts: NEMA ICS 2, Form Z, rated 150A.
D. Indicating Lights: LED or neon type.
E. Selector Switches: Rotary type; three position; Hand - Off -Auto labeling.
F. Relays: NEMA ICS 2.
G. Control Power Transformers: Unless otherwise noted, 120 volt secondary in each motor
starter. Provide fused primary and secondary, and bond unfused leg of secondary to
enclosure.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install enclosed controllers where indicated in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
B. Install enclosed controllers plumb. Provide supports in accordance with Section 16190.
C. Height: 4 ft (I2 M) to operating handle, where possible, unless otherwise noted.
D. install fuses in fusible switches. Provide furs size indicated, or if not indicated provide
fitse size equal to switch rating.
65
E. Select and install overload heater elements in motor controllers to match installed motor
characteristics.
F. Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 161945.
F. Provide neatly typed label inside each motor controller door identifying motor served,
nameplate horsepower, full load amperes, code letter, service factor, and voltage/phase
rating
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect and test each enclosed controller to NEMA ICS 2.
END OF SECTION
66
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Interior luminaires and accessories.
B. Ballasts.
C. Lamps.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
SECTION 16510
INTERIOR LUMINAIRES
A. Section 16130 - Boxes
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI C78.379 - Electric Lamps - Incandescent and High- Intensity Discharge Reflector
Lamps - Classification of Beam Patterns.
B. ANSI C82.I - Ballasts for Fluorescent Lamps - Specifications/
C. ANSUNFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
D. ANSUNFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.
E. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices Dimensional Requirements.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data to Architect and Engineer for review.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each luminare that is not a
standard product of the manufacturer.
C. Product Data: Provide dimensions, ratings, and performance data.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use
stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements.
D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,
examination, preparation, and installation of product.
1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Submit record documents to Owner.
B. Accurately record actual locations of each luminaire.
1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit operation and maintenance information to Owner.
67
B. Maintenance Data: Include replacement parts list.
1.07 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing manufacturing products specified in this section
with minimum of three years experience.
1.08 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of ANSIINFPA 70.
B. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
C. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. a suitable for
purpose specified and shown.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 LUMINAIRES
A. Furnish products as specified on Drawings.
B. Install Ballasts and specified accessories at factory unless otherwise notes.
C. Description: Downlight type luminairie with ballast installed by luminaire manufacturer.
D. Material: Sheet Metal housing.
E. Mounting: Ceiling surface unless noted otherwise.
E. Ballast: Manufacturer's standard energy saving model, matched to lamp characteristics,
rated as scheduled.
G. Lamp: As scheduled.
T. Accessories: As scheduled.
2.02 BALLASTS
A. Fluorescent Ballast:
1. Description: ANSI C82.1, high power type electromagnetic ballast.
2. Provide energy saving ballast suitable for lamps specified.
3. Voltage: As scheduled.
2.03 LAMPS
4. Source Quality Control: Certify ballast design and construction by certified
Ballast Manufacturer's Inc.
A. Provide lamp type scheduled.
68
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrate for luminaires.
B. Examine each luminaire to determine suitability for lamps specified.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install suspended luminaires using pendants supported from swivel hangers where
indicated. Provide pendant length required to suspend luminaire at indicated height.
C. Support luminaires larger than 2 x 4 foot (600 by 1200 mm) size independent of ceiling
Gaming.
D. Install surface mounted luminaires and adjust to align with building lines and with each
other. Secure to prohibit movement.
E. Install wall mounted luminaires at height to allow unobstructed view of device.
F. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.
G. Connect luminaires as indicated.
F. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with installation suitable
for temperature conditions within luminaire.
G. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
I. Install specified lamps in each luminaire.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection
and operation.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Aim and adjust luminaires as indicated on Drawings.
B. Relamp luminaires that have failed lamps at Substantial Completion
3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials.
B. Remove dirt and debris from enclosure.
C. Clean photemetric contol surfaces as recommended by manufacturer
D. Clean finishes and touch up damage.
69